AND WHEREAS the President is satisfied that circumstances exist

which render it necessary to take immediate action.

NOW THEREFORE, in pursuance of the proclamation of Emergency

of the fourteenth day of October, 1999. And Provisional Constitution
Order No.1 of 1999. As well as order No.9 of 1999. And in exercise of
all powers enabling him in that behalf, the President of the Islamic
Republic of Pakistan is pleased to make promulgate the following
Ordinance.

CHAPTER 1-PRELIMANRY

1.Short title, extent and commencement:-

(1). This Ordinance may be called the National Highways Safety
Ordinance, 2000.
2). It extends to the whole of Pakistan.
3). It shall come into force at once.

2. Definitions:-
(1) In this Ordinance, unless there is anything repugnant in the
subject or context.

i. ”Ambulance” means a vehicle designed for the carriage of sick,

wounded or invalid persons or animals.
ii. ”Animal drawn vehicle” means a road vehicle designed and
constructed primarily for carrying persons or goods and is propelled
solely by one or more domestic animals.

1
 iii. ”Axle weight” means in relation to an axle of a motor vehicle the
total weight transmitted by the several wheels attached to the axle to
the surface whereon the vehicle rests.
iv. ”Bicycle” means nay road vehicle having at least two wheels
propelled solely by muscular energy of the person on that vehicle.
v. ”Board” means the Medical Board constituted under sub-section
(3) of section 4;
vi. ”Carriage way ” means the part of the road normally used by
vehicular traffic;
vii. ”Certificate of registration” means the certificate issued by a
competent authority to the effect that a motor vehicle has been
registered in accordance with law for the time being in force.
viii. ”Contract carriage” means a road vehicle which carries a
passenger or passengers for hire or reward under a contract expressed
or implied for the use of the vehicle as a whole at or for a fixed or
agreed rate or sum and from one point to another without stopping to
pick up or set down along the line of route passengers not included in
the contract and includes a motor cab not withstanding that the
passengers may pay separate fares.
ix. ”Cycle tract” means the portion of road partitioned by curbing,
guardrails and other similar structures or road making set aside for
bicycle passage.

2
 x. ”Delivery vehicle” means any goods vehicle the registered laden
weight of which does not exceed twenty-five hundred kilograms.
xi. ”Driver” means any person who drives a motor vehicle or an
animal drawn vehicle on a national highway.
xii. ”Fares” means the amount prescribed or agreed for a journey by a
stage carriage and includes sums payable for a season ticket or in
respect of the hire of a contract carriage.
xiii. ”Footpath” means the portion of a road partitioned by curbing,
guardrails and other similar structures or road markings intended for
pedestrian passage.
xiv. ”Good” include livestock and anything (other then equipment
ordinary used with the vehicle ) carried by a vehicle except living
persons but does not include luggage or personal effects carried in a
road or in a trailer attached to a vehicle or the personal luggage of
passengers traveling in the vehicle.
xv. “Goods vehicles” means any motor vehicle constructed or adapted
for use for the carriage of goods or any motor vehicle including any
animal drawn vehicle not so constructed or adapted when used for the
carriage of goods, solely or in addition passengers.
xvi. “Government” means the Federal Government.
xvii. “Gross vehicle weight” means load of all axles of a goods vehicle
transmitted by several wheels attached to all axle to the surface
whereon wheels rest.

3
xviii. “Heavy transport vehicle” means a transport vehicle, the
registered axle weight of which exceeds five thousand kilogram, or the
registered laden weight of which exceeds six thousand five hundred
kilograms.
xix. “Intersection” means any level crossroads, junction or fork
including the open areas formed by such crossroads, junctions or
forks.
xx. “Invalid carriage” means a motor vehicle the unladen weight of
which does not exceed one thousand kilograms specially designed and
constructed and not merely adapted, for the use of a person suffering
from some physical defect or disability and used solely by or for such
a person;
xxi. “Laden weight” means the actual weight of the vehicle as loaded
with the crew and passengers and the load carried on it;
xxii. “Lane” means any one the longitudinal strips into which the
carriage way is divisible, whether or not defined by longitudinal road
markings, which is wide enough for one moving line of motor vehicles
other then motor cycles.
xxiii. “Level crossing” means any level intersection between a road and
railway.
xxiv. “License” means the document issued by a competent authority
authorizing person specified therein to drive a motor vehicle of any
specified class or description or any animal drawn vehicle.

4
 xxv. “Licensing authority” means an authority empowered to grant
licenses under this Ordinance.
xxvi. “Light transport vehicle” means any public service vehicle other
than a motor cab, or any goods vehicle other than a heavy transport
vehicle or a delivery van.
xxvii. “Locomotive” means a motor vehicle which is itself not
constructed to carry any load (other than equipment used for the
purpose of propulsion), the unladen weight of which exceeds seven
thousand kilograms but does not include a road roller.
xxviii. “Moped” means any two-wheeled or three-wheeled vehicle which
is fitted with an internal combustion engine having a cylinder capacity
not exceeding fifty cubic centimeters and maximum design speed not
exceeding fifty kilometers per hour.
xxix. “Motor cab” means any motor vehicle constructed, adapted or
used to carry not more than four passengers excluding the driver, used
for hire or reward, but does not include a motor cycle, an invalid
persons carriage or a moped.
xxx. “Motor car” means any motor vehicle constructed, adapted or
used to carry not more than six passengers excluding driver not used
for hire or reward but does not include motor cycle, invalid persons
carriage or a moped.

5
 xxxi. “Motor cycle” means any two wheeled vehicle, with or without a
side car, which is equipped with a propelling engine but does not
include a moped.
xxxii. “Motor rickshaw” means any motor vehicle with three wheels,
constructed, adapted or used to carry not more than four persons
including the driver, the unladen weight of which does not exceed
eight hundred fifty kilograms.
xxxiii. “Motor vehicle” means any mechanically propelled vehicle which
is normally used for carrying persons or goods by road or for drawing,
on the road vehicles used for the carriage of persons or goods.
xxxiv. “Motorway” means a road especially designed and built for motor
vehicles which does not serve the properties bordering on it except at
special points and has separate carriage ways for the two directions of
the traffic and does not cross at level with any road, railway, tramway,
cycle tract or footpath;
xxxv. “National highway” means a national highway as defined in the
National Highway Authority Act, 1991(XI 1991); and includes a road
declared to be a national highway under the said Act;
xxxvi. “Overtaking: course means a manocuvre when a vehicle passes
the side or another vehicle by changing its course and then proceeding
to the front of the said vehicle.
xxxvii. “Owner” means the person in whose name the road vehicle is
registered and include

6
 a. a transferee of the vehicle from such persons.
b. In relation to a road vehicle which is the subject of a hire
purchase agreement, the person in possession of the vehicle under
that agreement:
c. Where the person in whose name the road vehicle is
registered or the person in possessions of the road vehicle under a
hire purchase agreement is
(i) A minor, the guardian of such a minor;
(ii) A company registered under the Companies ordinance. 1984
(XLVII of 1984) the directors of such company.
(iii) A society registered under the Societies Registration Act.
1860 (XXI of 1860) or under any law relating to co-operative
societies, the principal officer of such society by whatever
designation known;
(iv) A firm, all the partners of such firm, and
(v) Any other association of persons, all the members of such
association.
Provided that where such company, firm, society or other
association of persons has given notice to the registering authority
that it has nominated
A director, partner, office-bearer, member or officer, as the case may
be of the company, firm, society or association to be the person

7
 nominated shall alone be deemed to be the owner for the purpose of
this Ordinance.
xxxviii. “Parking” means that a vehicle is stationary for any reason other
than need avoid interference with another road user or collision or
to comply with traffic regulations, and if the period during which
the vehicle is stationary is not limited to the time required to pick
up or set down persons or goods.
xxxix. “Passengers” means every person including any employee of the
owner or permit-holder travelling in the motor vehicle.
xl. “Pedestrians crossing” means that portion of a road marked by road
signs or road markings and set aside for pedestrians to use for
crossing the road;
xli. “Patrol post” means a police post on a national highway having
jurisdiction within the area specified by the Government:
xlii. “Permit” means the document issued by the Provincial Transport
Authority, or a Regional Transport Authority, authorizing the use
of a transport vehicle as a contract carriage or stage carriage, or
authorizing the owner as a private carrier to use such vehicle.
xliii. “Police officer” mean a police officer in uniform.
xliv. “Prescribed” means prescribed by rules made under this Ordinance.
xlv. “Private carrier” means an owner of a transport vehicle other than
public carrier who uses that vehicle solely for the carriage of goods

8
 which are property or the carriage of which is necessary for the
purpose of his business not being a business providing a transport;
xlvi. “Public carrier” means an owner of a transport vehicle who
transport or undertakes to transport goods, to any public whether for
hire or reward and includes any person, body, association or
company engaged in the business of carrying goods of persons
associated with that person, body, association or company for the
purpose of having their goods transported.
xlvii. “Public service vehicle” means any road vehicle used or adapted to
be used for the carriage of passengers for hire or reward and
includes a motor cab or contract carriage.
xlviii. “Registered laden weight” means in respect of any vehicle the total
weight certified and registered by the registering authority as
permissible for that vehicle.
xlix. “Registering authority” means any authority empowered to register
road vehicles under this Ordinance.
l. “Road” means any portion of the strip designed or ordinary used by
vehicular traffic inclusive of shoulders,
li. “Road marking” means a marking which points out restrictions
with reference to traffic on a road and the lines of tracks, points and
stones drawn on the surface of a road.
lii. “Road sign” means a sign board which points out a regulation or
direction concerning the traffic on a road.

9
 liii. “Road vehicle” means any motor vehicle designed and constructed
for operating on road including animal drawn vehicle and bicycle.
liv. “Schedule” means a schedule to this Ordinance.
lv. “Shoulder” means that long and narrow portion of ground separate
from the vehicular road, at the edge of a road or a roadside where
no side-walk is established or set aside as passage for pedestrians or
reserved for stoppage of motor vehicle.
lvi. “Signal” means a device which is operated by electric power and
gives indications for traffic control by appropriate lights.
lvii. “Single axle weight” means load of an axle of a goods vehicle
transmitted by several wheels attached to that axle to the surface
whereon the wheels rest;
lviii. “Stage carrier” means a road vehicle carrying or adapted to carry
more than six persons excluding the driver which carries passengers
for hire or reward at separate fares paid or for individual passengers
either for the whole journey or stages of the journey:
lix. “Tandem axle weight” means load of a twin-axle (two axles centre-
to-centre spaced between forty to forty-eight inches) of a goods
vehicle transmitted by the several wheels attached to that twin-axle
assembly to the surface whereon the wheels rest:
lx. “Tractor” means motor vehicle which is not itself constructed to
carry any load other then equipment used for the purpose of

10
 propulsion the unladen weight of which does not exceed seven
thousand kilograms but does not include a road-roller:
lxi. “Traffic signs” includes all signals, signs, posts or other devices for
the information, guidance or direction of drivers of road vehicles:
lxii. “Trailer” means any vehicle other than a side-car and intended to be
drawn by a goods vehicle for the carriage of goods:
lxiii. “Transport vehicle” means a public service vehicle, a goods vehicle,
a locomotive or a tractor then a tractor with or without trailer used
solely for agricultural purposes:
lxiv. “Tridem axle weight” means the load of a tri-axle (three axles, the
outer two axles centre-to-centre spaced between eighty to ninety-six
inches) of a goods vehicle transmitted by the several wheels
attached to tri-axle assembly to the surface whereon the wheels rest:
lxv. “Tyre pressure” means inflation pressure of tyres of goods vehicle:
lxvi. “Unladen weight” means the weight of a vehicle or trailer,
including all equipment ordinarily used within the vehicle or trailer
when working, but excluding the weight of the driver or attendant,
and where alternative parts or bodies are used, the unladen weight
of the vehicle means the weight of the vehicle with the heaviest
such alternative part of body:
lxvii. “Weigh station” means stations incorporating static and weigh-in-
motion(WIM) devices installed to measure and enforce legal load
limits: and

11
lxviii. “Weight” means the total weight transmitted for the time being by
the wheels of a vehicle to the surface on which the vehicle rests:
2) The words and expressions used, but not defined in this Ordinance,
shall have the meanings respectively assigned to them in the
Provincial Motor Vehicle Ordinance, 1965 (W.P Ord. XIX of 1965).

CHAPTER II-LICENSING

3.Prohibition on driving without license :- No person shall drive a

road vehicle or animal drawn vehicle on a national highway unless he
holds and carries on this person a valid driving license issued to drive
the particular class and type of vehicle.

4.Age limit in connection with driving of road vehicle :-(1) No

person shall drive on a national highway-
(a) a motor cycle or a motor car, otherwise than as a paid
employee unless he has attained the age of eighteen years;

(b) a transport vehicle, a public service vehicle, a motor

car or an animal drawn vehicle as a paid employee unless he
has attained the age of twenty-one years, and

(c) a transport vehicle above the age of sixty years.

(2) No fresh license for a transport vehicle shall be issued unless

the license bears an effective endorsement by the licensing
authority that the person holding such a license has furnished a
certificate in form “B” signed by the Chairman of the Medical
Board as specified in the First Schedule.

(3) The Government may constitute medical Boards as specified

in the Second Schedule which shall meet periodically on a pre

12
 designated time, day and place to test and certify persons required
under this Ordinance.

5. Owners of road vehicle not to permit any person to drive

contravention of section 3 or section 4 :-No owner or person Incharge
of a road vehicle shall cause or permit any person, who does not satisfy
the provision of section 3 or section 4, to drive any vehicle.

6.Grant of license :- (1) Any person who is not disqualified under

section 4 for driving a road vehicle, and who is not for the time being
disqualified for holding or obtaining a license, may apply to the
prescribed licensing authority for the issue of a license.

2). Every application under sub-section (1) shall be in Form “A”

as set forth in the First Schedule and shall be signed by, or bear
the thumb impression of the applicant in two places, and contain
the information specified therein.

3). Where the application is for a license to drive a transport

vehicle, or where in any other case the licensing authority for
reasons to be stated in writing so requires. the application shall be
accompanied by a medical certificate in
Form ”B” signed by the Chairman of the Medical Board as laid
down in the First Schedule.

4). Every application for a license to drive a motor vehicle or an

animal drawn vehicle shall be accompanied by three copies of
recent passport size photograph of the applicant.

5). If from the application, or from the medical certificate

referred to in sub-section(3), it appears that the applicant is
suffering from any disease or disability which is likely to be a
source of danger to the public or the passengers the licensing
authority shall refuse to issue the license, provided that the
applicant may, except where he suffers from a disease or disability

13
specified in the Third Schedule, request to be subjected to a test of
his fitness or ability to drive a motor vehicle of a particular
construction or design, and if he passes such test to the
satisfaction of the licensing authority and is not otherwise
disqualified, the licensing authority shall grant him a license to
drive such vehicle as the licensing authority may specify in the
license.

6). No license shall be issued to any applicant unless he passes

to the satisfaction of the licensing authority the tests of
competence specified in the Fourth Schedule and possesses a
personal copy of the most recent official version of the Highway
Motorway Code.

7). The test of competence of driving skills shall be carried out

in a vehicle of the class to which the application refers and for the
purposes of Part- IV of the Fourth Schedule a person who passes
the test in driving-

(a) a heavy transport vehicle shall be deemed to have also

passed the test in driving any motor vehicle other than a
motorcycle or an earthmoving or road construction
machinery; and

(b) a light transport vehicle shall be deemed also to have

passes the test in driving a motor car, a motor cab and a
delivery van.

8). No license shall be issued to any applicant to drive transport

vehicle unless he has held for a period of not less than three
years, immediately preceding the making of the application, an
effective license to drive a road vehicle other than a motorcycle ,
an invalid persons carriage or a road-roller.

14
 9). When application has been duly made to the prescribed
licensing authority and the applicant has satisfied such authority
of his knowledge of the signs, rules, physical fitness and of his
competence to park and drive the vehicle of the class to which the
applicant refers and has paid the prescribed fee, the authority shall
grant the applicant a license unless-

(a) the applicant is disqualified under section 4 for driving a

road vehicle or is for the time being disqualified for holding
or obtaining a license.

(b) The licensing authority is satisfied that from the medical test
it appears that he is suffering from any disease or disability
specified in the Third Schedule or any other disease or
disability which is likely to cause the driving by him of a
road vehicle to be a source of danger to the public or to the
passengers; and

(c) An endorsement refused under clause (a) shall be effective

for a period of twelve months from the date thereof but the
said period may, from time t time, be extended by the
licensing authority by a further period of twelve months at
ant one time by recording reasons in writing.

(7). Form and contents of license :- (1) Every lcene to drive a road
vehicle shall contain the information required in Form “C” of the First
Schedule and shall have affixed thereto one of the photographs along
with the signature or thumb impression given on the application for
license.

(2) A license shall specify whether the holder is entitled to drive as a

paid employee and whether he is entitled to drive a public service
vehicle and shall further be expressed as entitling the holder to drive a
road vehicle of one or more of the following classes, namely :-

15
 a) Motorcycle upto 80 cc
b) Motorcycle more than 80 cc
c) Three wheeler
d) Invalid person‟s carriage
e) Motorcar/motor cab
f) Light transport vehicle
g) Heavy transpport vehicle
h) Road construction machinary
i) Tractor/agricultural machinary
j) A vehicle of a specified description (description to be
attached)

(8) Addition to license :- (1) Any person holding a license issued

under this Ordinance who is not for the time being disqualified for
holding or obtaining a license may apply in Form “D” ass set forth in
the First Schedule. To the licensing authority for the addition of any
class of vehicle to the license specified in sub-section (2) of section 7.

(2) The provisions of section 6 shall apply to an application

under this section as if the application were for the grant of a
license under that section to drive the class of vehicle which
the applicant desires to be added to his license.
(3) No fee, other than a fee for the test of competence to drive,
shall be charged for an addition to a license under this
section.

(9) Extent of validity of license :- a license issued under this

Ordinance shall be effective throughout Pakistan.

(10) Currency of licenses :- A license issued under this Ordinance

shall be effective initially for one year and for five years thereafter

(11) Renewal of license :- (1) The competent authority may, on an

application made to it, renew a license issued under this Ordinance in
accordance with the prescribed procedure.

16
 (2) A license to drive a transport vehicle shall not be renewed so
as to be effective for any period after the expiry of five years from the
date of the medical certificate furnished by the license holder under
section 4 unless he furnished a fresh medical certificate in Form “B” as
specified in the First Schedule.

(3) An application for the renewal of a license shall be in Form

“E” as set fourth in the First Schedule, and shall contain the
declaration required therein provided that if the applicant does not,
or is unable to, subscribe to the said declaration, the provision of
sub-section (5) of section 6 shall apply.

(4) The fee payable for the renewal of a license shall be as

prescribed and enhanced fee may be prescribed where the
application for renewal is made more than thirty days from the
date of expiry of the licence.
Provided that if the application for renewal is made more than one
year after the expiry of the licence, the licensing authority may refuse to
renew the licence unless the applicant undergoes, and passes to its
satisfaction, the test of competence specified in the Fourth Schedule.
(5) When the authority renewing the licence is not the authority
which issued the licence it shall intimate the fact of renewal to the
authority which issued the licence.

12. Cancellation of licence on grounds of disease or disability : -

(1) notwithstanding anything contained in section 10 or section
111 the licensing authority may, at any time, require the holder of
a licence.

(a) to furnish a fresh medical certificate in Form “B” as

set forth in the First Schedule and signed by Chairman of the
Medical Board as specified in the Fourth Schedule if the

17
 licensing authority has reasonable grounds to believe that the
holder of the licence is due to any disease or disability, unfit
to drive a road vehicle, and
(b) to undergo driving competence tests as set forth in Parts
I to IV of the Fourth Schedule provided he has previously
not been subjected to such test under this Ordinance, if he is
not a paid employee and if he is a paid employee, the time
elapsed is not less than a five years.

(2) If the holder of the licence fails to produce the medical

certificate or is unable to pass the test, the licensing authority may
cancel or refuse to renew his licence till such time the holder of
the licnece produces the medical certificate, or passes the said test,
to the satisfaction of the licensing authority.

(3) When the authority canceling or refusing to renew the

licence is not the authority which issued the licence, it shall
intimate the fact of cancellation or refusal to renew the licence to
the authority which issued the licence.

13. Order refusing to issue or renew a licence and appeals: -

(1) Where the licensing authority refuses to issue or renew a licence
or cancels any license, it shall do so by an order communicated to the
applicant or the licence holder, as the case may be, giving reasons in
writing for such refusal or cancellation.

(2) Upon the issue of any such order the person affected, if he is
the holder of a licence, shall forthwith surrender his licence to the
licensing authority and the licensing authority shall, if no appeal is
preferred against its order as provided in sub-section (3), or where

18
 any appeal has been preferred and dismissed, invalidate the
licence cause it to be invalidated.

(3) Any person aggrieved by an order referred to in sub-

section(1) may, within thirty days of the service on him of the
order, prefer an appeal to the prescribed authority whose decision
thereon shall be final.

14. Power of licensing authority to disqualify for holding a

licence: - (1) If a licensing authority is satisfied, after giving an
opportunity of being heard, that any person.

(a) is a habitual drug addict;

(b) is a habitual criminal
(c) is using or has used a motor vehicle in the commission of a
cognizable offence.
(d) has by his previous conduct as driver of a road vehicle
shown that his driving is likely to be attended with danger to
the public or
(e) is a habitual drunkard,

it may, for reasons to be recorded in writing, by order disqualify that

person for a specified period for holding or obtaining a licence. Upon
the issue of any order the person affected, if he is the holder of a
licence, shall forthwith surrender his licence to the licensing authority
making the order, if the licence has not already been surrendered, and
the licensing authority shall record the order of disqualification on the
license and keep it in safe custody until the disqualification has expired
or has been removed.

(2) Any person aggrieved by an order of a licensing authority

under this section may, within thirty days of the service on him of
the order, prefer appeal to the prescribed authority and hear either
party if so required by that party and make such inquiry into the

19
 matter as it thinks fit and an order made by any such appellate
authority shall be final.

15. Power of court to order disqualification: - the court taking

cognizance of any offence under this Ordinance may, in addition to
imposing any other punishment authorized by law, disqualify the
convict from driving any or all classes of road vehicles for such period
as it may specify.

16. Effect of disqualification order: - (1) A person in respect of

when any disqualification order is made under this Ordinance shall be
debarred to the extent, and for the period, specified in such order from
holding or obtaining a licence and the licence, if any held by such
person on the date of the order shall cease to be effective during such
period.

(2) The operation of a disqualification order made under section

15 shall not be suspended or postponed while appeal is pending
against such order or against the conviction as a result of which
such order is made unless the appellate court so directs.

(3) Any person in respect of whom any disqualification order

has been made for a period longer than six months, may at any
time, after expiry of six months from the date of the order, apply
to the court or other authority, by which the order was made, to
remove the disqualification and the court or authority, as the case
may be, having regard to all the circumstances of the case, remove
or vary the order of disqualification:

Provided that, where an application has been made under this section, a
second application thereunder shall not be entertained before the expiry
of a further period of three months.

17. Power to make rules :- (1) The Government may, in consultation

with National Highways and Pakistan Motorway Police, by

20
notification in the official Gazette, make rules for the purpose of
carrying into effect the provisions of this Chapter.

(2) Without prejudice to the generality of the foregoing

powers, such rules may provide for all or any of the following
matters, namely:-

(a) the appointment, establishment, jurisdiction, control

and functions of licensing, renewal and other authorities;

(b) the conduct and hearing of appeals that may be

preferred under this Chapter, the fees to be paid in respect
of such appeals and the refund of such fees;

(c) the issue of duplicate license to replace lost, destroyed

or mutilated, the replacement of photographs which have
become obsolete and the issuance of temporary licenses to
persons receiving instruction in driving and the fees to be
charged thereof;

(d) testing of applicant for licenses, the fees to be charged

thereof and conditions of eligibility including educational
qualification;

(e) the practical and physical tests as indicated in the

Fourth Schedule;

(f) the exemption of persons or prescribed classes of

persons from payment of all or any portion of the fees
payable under this Chapter;

(g) the authorities which can suspend or cancel a license,

and

21
 (h) the licensing of schools and establishment for the
instruction of drivers of motor vehicle, facilities to be
provided, fees to be paid, syllabus to be taught and
qualification of the instructional staff.

CHAPTER III . REGISTRATION OF ROAD VEHICLES

18. Road vehicles not to be driven without registration :- (1) No

persons shall any road vehicle and no power of a road vehicle shall
cause or permit the vehicle to be driven on any national highway for the
purpose of carrying passengers or goods unless the vehicle id registered
in accordance with this Chapter and the vehicle carries a registration
mark displayed in the prescribed manner.

Explanation :- A road vehicle shall not be deemed to be

registered in accordance
With this Chapter if the certificate or registration has been suspended or
cancelled.

(2). Nothing in this section shall apply to a road vehicle while

being driven within the limits of jurisdiction of a registering
authority or firm, the officially designated place of registration for
the purpose of being registered under sections 19, 21, 35 or 36 or
to a road vehicle exempted from the provisions of this Chapter
while in the possession of a dealer in road vehicles.

19. Registration where to be made :- Subject to the provisions of

sections 21, 35 and 36, every owner of a road vehicle shall cause the
vehicle to be registered by the registering authority of the district unless
the Government establishes such an authority by notification, in which
he has residence or place of business or in which the vehicle is normally
kept,

22
 (2) Government may, by rules made under section 38, require
that any certification of registration, issued under the provisions of
this Ordinance, shall be presented, within a prescribed period to a
specified registering, licensing and vehicle fitness authority for
entry therein of such further particulars of the vehicle as such
authority may be for the purpose of this Ordinance deem fit to
record.

20. Registration how to made :- (1) An application by or on behalf

of the owner of a road vehicle for registration shall be in Form „F‟ as set
in the First Schedule, and shall contain the information required therein
and shall be accompanied by the prescribed fee.

(2) The registering authority shall issue to the owner of a road

vehicle registered by it a certificate of registering in Form „G‟ as
set fourth in the First Schedule, and shall enter in a record to be
kept by it particulars of such certificate.

(3) The registering authority shall assign to the vehicle for

display thereon a distinguishing mark ( in this Ordinance referred
to as the registration mark ) consisting of numerals, or of numerals
and letters, subject to the condition that the registration mark has
been duly notified in the official gazette.

(4) Government may, by a notification in the official Gazette,

direct road vehicles registered before the commencement of this
Ordinance shall assigned new registration marks within such
period ad according to such procedure as may specified in the
notification.

21. Temporary registration: - (1) notwithstanding anything

contained in section 19 owner of a road vehicle may apply in the
prescribed manner to any registering authority to have the vehicle
temporarily registered and thereupon such registering authority shall

23
issue to the owner of the vehicle a temporary certificate of registration
and assign to the vehicle a temporary mark of registration.

(2) A registration made under sub-section (1) shall be valid only

for a period of one month and shall not be renewable.

22 Production of vehicle at the time of registration: - The

registering authority may, before proceeding to register a road vehicle,
require the person applying for registration of the vehicle to produce the
vehicle either before itself or such authority as Government may, by
order, appoint for this purpose in order that the registering authority
may satisfy itself that the particulars contained in the application are
true and that the vehicle complies with the requirements of Chapter IV
and the rules made thereunder.

23. Refusal of registration: - (1) The registering authority may,

for reasons to be recorded in writing refuse to register any road vehicle,
if
(a) the vehicle is mechanically so defective as to render its use
unsafe;
(b) the vehicle does not comply with the requirements of
Chapter IV, or the rules made thereunder;
(c) the applicant fails to furnish particulars of previous
registration of the vehicle if any; or
(d) the applicant fails to produce before the registering
authority: -
(i) where the vehicle has been previously registered under
law relating to the registering of road vehicles in force at any
place in Pakistan, a letter of authority or a certificate of transfer
from the person shown as owner in the last registration certificate
in respect of such vehicle;
(ii) where the vehicle has been imported from any place
out of Pakistan, has not been previously registered at any place in
Pakistan, an import license for the vehicle; or

24
 (e) where the documents submitted by the applicant are
suspected to be false.

(2) where a registering authority refuses to register a road

vehicle, it shall furnish to the applicant free of cost a copy of the
reasons for refusal.

24. Validity of registration: - (1) Subject to the provisions of

section 25 and sub-section (4) of section 20, a road vehicle registered by
a competent authority, in any part of Pakistan under any law relating to
road vehicles in force in such part, shall not be required to be registered
under this Ordinance.
Provided that there is force in respect of the vehicle a certificate
conforming to, and containing substantially the same particulars as, the
certificate of registration issued by such competent authority in respect
of such vehicle.

(2) A certificate complying with the requirements of the proviso

to sub-section(1) shall be effective throughout the country as if it
were a certificate of registration issued under this Ordinance and
the provisions of this Ordinance shall apply thereto.
(3) Nothing in sub-section (1) shall apply to any road vehicle
previously registered in the country if the certificate of registration
of the vehicle is, for the time being, suspended or cancelled for
any reason other than that of permanent removal of the vehicle
from the country.

25. Assignment of fresh registration mark on removal to another

Province: -(1) When a road vehicle, not required to be registered in
any part of Pakistan by virtue of sub-section(1) of section 29 is kept in
the area for a period exceeding twelve months, the owner of the vehicle
shall apply to the registering authority, within whose jurisdiction the
vehicle then is, for the assignment of a new registration mark and shall
present the certificate of registration of the vehicle to the registering
authority.

25
 (2) The registering authority, to which application is made under
sub-section(1) shall assign the vehicle a registration mark in
accordance with sub-section(3) of section 30 to be carried
thenceforth on the vehicle and shall enter the mark upon the
certificate of registration of the vehicle before returning to the
applicant and shall also, in communication with the registering
authority by whom the vehicle was previously registered, arrange
for the transfer or the registration of the vehicle from the records
of that registering authority to its own records.

26. Change of residence or place of business: - (1) if the

owner of the road vehicle ceases to reside or has shifted place of the
business at the address in the certificate of registration of the vehicle, he
shall, within thirty days of any such change of address, intimate his new
address to the registering authority by which the certificate of
registration was issued, or if the new address is within the jurisdiction
of another registering authority, to that other registering authority and
shall at the same time forward the certificate of registration to the
registering authority in order that the new address may be entered
therein.
(2) A registering authority other than the original registering
authority making any such entry, shall communicate the altered
address to the original registering authority.
(3) Nothing in sub-section(1) shall apply where the change of
the address recorded in the certificate of registration is due to a
temporary absence not intended to exceed one year in duration or
where the road vehicle is neither used not removed for the address
recorded in the certificate of registration.

27. Transfer of ownership: - Within thirty days of the transfer of

ownership of any road vehicle registered under this chapter, the
transferor shall initiate, through a registered letter, the transfer to the
original registration authority and the transferee shall forward the
certificate of registration of the vehicle to that registering authority

26
within whose jurisdiction he ordinarily resides together with the
prescribed fee in order that particulars of the transfer of ownership may
be entered therein.
(2) A registering authority other than the original registering
authority making any such entry shall communicate the transfer of
ownership to the original registering authority.

28. Alteration in road vehicle: -(1) If a road vehicle is so altered

that the particulars contained in the certificate of registration are no
longer accurate, the owner of the vehicle shall, within fourteen days of
the making of any such alteration, report the alteration to the registering
authority within whose jurisdiction he resides and shall forward the
certificate of the registration of the vehicle to that registering authority
with the prescribed fee in order that particulars of the alteration may be
entered therein.
Provided that it shall not be necessary to report any change in
unladen weight of the road vehicle consequent on the addition or
removal of fittings or accessories, if such change does not exceed two
per cent of the weight entered in the certificate of registration.
(2) A registering authority other than the original registering
authority making any such entry shall communicate the details of
the entry to the original registering authority.

29. Suspension of registration :- (1) A registering authority or any

other prescribed authority may, after giving the owner an opportunity of
being heard and for reasons to be recorded in writing, suspend the
registration certificate of a road vehicle if;
(a) the vehicle is not insured as required under this
ordinance.
(b) Any fees or taxes payable in respect of the vehicle
under this Ordinance or the rules made thereunder, or under

27
 any other law have remained unpaid for a period exceeding
three months from the date of such fees or taxes were due;
(c) In the case of a transport vehicle, if it is not covered by
a valid certificate of fitness,
(d) The authority has reasons to believe that the vehicle is
in such a condition that its used in a public place would
constitute a danger to the public, or that it fails to
comply with the requirement of Chapter IV or of the
rules made thereunder;
(e) A substantially false statement has been made in the
application for registration of the vehicle; or
(f) The registration certificate has been deliberately
defaced or mutilated or unauthorized additions or
alterations have been made therein,
And such suspension shall remain in force till such time the deficiencies
have been rectified and the grounds, on which suspension was made, no
longer exist.

(2) A registering authority, or any prescribed authority may after

giving the owner an opportunity of being heard and for
reasons to be recorded in writing suspend for a period not
exceeding six months, the certificate of registration of a
vehicle if-

(a) it is satisfied that the vehicle is used for subversive

activities against the State,
(b) the vehicle is used for hire or reward without obtaining
a permit from the competent authority; or

28
 (c) it is established in a court that the vehicle has been
used by the owner or with its knowledge or connivance
in the commission of a cognizable offence punishable
with imprisonment of five years or more.
(3) An authority other than a registering authority, shall when
making a suspension order under sub-section (1), intimate in
writing the fact of suspension and the reasons therefor to the
registering authority within whose jurisdiction the vehicle is at the
time of the suspension.

(4) A registration authority, or other prescribed authority

suspending the registration certificate of a road vehicle under this
section shall communicate the fact of suspension together with the
reasons therefor in writing to the owner of the vehicle, and the
owner shall thereupon forthwith surrender to that authority the
certificate of registration and any other document issued to
authorized the use of the vehicle in a public place.

(5) Where the registration of a road vehicle has been suspended

under sub-section (1) for a period of not less than one month, the
registering authority, within whose jurisdiction the vehicle was at
the time the registration was suspended, shall if is not the original
registering authority, inform the original authority about the
suspension, and when the suspension is continued without
interruption for a period of not less than six months, the
registering authority within whose jurisdiction the vehicle was at
the registration was suspended, may if it is the original registering
authority cancel the registration and I it is not the original
registering authority shall forward the certificate of registration
and any other document surrendered under sub-section (4) to that
authority which may cancel it forthwith.

(6) The certificate of registration and any other document

surrendered under sub-section (4) shall be returned to the owner
when the order suspending registration is rescinded.

29
30. Cancellation of registration :- (1) If a road vehicle has been
destroyed, or has been rendered permanently incapable of use, the
owner shall within a period not exceeding fifteen days report the fact to
the registering authority, within whose jurisdiction he resides, and shall
forward to that authority the certificate of the vehicle together with any
document issued to authorize the use of the vehicle in a public place.

(2) The registering authority shall, if it is the original registering

authority, cancel the registration and the certificate of
registration or, if it is not the original authority shall forward the
report and the certificate of registration to the original registering
authority and that authority shall cancel the registration and the
certificate of registration forthwith.

(3) Any registering authority may order the examination of a

road vehicle within is jurisdiction by such authority as it may
appoint, and if upon such examination and after giving the owner
an opportunity of being heard, it is satisfied that the vehicle is in
such a condition that its use in a public place would constitute a
danger to the public and that it is beyond reasonable repair, may
for reasons to be recorded in writing, cancel the registration of the
vehicle.

(4) If the registering authority is satisfied that a road vehicle has

been permanently removed out of the Province, it shall cancel the
registration of the vehicle of the vehicle and inform the owner of
such vehicle accordingly.

(5) A registering authority or any prescribed authority canceling

the registration of a road vehicle under this section shall
communicate the fact, together with the reasons therefor in
writing to the owner of the vehicle, and the owner of the vehicle
shall thereupon forthwith surrender to that authority the certificate

30
 of registration of the vehicle and any other document issued to
authorize the use of the vehicle in a public place.

(6) A registering authority making an order of cancellation

under this section shall if it is the original registering authority
cancel the certificate of registration and the entry relating to the
vehicle in its record, and if it is not the original registering
authority, intimate in writing the fact of cancellation, and the
reasons therefor, and forward the certificate of registration and
any other document surrendered to it to the original authority and
that authority shall cancel the certificate of registration and the
entry to the road vehicle in its records forthwith.

Explanation :- The expression “original registering authority”

hereinafter used, means the registering authority in whose records
the registration of the vehicle is recorded.

31. Appeals :- (1) Any owner of a road vehicle aggrieved by an order

of refusal to register a road vehicle made under section 23 or by an
order of suspension or cancellation of registration made under section
29 or 30 or to issue a certificate under sub-section(1) of section 34 or by
an order of cancellation of the fitness certificate made sub-section(3) of
section 34 may, within thirty days of the date on which he has received
notice of such order, prefer appeal against the order in the prescribed
manner to the prescribed authority.

(2) The appellate authority shall give notice of the appeal to the
original authority, and after giving opportunity of being heard to
the original authority and the appellant either personally or by
pleader pass such orders, as it may think fit.

32. Special requirement for registration of transport vehicles: -(1)

A registering authority shall refuse to register a transport vehicle,
other than a motor cab unless the application for registration is

31
accompanied by a document in Form “H” as set forth in the First
Schedule, signed by the maker of the vehicle or an assembler duly
authorized by the maker in this behalf stating the maximum laden
weight and maximum weights for which the vehicle is and the several
axles are designed.
(2) Where a transport vehicle or chassis, as the case may be, has
affixed to it a metal plate, bearing the stamp of the maker or
assembler and identified as appertaining to the particular vehicle
or chassis to which it is attached, which contains the particulars
specified in sub-section(1), that plate may at the discretion of a
registering authority be deemed to be the document referred to in
that sub-section.

33. Special particulars to be recorded on registration of transport

vehicles: - A registering authority, when registering a transport vehicle
other than a motor-cab, shall enter in the record of registration and shall
also enter in the certificate of registration of the vehicle the following
particulars, namely: -

(a) the unladen weight of the vehicle;

(b) the number, nature and size of the tyres attached to
each wheel;
(c) the laden weight of the vehicle and the axle weights
pertaining to the several axles thereof, determined in
accordance with the load ratings approved by the
Provincial Transport Authority;
(d) if the vehicle is used or adapted to be used for the
carriage of passengers solely, or in addition to goods,
the number of passengers for whom accommodation is
provided.

34. Certificate of fitness of transport vehicles: - (1) Subject to the

provisions of section 35, a transport vehicle shall not be deemed to be
validity registered for the purposes of section 18 unless it carries a
certificate of fitness in Form “I” as set forth in the First Schedule,

32
issued by the prescribed authority, to the effect that the vehicle
complies for the being with all requirements of Chapter IV and the rules
made thereunder; and where the prescribed authority refuses to issue
such certificate it shall supply the owner of the vehicle with its reasons
in writing for such refusal free of any charge.

(2) Subject to the provisions of sub-section(3), a certificate of

fitness shall remain effective for one year unless a shorter period,
not being in any case less than six months, is specified in the
certificate by the authority issuing the certificate.

(3) The prescribed authority may, for reasons to be recorded in

writing, cancel certificate of fitness at any time, if satisfied that
the vehicle to which it relates no longer complies with any one or
more of the requirements of this Ordinance and the rules made
thereunder and on such cancellation the certificate of registration
of the vehicle and any permit granted in respect of the vehicle
shall be deemed to be suspended until a new certificate of fitness
has been obtained.

(4) The certificate of fitness shall automatically become invalid

if the vehicle is involved in an accident resulting in loss of
property damage exceeding five thousand rupees or personal
injuries requiring hospitalization or death.

35. Registration of vehicles being the property of the

Government: -(1) Authority designated by the Government
may register any road vehicle which is the property, or for the time
being under the exclusive control of the Government and any vehicle so
registered shall not so long as it remains the property or under the
exclusive control of the Government require to be registered otherwise
than under this Ordinance.

(2) A transport vehicle registered under this Ordinance shall

carry a certificate of fitness issued by prescribed authority.

33
 (3) An authority registering a vehicle under sub-section(1) shall
assign it a registration mark and shall issue a certificate in respect
of the vehicle that the vehicle has been registered under this
section.

(4) If a vehicle registered under this section ceases to be the

property or under the exclusive control of the Government, the
provisions of section 19 shall thereupon apply.

(5) The authority registering a vehicle under sub-section(1) shall

furnish to the Government all information regarding the nature,
overall dimensions and axle weight of the vehicle as the
Government may require.

36. Special registration of vehicles: - Notwithstanding anything

contained in this Chapter Government may, by rules, prescribe a special
procedure for the registration of any class, or type or category of road
vehicles, or road vehicles belonging to a specified class of persons, or
individuals.

37. Application of Chapter III to trailers: -(1) The registration mark

assigned to a trailer shall be displayed in the prescribed manner on the
vehicle.

(2) No person shall drive a road vehicle to which a trailer or

trailers are attached unless the registration mark of the vehicle so
driven is displayed in the prescribed manner on the trailer or on
the last trailer in the train, as the case may be.

38. Power to make rules: -(1) Government may in consultation with

National Highways and Pakistan Motorway Police, by notification in
the official Gazette, make rules for the purpose of carrying into effect
the provision of this Chapter.

34
(2) Without prejudice to the generality of the foregoing power,
such rules may provide for all or any of the following matters,
namely: -

(a) the appointment establishment, functions and

jurisdiction of registering and other prescribed authorities;
(b) the conduct and hearing of appeals that may be
preferred under this chapter, the fees to be paid in respect of
such appeals and the refund of such fees;
(c) the issue of certificates of registration and certificates
of fitness and duplicate of such certificates to replace
certificates lost, destroyed or mutilated;
(d) the temporary registration of road vehicles and the
issue of temporary certificates of registration marks;
(e) the manner in which registration marks and the
particulars referred to in section 33 and other prescribed
particulars shall be exhibited.
(f) The authorizing of workshops of the authorized dealers
to issue certificates of fitness in respect of vehicles handled
by them, the licensing of such workshops, their inspection,
the terms and conditions and the period for which, and the
authorities by whom, the license may be granted and
renewed and the fees to be paid for grant and renewal of the
licenses;
(g) The fees to be charged for the issue or alteration of
certificates of registration, for certificates of fitness, for
registration marks an for the examination or inspection of
road vehicles and the refund of such fees;
(h) The exemption of prescribed persons or prescribed
classes of persons from payment of all or any portion of the
fees payable under this Chapter;
(i) The forms, other than those set-forth in the First
Schedule, to be used for the purpose of this Chapter;
(j) The communications between registering authorities of
particulars of certificates of registration and by owners of

35
 vehicles registered outside the federal territory of particulars
of such vehicles and of their registration;
(k) The particulars to be furnished by the owner of any
road vehicle to the registering authority, upon the transfer of
possession of the road vehicle under the terms of a hiring
agreement;
(l) The extension of the validity of certificates of fitness
pending consideration of application for their renewal.
(m) The exemption for the provisions of this Chapter and
the conditions and fees for exemption of the fees in the
possession of dealers;
(n) The exemption of road-rollers, graders and other
vehicles designed and used solely for the construction, repair
and cleaning of roads from all or any of the provisions of
this chapter and the rules made thereunder, and the
conditions governing such exemption of light goods vehicles
from the provisions of section 34 and the conditions
governing such exemption;
(o) Requiring the owner of a road vehicle not registered
within Federal Territory, which is brought into or is for the
time being in the territory, to furnish to the prescribed
authority such information with respect to the road vehicles
and its registration as may be prescribed;
(p) Licensing of the dealers of the road vehicles, fee to be
paid, facilities to be provided, forms to be filled and returns
to be submitted.

CHAPTER IV : - CONSTRUCTION, EQUIPMENT AND

MAINTENANCE OF ROAD VEHICLES

39. General provision regarding construction and maintenance: -

Every motor vehicle, bicycle or animal drawn vehicle shall be so

36
constructed as to be at all times conforming to the specifications laid
down under law.

40. Power to make rules: - (1) Government may, in consultation with

National Highways and Pakistan Motorway Police, by notification in
the official Gazette, make rules regarding the construction, equipment
and maintenance of motor vehicles, trailers, bicycles and animal drawn
vehicles.

(2) Without prejudice to the generality of the foregoing power,

Government may make rules governing any of the following
matters either generally in respect of motor vehicles, trailers,
bicycles and animal drawn vehicles or in particular circumstances,
namely: -
(a) the width, height, length and overhead of vehicles and
of the loads to be carried therein;
(b) seating arrangements in public service vehicles and the
protection of passengers against the weather and collision;
(c) the size, nature and condition of tyres;
(d) brakes and steering mechanism;
(e) the use of safety glass;
(f) signaling appliances, lamps and reflectors;
(g) speed governors;
(h) the emission of smoke, visible gases, ashes, grit or oil;
(i) the reduction of noise emitted by or caused by
vehicles;
(j) prohibiting or restricting the use of audible signals at
certain times or in certain places
(k) prohibiting the carrying of appliances likely to cause
annoyance or danger;
(l) the periodical testing and inspection of vehicles by
prescribed authorities;
(m) the particulars, other than registration marks, to be
exhibited;

37
 (n) the use of the trailers or semi-trailers with motor
vehicles;
(o) prohibiting or requiring the painting in particular
description or for particular purposes or in particular
areas;
(p) registration, control and supervision of vehicle repair
establishments; and
(q) the use of safety belt;

CHAPTER V: - CONTROL OF TRAFFIC

41. No fault accident compensation insurance: - (1) No owner of a

road vehicle shall use or permit to be used, and no driver of such
vehicle shall drive, or cause or permit to be driven, the vehicle on a
national highway unless it is covered by an insurance of “No Fault
Accident Compensation” by a registered insurance company. This will
not apply to a road vehicle covered by the Pakistan Transporter‟s
Mutual Assistance Co-operative Society, pakistan Automobile
Association or any other road transport co-operative society so
recognized by the prescribed authority in this behalf.

(2) The claimant for compensation under this section shall not
be required to plead and establish that the death or permanent
disablement resulted from the fault of the owner/driver of the
vehicle.

42. Limits of speed: -(1) No person shall drive a road vehicle, or

cause or allow a road vehicle to be driven, on a national highway at a
speed exceeding the maximum speed fixed for the type of vehicle by or
under this ordinance, or by or under any other law for the time being in
force.
Provided that such maximum speed shall in no case exceed the
maximum fixed for the vehicle in the Fifth Schedule.

38
 (2) The Government, or any agency authorized is behalf may,
on a report from the National Highways and Pakistan Motorway
Police restrict the speed of motor vehicles in the interest of public
safety, or convenience or because of the nature of any road or
bridge fix such lower speed limit as it thinks fit, for road vehicles
or any specified class of motor vehicles either generally or in a
appropriate traffic signs to be placed or erected under section 46 at
suitable places in such area or on or near such road or bridge, as
the case may be.

43. Limits of weight and limitation on use: -(1) No transport

vehicle shall be driven in such a state that the total weight of the vehicle
and its load including the weight of any trailer drawn by the vehicle and
the load carried thereon or in such state that the weight carried on any
axle of the vehicle or trailer exceeds the limits specified in the Sixth
Schedule.

(2) The Government may prescribe conditions for the issue of

permits for heavy transport vehicles and may prohibit or restrict
the use of such vehicles in any area or route within the area.

(3) Except as may be otherwise prescribed, no person shall

drive, or cause or allow to be driven, on a national highway any
road vehicle which is not fitted with pneumatic tyres or fails to
carry reflective emergency warning triangle signs.

(4) No person shall drive or cause or allow to be driven on a

national highway any motor vehicle or trailer: -

(a) the unladen weight of which exceeds the unladen

weight specified in the certificate of registration.
(b) the laden weight of which exceeds the maximum laden
weight specified in the certificate of registration; or

39
 (c) any axle weight which exceeds the maximum axle
weight specified for that axle in the certificate of
registration.
(5) Where the driver, or person in charge, of a motor vehicle or
trailer, drives it in contraction of sub-sections(2), (3) or (4) and is
not the owner, the court adjudicating the matter may, on proper
evidence, presume that the offence was committed with the
knowledge, or under the orders, of the owner of the motor vehicle
or trailer.

44. Power to have vehicle weighted: - Any police officer in

uniform, or any person authorized by the Government in this behalf,
may if he has reason to believe that a good vehicle or trailer is being
used in contraction of sub-section (40) of section 43, require the driver
to convey the vehicle to the nearest weighing device for weighment ;
and if the vehicle is found to contravene the provisions of that sub-
section, he may, by order in writing, direct the driver to convey the
vehicle or trailer to the nearest place, where facilities exist for the
storage of goods, and not to remove the vehicle or trailer from that
place until the laden weight or axle weight has been reduced or the
vehicle has otherwise been treated so that if complies with the aforesaid
provisions.

45. Power to restrict the use of vehicle: - The Government, or any

agency authorized by it in this behalf, if satisfied that it is necessary in
the interest of public safety or convenience, or because of the nature of
any road or bridge, may prohibit or restrict, subject to such exceptions
and conditions as may be specified, the driving of motor vehicles or of
any specified road or bridge and when any such prohibition or
restriction is imposed, shall cause appropriate traffic signs to be placed
or erected under section 46 at suitable places in such places in such area
or on or near such road or bridge as the case may be.

46. Power to erect traffic signs :- (1) The Government, or any

agency authorized by it in this behalf, may cause or permit traffic signs

40
to be placed or erected on any national highway for the purpose of
regulating road vehicle traffic.

(2) Traffic signs erected under this Chapter shall be of the size,
color and type and shall have meanings set forth in the Seventh
Schedule but the Government or any authority empowered by it in
this behalf, may make or authorize the addition to may sign set
forth in the said Schedule of transcription of the words, letters or
figures thereon in such script as the Government may deem fit.

Provided that the transcriptions shall be of similar size and color to the
words, letters or figures set forth in the said Schedule.

(3) The Government or any agency authorized under sub-

section(1). May erect additional signs which in its opinion are
necessary for regulating road vehicle traffic and ensuring road
safety.

(4) The Government, a police officer in uniform or any agency,

authorized under sub-section (1) may remove or cause to be
removed any sign or advertisement which in its opinion is so
placed as to obscure any traffic sign from view, or is so similar in
appearance to a traffic sign as to be misleading or is otherwise
considered a traffic hazard.

47. Parking places and halting stations :- The Government or any

agency authorized by it in this behalf, may on the recommendation of
the National Highways and Pakistan Motorway Police determine places
at which motor vehicles including animal drawn vehicles and bicycles
may stop either indefinitely, or for a specified period of time, and may
determine the places and services areas on national highways at which
public service vehicle may stop for a longer time than is necessary for
taking up and setting down of passengers.

41
48. Power to remove vehicle obstructing traffic:- (1) A police
officer in uniform may remove, or cause to be removed, in the
prescribed manner, any motor cycle, animal drawn vehicle any bicycle
parked or standing in a position or at a place in contravention of the
provisions of the Eighth Schedule relating to parking which in this
opinion may obstruct or cause danger to other road users.

(2) No obstruction in any form, manner or mode including

unauthorized barrier shall be placed on any national highway
except connection with an authorized public work undertakes after
approval of National Highways and Pakistan Motorway Police of
the area and after following the instructions laid down by it for
sign posting, placing visible lighted markings. Any police officer
in uniform shall have the same powers in powers in removing
these obstructions as in the case of motor vehicles under sub-
section(1).

49. Duty to obey traffic signs :- (1) Every driver of a motor vehicle,
in charge of a animal drawn vehicle rider of a bicycle or a pedestrians
shall drive the vehicle and use the national highways in conformity with
any indication given by a mandatory or a regulatory sign including road
markings set forth in parts II , III and V of the Seventh Schedule
applicable to it and shall comply with all directions given by any
electrical traffic signaling device or by any police officer in uniform
engaged in the regulation of traffic.

(2) In sub-section (1) mandatory traffic sign and “regulatory

traffic sign” shall include any circular disk displaying a device,
word or figure and having a red border, erected for the purpose of
regulating road vehicle, traffic under sub-section(1).
(3) Provisions of this section shall not apply to a fire engine and
ambulance on emergency run or a police vehicle on duty.

42
50. Signals and signaling devices: - The driver of a road vehicle
driving on a national highway shall on the occasions specified in the
Ninth Schedule make the signal specified therein;
Provided that the signals of an intention to turn to the right or left
or to stop may be given by a mechanical or an electrical device of a
prescribed nature affixed to the vehicle.

51. Emission of smoke, vapour or grease and noise: - (1) No road

vehicle shall be driven on a national highway which emits any smoke,
visible vapour, girt, sparks, ashes, cinders, or oily substance the
emission of which could be prevented or avoided by taking reasonable
steps or the exercise of reasonable care or the emission of which might
cause damage or annoyance to other persons or property or endanger
the safety of any other user of a national highway.

(2) No motor vehicle shall be driven on a national highway

fitted with a multi-toned horn giving a succession of different
notes or with any other sound-producing device giving an unduly
harsh, shrill, loud or alarming noise.

52. Vehicle with left hand control: - No person shall drive, or cause
to be driven on a national highway any road vehicle with left hand
steering control unless it is fitted with a plate indicating “Left hand
Drive” at the rear of the vehicle.

53. Leaving vehicle in dangerous position: - No person in charge of

a road vehicle shall cause or allow the vehicle or any trailer to remain at
rest on any national highway in such a position or in such a condition or
in such circumstances as to cause danger, obstruction or undue
inconvenience to other users of the national highway.

54. Riding on running boards: - No person driving, or charge of a

motor vehicle, on a National Highway shall carry any person or permit
any person to carry, and no person shall permit himself to be carried, on
the running board or otherwise than within the body of the vehicle.

43
55. Obstruction to driver:- No person driving a road vehicle on a
national highway shall allow any person to stand or sit or be placed in
such manner or position as to hamper the driver in control of the
vehicle.

56. Stationary vehicles :- No person driving or being in charge of a

motor vehicle on a national highway shall cause or allow the vehicle to
remain stationary in any public place unless there is in the driver‟s seat
a person duly licensed to drive the vehicle or unless the mechanism has
been stopped and brakes applied or such other measure taken to ensure
that the vehicle cannot be accidentally put into motion in the absence of
the driver.

57. Two wheeled motor vehicles :- No driver of motorcycle driving

on a national highway shall carry more than one person in addition to
himself and no person shall allow himself to be carried otherwise than
sitting on a proper seat securely fixed to the motorcycle behind the
driver‟s seat.

(2) No person shall driver or to be carried on a motorcycle

except when he is wearing a crash helmet.

58. Duty to produce license and certificate of registration :- (1)

The driver of a road vehicle on a national highway shall, on demand by
any police officer in uniform or any person authorized by the
government in this behalf, produce his driving license, certificate of
insurance and the certificate of registration of the vehicle and where the
vehicle is a transport vehicle, the certificate of fitness and the permit of
the vehicle for examination.

(2) If the certificate of registration, certificate of insurance or

license is not at the time in possession of the person on whom
demand is made, it shall be a sufficient compliance with this
section if such provides the original documents referred to in sub-

44
 section (1) within fifteen days at the concerned patrol post or to
the same police officer.

Provided that the provision of this sub-section (2) shall not apply to a
driver driving as a paid employee or to the driver of a transport vehicle
or to any person required to produce the certificate of registration or the
certificate of fitness of a transport vehicle.

59. Duty of driver to stop in certain cases :- The driver of a road

vehicle driving on a national highway shall cause the vehicle to stop
and remain stationary so long as may reasonably be necessary-
(a) when required to do so by any police officer in
uniform;

(b) when the vehicle is involved in the occurrence of an

accident to a person, animal drawn vehicle damage to any
property, whether the driving or management of the vehicle was
or was not the cause of the accident or damage; or

(c) at road works or in emergencies when stoppage of

traffic might become necessary and he shall give his name and
address and the address of the owner of the vehicle to any person
affected by the accident provided that such person also furnished
his name and address to that person.

60. Duty to give information :- (1) the owner of a road vehicle the
driver of which is accused of an offence under this Ordinance shall, on
demand by a police officer in uniform or any address and the license
held by the driver which is in this possession or could by the exercise of
due diligence be ascertained by him.

(2) The driver of a road vehicle shall on the demand by a person

giving his own name and address and alleging that the driver has
committed an offence punishable under this Ordinance, give his
name and address to that person.

45
61. Duty of driver in case of accident and injury to a person or
damage to property:- When any accident occurs on a national highway
in which a road vehicle is involved, the driver of the vehicle or other
person in charge of the vehicle shall: -

(a) if any person is injured as a result of such accident,

take all reasonable steps to secure medical attention for the
person so injured, and if necessary, convey him to the
nearest hospital, unless the injured person or his guardian, in
case he is minor, desires otherwise;
(b) if any animal is injured as result of such accident, take
steps and endeavor to locate and report the matter to the
owner or custodian of the animal so injured and take all
reasonable steps to secure medical aid, if necessary, for the
animal.
(c) if any damage has been caused to any property as a
result of such accident, take reasonable steps to report the
damage to the party sustaining the damage;
(d) give on demand by a police officer in uniform any
information required by such officer relating to the
occurrence; or if no such officer is present, report the
circumstances of occurrence at the nearest patrol post as
soon as possible and in any case within twenty-four hours of
the occurrence and
(e) part his vehicle in such a manner and also erect
warning signs so that his vehicle does not pose any hazard or
danger to other users of the national highway.

62. Inspection of vehicle in accident:- When any accident occurs on

a national highway in which a road vehicle is involved, any police
officer in uniform or any person authorized in this behalf by the
Government, may inspect the vehicle and for that purpose enter at any
reasonable time any premises where the vehicle is stationed and may
remove the vehicle for examination:

46
 Provided that the place to which the vehicle is removed shall be
intimated to the owner of the vehicle and the vehicle shall be returned
without unnecessary delay and in no case later than forty-eight hours of
its removal.

63. Railway crossing:- The driver of a road vehicle who desires to

pass over a Railway Level Crossing shall cause the vehicle to come a
complete stop before the crossing and shall not attempt to pass over the
crossing unless he has made sure by looking both ways, to the left and
right, and listening to the audible signal or siren of the train, that no
train is likely to approach from either side, when his vehicle is going
over the crossing.

64. Power to make rules: - (1) The Government may, in consultation

with National highways and Pakistan Motorway Police, by notification
in the official gazette, make rules for carrying into effect the provisions
of this Chapter.

(2) Without prejudice to the generality of the foregoing powers,

such rules may provide for all or any of the following matters relating to
national highways or road vehicles to be driven on a national highway,
namely: -

(a) the nature of the mechanical or electrical signaling

devices which may be installed on road vehicles;
(b) erection of electrical traffic signaling devices, and the
types of such devices that may be installed;
(c) removal and the safe custody of vehicles including
their loads which have broken down or which have been left
standing or have been abandoned on roads;
(d) installation and use of weighing devices;
(e) exemption from all or any of the provision of this
Chapter of emergency vehicles and other special classes of
vehicles subject to such conditions as may be prescribed;

47
 (f) standardization of limits of load and passengers for
animal drawn vehicles;
(g) prohibiting movement of certain dangerous cargoes
until specific safety conditions for transportation have been
fulfilled;
(h) prevention of danger, injury or annoyance to the public
or any person, or of danger or injury to property or of
obstruction to traffic.
(i) Terms and conditions for societies and associations to
provide exemption from the provision of “No fault Accident
Compensation Insurance Coverage‟ for its members under
section 41, determine the procedure for „no fault
compensation‟ and
(j) Fix speed limits within the parameters as laid down in
the Fifth Schedule.

CHAPTER VI: - OFFENCES, PENALTIES AND

PROCEDURE

65. Offence relating to licenses:- (1)Whoever, being disqualified for

holding or obtaining a license, drives a motor vehicle or animal drawn
vehicle, without valid license, on a national highway shall be
punishable with imprisonment for a term which may extend to six
months or with fine which may extend to one thousand rupees, or with
both.

(2) The police officer taking cognizance of the offence under

sub-section (1) may bar the driver from driving the vehicle and
impound the vehicle.

66. Driving at excessive speed :- (1) Whoever drives a road vehicle

on a national highway in contravention of the speed limits specified in
the Fifth Schedule shall be punished with imprisonment, or with fine, or

48
with both, as specified in the tenth and the Twelfth Schedules, as the
case may be,

(2) No person shall be convicted of an offence punishable

under sub-section (1) unless the estimate of the speed is obtained
by the use mechanical or electronic device.

67. Driving recklessly or dangerously :- Whoever drives a road

vehicle on a national highway at a speed or in a manner which is
dangerous to human life or property having regard to traffic, road,
weather or other prevailing conditions, shall be punishable with
imprisonment for a term which may extend to one month to with fine
which shall not be less than five hundred rupees and may extend to one
thousand rupees, or with both.

68. Driving while under the influence of alcohol or drugs :- (1)

Whoever drives or attempts to drive a road vehicle on a national
highway while under the influence of a alcohol or a drug to such an
extent as to be incapable of exercising proper control over the vehicle,
shall be punishable with imprisonment for a term which may extend to
one month or with fine which shall not be less then five thousand rupees
and may extend to ten thousand rupees, or with both.

(2) No person shall be convicted of an offence punishable under

sub-section (1) unless the extent of the influence is determined by
a medical practitioner authorized by the Government.

69. Driving when mentally or physically unfit:- (1) Whoever

drives a road vehicle on a national highway when he is suffering from a
disease or disability to render his driving of the vehicle to be a source of
danger to the public shall be punishable with imprisonment for a term
which may extend to one month or fine which shall not be less than five
hundred rupees and may extend to one thousand rupees, or with both.

49
 (2) No person shall be convicted of an offence punishable under
sub-section(1) unless so determined by the Medical Board as set
out in the Second Schedule.

70. Racing and trial of speed:- Whoever without the written consent
of the prescribed authority, permits or takes part in a race or trial of
speed on a national highway between road vehicles shall be punishable
with imprisonment for a term which may extend to one month or with
fine which shall not be less than one thousand rupees and may extend to
two thousand rupees, or with both.

71. Punishment for abatement of certain offences:- Whoever abets

the commission of an offence under section 60,65,66,67,68,69 and 70
shall be punishable with the punishment provided for the offence.

72. Using vehicle in unsafe condition:- Whoever drives or causes or

allows to be driven on any national highway a road vehicle or a trailer
in a condition which is liable to render the vehicle unsafe, and a source
of danger to himself and other users, shall be punishable with
imprisonment for a term which may extend to one month or with fine
which shall be less than five hundred rupees and may extend to one
thousand rupees, or with both.

73. Using vehicle with shaded glass:- whoever drives or causes or

allows to be driven on a national highway, a road vehicle with shaded
glass shall be punishable with imprisonment for a term which may
extend to one month or with fine which shall not be less than five
hundred rupees and may extend to two hundred rupees, or with both.

74. Offences relating construction of vehicle:- Whoever being a

fabricator, assembler, dealer or importer of road vehicles, fabricates,
assembles, sells or delivers a road vehicle or trailer in such a condition
that the user thereof on a national highway would be dangerous or
unsafe shall be punishable with imprisonment for a term which may

50
extend to six months or with fine which shall not be less than five
hundred rupees and may extend to one thousand rupees, or with both.
Provided that no person shall be convicted under this section if he
proves that he had reasonable cause to believe that the vehicle would
not be used on a national highway until it had been put into a condition
in which it might lawfully be so used.

75. Offences relating to weights:- (1) Whoever drives a transport

vehicle or causes or allows a transport vehicle to be driven on a national
highway carrying in excess of fifteen percent of the permissible load for
a goods vehicle as laid down in the Sixth Schedule and in excess of
thirty percent of the number of passengers prescribed for a passenger
carrier, shall be punished with imprisonment for a term which may
extend to one month or with fine which shall not be less than one
thousand rupees and may extend to five thousand rupees, or with both.

(2) The police officer in uniform, taking cognizance of an

offence under sub-section(1), shall direct unloading of the
excessive goods and passengers before allowing the vehicle to
proceed.

76. Offences relating to accidents:- (1) Whoever contravenes the

provisions of clause(b) of sub-section(1) of section 59 or any of the
provisions of section 61 or furnishes any information required to be
furnished thereunder which he knows to be false shall be punishable
with imprisonment for a term which may extend to six months or with
fine which shall not be less than one thousand rupees and may extend to
two thousand rupees, or with both

(2) Whoever is proved guilty of causing an accident by

committing violation of any provision of this Ordinance which
results in only property damage of less than two thousand rupees
shall pay compensation equal to the cost of the property thus
damaged or twice the cost of repair to the aggrieved person.

51
 (3) Whoever suffers a property damage exceeding two thousand
rupees or injury requiring medical treatment due to an accident
shall report to the nearest patrol post the details of the accident
within forty-eight hours, failing which he shall be punishable with
a fine which may extend to five hundred rupees.

(4) The driver of a road vehicle or other person in charge of the

vehicle involved in the accident resulting in death, bodily injury or
property damage to other users of a national highway shall report
the accident to the nearest patrol post and police station within
twenty-four hours failing which he shall be punishable with
imprisonment for a term which may extend to one month or with
fine which shall not be less than one thousand rupees and may
extend to two thousand rupees, or with both.

77. Offences relating to disobedience of orders, obstruction and

refusal of information:- Whoever willfully disobeys any direction
lawfully given by a police officer in uniform or any person or authority
empowered under this Ordinance to give such direction or obstructs any
person or authority in the discharge of any functions which such person
or authority is required or empowered under this Ordinance to discharge
or being required by, or under, this Ordinance to supply any information
withholds such information or gives information which he knows to be
false, if no other penalty is provided for the offence, shall be punishable
with imprisonment for a term which may extend to six months or with
fine which shall not be less than one thousand rupees and may extend to
two thousand rupees, or with both.

78. Offences relating to prohibited appliances:- Whoever carries in

a road vehicle on a national highway any appliance the carrying of
which is prohibited by rules made under section 64, shall be punished
with fine which shall not be less than five hundred rupees and may
extend to one thousand rupees and such appliances shall be forfeited to
the Government.

52
79. Offences relating to traffic safety rules:- (1) No person shall
drive a road vehicle on a national highway in contravention of rules laid
down in the Eighth Schedule or as laid down by the Government.

(2) Whoever drives a road vehicle on a national highway in

contravention of the provisions of the Tenth Schedule shall be
liable to punishment as specified in the said Schedule.

(3) Any person who drives or operates a vehicle in

contravention of sub-section(1) and the provisions of the Twelfth
Schedule shall be punishable with such fine as laid down in the
said Schedule:

(4) The Government may in consultation with national

Highways and Pakistan Motorway Police, by notification in the
official Gazette, amend the provisions of the Twelfth Schedule so
as to add any thereto or modify any entry therein.

(5) A police officer in uniform, or any other person so

authorized by the Government, acting under sub-section(2) and
(3) shall draw a charge sheet in quadruplicate specifying the
amount of fine therein, and shall
(a) forthwith deliver one copy thereof to the offender and
obtain his signature or thumb impression or mark, as the
case may be, as token of its receipt, whenever possible;
(c) within twenty-four hours forward the second copy of
the charge sheet to the prescribed agency where the offender
has to deposit the fine;
(d) within twenty-four hours forward the third copy of the
charge sheet to the central accounting office, and
(e) retain the fourth copy for record.

6. Whoever is accused of violation of the Twelfth schedule by

a police officer in uniform, or any person authorized by the
Government in this behalf, may within ten days, if he does not

53
 want to contest the charge, pay the prescribed fine in the manner
specified in the citation paper and obtain the necessary receipt
thereof.

7. Where an accused person pleads guilty and pay the

prescribed fine and has complied with the provisions of sub-
section (6), no further action in respect of the offence shall be
taken against him.

8. If the fine is not paid in the manner provided in sub-section

(6), the police officer drawing up the charge shall take registration
or license into custody and lodge a complaint against the offender
before the court having jurisdiction to try the offence.

80. General provision for punishment of offences not otherwise

provided for :- whoever contravenes any provision this Ordinance or
of any rules made thereunder shall, if no other penalty is provided for
the offence under this Ordinance, be punished with fine which may
extend to five hundred rupees, and if having been previously convicted
of such an offence, for every such subsequent offence to a fine which
may extend to one thousand rupees.

81. Power of arrest without warrant :- (1) A police officer in

uniform, may arrest without warrant any person who commits in his
view any of the following offences, namely;-

(a) Driving when disqualified;

(b) fleeing the scene of accident involving his vehicle;

(c) willful disobedience or obstruction of lawful orders;

(d) driving a transport vehicle without a valid license,

fitness certificate, registration certificate, route permit
or certificate of insurance;

54
 (e) taking part in an unauthorized race or trail speed;

(f) overtaking by heavy transport vehicles dangerously or

where prohibited;

(g) driving at a speed thirty percent in excess of the

specified speed limit;

(h) failing at a stop when directed by a police officer in

uniform to do so; and

(i) driving recklessly, dangerously or under influence of

drugs or alcohol.

(2) A police officer arresting without warrant, the driver of a

goods vehicle shall, if the circumstances so require, take or cause
to be taken any steps he may consider proper for the temporary
disposal and safe custody of the vehicle and goods.

(3) A police officer arresting without warrant the driver of a

passenger vehicle shall, if the circumstances so require, take or
cause to be taken any steps he may consider for the temporary
disposal and safe custody of the vehicle and for the transportation
of passengers in the same vehicle to their destination.

82. Power of police officer to seize documents :- No police officer

shall seize documents of any vehicle for any minor violation of the
provisions of this Ordinance unless so ordered by a court or under
written orders of an officer of not below the rank of Superintendent of
Police of the National Highways and Pakistan Motorway Police, unless
he has sufficient reasons to believe that the document is forged.

83. Power to detain vehicle :- Any police officer in uniform, or other

person authorized in this behalf by the Government, may if he has

55
reason to believe that a motor vehicle has been, or is being, used
without a valid registration, a valid permit or in contravention of any
provision of sections 27, 41, 67, 68, 69, 70, 71, 72, 73, 74, 75, 76 and
78 may seize and detain the vehicle and for this purpose take, or cause
to be taken, any steps he may consider proper for the temporary safe
custody of the vehicle.

84. Particulars of summons :- The court taking cognizance of an

offence under sub-section (8) o section (79) shall, except for reasons to
be recorded in writing state upon the summons to be served on the
accused person that he-

(a) shall appear in person, with or without an advocate; or

(b) may, at specified date to the hearing of the charge, plead

guilty to the charge by registered letter and remit the fine to the
court.

85. Presumption of negligence :- (1) In the case of an accident

caused by a public transport vehicle resulting in grievous injury or loss
of life, it shall be presumed that there has been negligence of the
obligation to observe safety procedures on the part of the public
transport driver unless the contrary is proved.

(2) In the event of such an accident the public transport vehicle shall
be impounded by a police officer in uniform and not given on supardari.
Except in exceptional cases by the National Highways and Pakistan
Motorway Police.

86. Point system for traffic violations :- (1) Whoever is proved

guilty of contravention of the rules specified in the Eighth Schedule
shall, in addition to penalties provided under this Ordinance, also be
charged with points indicated against each offence under the Eleventh
Schedule.

56
(2) When points accumulated against any person exceed ten within
two year‟s period, he shall be issued a warning listing the reported
violations.

(3) When points accumulated within a two years period exceed

twenty, the license of such person shall be suspended by a
Superintendent Police of the National Highways and Pakistan
Motorway Police for a period of six months extendable by another six
months.

87. Compensation for death, injury or damage, etc :- (1) If a

person suffers death, or injury to this person or damage to his property
on account of the use of a road vehicle on a national highway, the
insurance company, or as the case may be, the Pakistan Transporters
Mutual Assistance Co-operative Society, the Pakistan Automobile
Association, or any other road transport co-operative society referred to
in section 41 and in case the vehicle is not covered by any of the above
insurers, the owner of such vehicle shall pay such compensation as may
be prescribed by the Government,-

(a) in the case of death, to the legal heirs of the deceased person;
or

(b) in the case of injury to person or damage to the property, to

the person who suffered the injury or damage, within thirty
days of the accident.

(2) If the insurer of the owner of the vehicle fails to pay the
compensation under sub-section (1), the compensation shall be
recoverable in a accordance with the provisions of sections (67 A) and
(67 G) of the Provincial Motor Vehicle Ordinance,1965 (W . P Ord No
XIX of 1965).

57
(3) The compensation payable under sub-section (1) shall not debar
the person to receive any additional sum which the person may be
entitled to receive under any other law for the time being in force.

(4) Any contract for the conveyance of a passenger in any motor

vehicle shall, so far as it purports to negate or restrict the liability of any
person of any claim made against that person in respect of the death of,
or bodily injury to, the passenger who is being carried in, any
conditions shall, with respect of the enforcement of any such liability,
be null and void.

88. Jurisdiction and procedure :- Notwithstanding anything

contained in the Code of Criminal Procedure, 1898 (Act V of 1998),-

(a) an offence under this Ordinance shall be cognizable;

(b) no Magistrate other than a Magistrate of the first class shall

try an offence under this Ordinance; and.

(c) Magistrate tarrying offence under this ordinance shall have

power try such offence summarily in accordance with the
procedure laid down for summary trial in the said Court.

89. Power to make rules:- (1) The Government may in consultation

with National Highways and Pakistan Motorway Police, by notification
in the official Gazette, make rules for the carrying into effect the
provisions of this chapter.

(2) Without prejudice to the generality of the foregoing powers, rules

under this section may be made with respect to all or any of the
following matters, namely.s

(a) The procedure for deposit of fine under section 79 and its
disbursement as reward to the National Highways and
Pakistan Motorway Police.

58
 (b) The procedure to be adopted for operation of the provision
of section 87.
(c) Fitness period for all classes of vehicles : and
(d) Any other matter which may be prescribed.

CHAPTER VII:- ESTABLISHMENT OF A POLICE FOR

MOTORWAYS AND NATIONAL HIGHWAYS

90. Establishment of a Police for National Highways:- (1) The

Government may establish a police force for performing police and
traffic control functions on motorways and national highways and
within such other territorial limits as it may, by notification in the
official Gazette, specify.

(2) The police force established under sub-section(1) shall exercise all
powers of a Station House Officer under the Code of Criminal
Procedure, 1898 (Act V of 1898), Police Act 1861 (V of 1861) and
shall-

(a) regulate and control traffic on the national highways and

prevent obstructions thereon;
(b) keep order on the national highways and prevent the
contravention of any rule, regulation or order made under this
Ordinance or any other law in force;
(c) maintain law and order on the national highways and take
cognizance of offences committed thereon;
(d) determine and regulate the category and type of traffic
permissible at particular times keeping in view the road, weather
and other conditions;
(e) render all possible assistance to national highways users;
(f) undertake initial investigation in respect of offences
commited on national highways and then transfer the cases to the

59
concerned police station for investigation. Restrict or stop local
police from investigation and transfer of case back to National
Highways and Pakistan Motorway Police.
(g) plan, budget and manage publicity, information and
education campaigns for the purposes of maintaining good order
and safety on the national highways;
(h) keep the highways clear from any encroachment and keep a
look out for suspicious persons and criminals;
(i) take into possession any abandoned property for its disposal
under the law;
(j) provide security to the travelers;
(k) develop and maintain a transport research cell and laboratory
for the purpose of carrying into effect the provisions of this
Ordinance;
(l) act as the advisory body to the National Highway Authority
for proper planning , building and development of national
highways;
(m) examine the feasibility, desirability and necessity of various
facilities, hoarding, advertisements, etc. on or along the national
highways from the security and traffic standpoint in order to
achieve the objectives of this Ordinance, and take appropriate
measures for its removal, closure or regulation;
(n) enlist and maintain motor vehicle examiners for checking
mechanical fitness of transport vehicles and issue no objection
certificates for registration and route permits in respect of
vehicles plying on national highways.
(o) inspect and oversee installation of such other facilities on or
along the national highways as are necessary for ensuring good
order and safety of the public;
(p) employ experts and enter into contracts including service
contracts for the purposes of this Ordinance;
(q) establish a competent licensing authority and driver testing
facility;

60
 (r) promote the setting up of proper driver training schools in
the private sector and co-ordinate their inspection and supervision
through Provinces.
(s) Assist the Provinces in setting up such driving schools; and
(t) Perform such other functions as the Government may, from
time to time, require;
(3) Without prejudice to the powers conferred on it or under this
Ordinance the Government may, in relation to the National Highways
and Pakistan Motorway Police exercise all powers, which under the
Police Act, 1861 (V of 1861), and the Code of Criminal Procedure,
1898 (Act V of 1898), are exercisable by a Provincial Government in
relation of the provincial police.

91. Assistance to National Highways and Pakistan Motorway

Police:- All officers of the Police and Civil Armed Forces are
empowered and required to assist the National Highways and Pakistan
Motorway Police in discharge of its functions under this Ordinance.

92. Superintendence and administration of National Highways

and Pakistan
Motorway Police:- The head of the National Highways and
Pakistan Motorway Police shall be an inspector General, who shall
exercise all powers of an inspector General of Police under Police Act,
1861(V of 1861), and administer the force in accordance with the
provision of this Ordinance and rules made thereunder.

93. Power to make rules :- (1) The Inspector General of Police, in

consultation with the Government, may by notification in the official
Gazette, make rules for carrying into effect the provision of this
Chapter.

(2) Without prejudice to the generally of the foregoing powers, such

rules may provide for all or any of the following matters, namely:-

61
 (a) for the efficient and effective discharge of duties by the
force;
(b) discipline, apparel, recruitment, induction, promotion,
transfer and appointment;
(c) procedure for employing experts and entering into contracts
with various agencies;
(d) procedure for investigation of offences, regulation of traffic
and evaluation of facilities, boarding and route permits;
(e) manner, mode and type of licenses for the national
highways;
(f) the manner in which rewards may be given to the members
of the National highways and Pakistan Motorway Police for
rendering commendable services; and
(g) any other matter which may be prescribed

CHAPTER VIII MISCELLANEOUS

94. Appointment of magistrate :- Notwithstanding anything

contained in the Code of Criminal Procedure, 1898 (Act V of 1898).
The Government may, for the purpose of this Ordinance, appoint any
person to be a Magistrate of the first class within the meaning of the
said Code for carrying into effect the provisions of this Ordinance.

95. Licensing malpractice :- If during the course of trail of an

offence relating to an accident, the court is of opinion that the accident
took place because of the incompetence on the part of the driver with
regard to his driving skills, knowledge of rules and lack of physical
fitness or due to mechanical defects of the vehicle, it may, in addition to
legal action, charge the authority issuing the driving license, mechanical
fitness certificate with negligence of duty and report the matter to the
head of the department of the delinquent authority for disciplinary
action.

62
96. Indemnity :- No suit, prosecution or other legal proceeding shall
lie against any person for anything in good faith done or purposed to be
done under this Ordinance or the rules made thereunder.

97. Ordinance not to derogate other laws :- The provisions of this

Ordinance shall be in addition to, and not in derogation of any other law
for the time being in force.

98. Power to make rules :- The Government may, by notification in

the official Gazette, make rules for carrying into effect the provisions of
this Chapter.

99. Removal of difficulties :- If any difficulty arises in given effect to

any of the provisions of this Ordinance, the Federal Government may
make such orders not inconsistent with the provisions of this Ordinance,
as may appear to it to be necessary for the purpose of removing the
difficulty.

THE FIRST SCHEDULE

FORM A
[See section 6(2)]

FORM OF APPLICATION FOR LICENSE TO DRIVE A ROAD

VEHICLE

Section A
APPLICATION

I apply for a license to drive as paid employee/otherwise than as paid

employee including/excluding public service vehicle/vehicles of the
following description:-

(a) Motorcycle up to 80cc

(b) Motorcycle more than 80 cc
(c) Three wheeler

63
 (d) Invalid person‟s carriage
(e) Motor car/motor cab
(f) Light transport vehicle
(g) Heavy transport
(h) Road construction machinery
(i) Tractor/agricultural machinery
(j) A vehicle of a specified description (description to be
attached)

Section II
PARTICULARS TO BE FURNISHED BY THE
APPLICANT

1. Name………………………………….
Photograph
2. Father‟s name………………………… Of
applicant

3. Date of birth………………………….

4. Identity card No………………………

5. Permanent address……………………

6. Present address……………………….

7. Particulars of any license previously held:

No………..Date………Place of issue ………… type…………..

8. Particulars of every previous major conviction……………….

………………………………………………………………...

9. Particulars of every previous disqualification…………………

…………………………………………………………………

64
10. Detail of any disease/debility, physical, mental or otherwise
likely to render one unfit for driving or impairment of vision,
depth perception, hearing, night vision,
color distinction, etc …………………………………………...

I declare that to the best of my knowledge, information and belief

the above particulars and declaration are true.

………………………………………………
Signature and thumb impression of applicant

Section III
FORM OF MEDICAL CERTIFICATE FOR A LICENSE TO
DRIVE A VEHICLE OTHER THAN A TRANSPORT VEHICLE

Photograph
Is the applicant suffering from epilepsy/vertigo Of
applicant

or any mental ailment likely to impair

__________________________
his driving ability?

2. Does the applicant duffer from any heart

or lung disorder which might hinder his
_________________________
performance as a driver?

3. (a) Is there any defect of vision?

If so, has it been corrected?
_________________________

65
 (b) Can the applicant readily distinguish
the pigmentary colors red, amber and green?
_________________

(c) Does the applicant suffer from

night blindness?
________________________

(e) Does the applicant suffer from a degree

of deafness which would prevent his
hearing the ordinary sound blindness?
_______________________

4. Has the applicant any deformity or loss

of limbs which would interface with the
efficient performance of his duties as
driver?_______________________

5. Does he show any evidence of being addicted

to the excessive of alcohol or drugs?
________________________

6. Is he generally fit as regards

(a) bodily health and (b) eyesight?
________________________

7. Marks of identification
________________________

8. Blood group
________________________

66
……………………………………………..
Signature of registered medical practitioner
Name………………………………………
Seal………………………………………..

SECTION IV
CERTIFICATE OF TEST OF DRIVING COMPETENCE

The applicant has passed/failed in the test specifies in the Fourth

Schedule in the National Highways Safety Ordinance 2000. The test
was conducted on a road vehicle
of the type………..on……….day of the month of…………..20…..

………………………………
Signature of testing authority

FORM B
FORM OF MEDICAL CERTIFICATE FOR A LICENSE
TO DRIVE ANY TRANSPORT VEHICLE

Medical Board to conduct the medical examination and issue a

certificate under its signature and seal on the from prescribed at Section
III of From A to be signed by the Chairman and Members of the
medical Board.

67
FORM C
[See section 7(1)]
PARTICULARS TO BE RECORDED ON LICENSE

1. License No……………………………………. Photograph

Of
applicant
2. Name………………………………………….

3. Father‟s Name………………………………..

4. Permanent address……………………………

5. Present address………………………………

6. Identity Card No……………………………. Blood

group…………..

7. Date of birth………………………………… Phone

No……………..

8. Type of vehicle allowed to drive Emergency,

precautions
………………………………….
………………………..

9. Whether or not allowed to drive

as paid employee …………………………….

10. Whether or not allowed to drive a public

service vehicle ………………………………..

68
…………………………….
………………………..
Specimen thumb impression Signature,
Seal and Designation
And signature of the holder of Licensing
Authority

[See section 86]

ENDORSEMENT

Endorsement of punishment to be made by punching the license as

prescribed under law and rules.

[See section 11]

RENEWAL
On expiry of a license shall apply to the competent authority for
renewal on Form E and pay the prescribed fee

FORM D
[See section 8(1)]

FORM OF APPLICATION FOR THE ADDITION OF A NEW

CLASS OF VEHICLE TO A DRIVING LICENSE

1.Name
2.Father‟s name
3.Class of vehicle(s) for which license required
4.Any information/particulars at variance with that
Provided in Section II of Form A.
5. Previous license No. (to be attached)

69
Note:
(a) Three passport size photographs to be attached.
(b) In case the license is for additional class of vehicle(s), the
original license will be retained by the Licensing Authority
and a fresh license issued.

…………………………
………….
Signature and thumb
impression
Of the
applicant.

FORM E
[See section 11(3)]
FORM OF APPLICATION FOR RENEWAL OF DRIVING
LICENCE

I hereby apply for a renewal of the licence, which was issued to

me the ……. Day of ………… by the Licensing Authority
titled…………

1. No. and particulars of the licence being surrendered ……………

2. Name……………………………
3. Father‟s name…………………..
4. Permanent address……………..
5. Present address…………………
6. Identity Card No……………….

70
7. Date of birth…………………… Blood
group…………………
8. Type of licence required………. Ph:
NO……………………
9. Particulars of every previous Emergency
precautions……..
major conviction……………….
………………………………

10. Particulars of every previous disqualification……

…………………………………………………...

11. Detail of any disease/debility, physical, mental or

otherwise likely to render one unfit for driving
or impairment of vision, depth perception, hearing,
night vision, color distinction
etc………………………………………………………

I declare that to the best of my knowledge information and belief

the above particulars and declaration are true.

…………………………
………….
Signature and thumb
impression
Of the
applicant.

71
FORM F
FORM OF APPLICATION FOR THE REGISTRATION OF
ROAD VEHICLE

1. Name.
……………………………………………

2. Father‟s name
…………………………………………….

3. Address

(a) Permanent
……………………………………………..

……………………………………………..

……………………………………………..

(b) Temporary
……………………………………………..

……………………………………………..

……………………………………………..

(c) Business
……………………………………………..

……………………………………………..

……………………………………………..

72
4. Identity Card No
………………………………………………

5. Class of vehicle
………………………………………………

6. Type of body
………………………………………………

7. Maker‟s name
………………………………………………

8. Year of manufacture
………………………………………………

9. Numbers of cylinders
………………………………………………

10. Horse power

………………………………………………

11. Wheel base

………………………………………………

12. Chassis number

………………………………………………

13. Engine number

………………………………………………

14. Seating capacity

………………………………………………

73
15. Unladen weight
………………………………………………

Particulars to be completed only in the case of transport vehicle

other than motor cabs.

16. Number, description and size of tyre;

(a) front axle

………………………………………………

(b) rear axle

………………………………………………

(c) any other axle

………………………………………………

17. Maximum laden weight

………………………………………………

18. Maximum axle weight

………………………………………………

(a) front axle

………………………………………………

(b) rear axle

………………………………………………

(c) any other axle

………………………………………………

Where a second trailer or additional trailers are to be registered

with an articulated motor vehicle, the following particulars are to be
furnished for each trailer;

74
20. Type of body
………………………………………………

21. Unladen weight

………………………………………………

22. Number, description and size

of tyres on the axle
………………………………………………

23. Maximum axle weight

………………………………………………

Date………………20
……………………………………
Signature and thumb impression
of applicant

FORM G
[See section 20(2)]
FORM OF CERTIFICATE OF REGISTRATION OF VEHICLE

Registered No
………………………………………………

Name
………………………………………………

Permanent address
………………………………………………

75
Identity Card No
………………………………………………

Detailed description:
1. Class of vehicle
………………………………………………

2. Maker‟s name
………………………………………………

3. Type of body
………………………………………………

4. Year of manufacture
………………………………………………

5. Number of cylinders
………………………………………………

6. chassis number
………………………………………………

7. Engine number
………………………………………………

8. Horse power
………………………………………………

9. Wheel base
………………………………………………

10. Seating capacity(including driver)

……….………………………

76
 11. Unladen weight
………………………………………………

Additional particulars in the case of all transport vehicles

other than motor cabs.

12. Registered laden weight

………………………………………………

13. Number, description and size of tyre-

(a) front axle

………………………………………………

(b) rear axle

………………………………………………

(c) any other axle

………………………………………………

14. Registered axle weight

(a) front axle

………………………………………………

(b) rear axle

………………………………………………

(c) any other axle

………………………………………………

Additional trailers registered with an articulated vehicle:

77
 15. Type of body
………………………………………………

16. Unladen weight

………………………………………………

17. Number, description and size

of tyres on the axle
………………………………………………

18. Maximum axle weight

………………………………………………

Date………………20
……………………………………
Signature of registering
authority

FORM II
[See section 32 (1)]
DOCUMENT TO BE FURNISHED BY THE MAKER OR
AUTHORIZED ASSEMBLER IN THE CASE OF TRANSPORT
VEHICLES OTHER THAN
MOTOR CABS

Certificate that the vehicle Chassis No………….,Engine

No………….,manufactured by …………………..in the
……………..has a wheel base of …………………….and is designed
for maximum weights as follows when fitted with the tyre-equipment
specified below:-

78
 Maximum laden
weight………………………………………………kgs.
Maximum weight front axle
………………………………………….kgs.
Maximum weight rear axle
…………………………………………..kgs.
Maximum weight any other axle .
…………………………………….kgs.

Tyres:-

Front wheels
………………………………………………
Rear wheels
………………………………………………

Other wheels
………………………………………………

Date………………20 …….
……………………………………
Signature of Authorized
Assembler/Maker

FORM I
[See section 34 (1) and section 39]
CERTIFICATE OF FITNESS FOR TRANSPORT VEHICLES

Vehicle No………………is certified as complying with the provisions

of Chapter III and IV of the National Highways Safety Ordinance, 2000
and the rules made thereunder. This Certificate will expire
on……………….

79
Affidavit: If during the course of trail of an offence relating to an
accident by the court it is established that the accident took place
because of the mechanical defect in the vehicle, which was
deliberately/ignored/overlooked by me, I shall be charged with
negligence of the duty and abatement of the offence, I shall be
punishable with a fine which may extend from Rs, 500 to Rs, 1000
and/or imprisonment which may extend up to six months.

Date………………20
……………………………
Signature and designation of
Inspecting Authority

THE SECOND SCHEDULE

[See section 4(3)]

MEDICAL BOARD

For the purpose of section 4, the medical Board shall consist of the
following, namely:-

(a) Medical Superintendent Chairman

(b) Physician Member

(c) Optometrist Member

THE THIRD SCHEDULE

[See section 6 (5) ]

80
DISEASES AND DISABILITIES DISQUALIFYING A PERSON
FOR OBTAINING A LICENSE TO DRIVE A ROAD VEHICLE

1. Epilepsy

2. Lunacy

3. Heart disease likely to produce sudden attack of giddiness or

fainting.

4. Inability to distinguish with each eye at a distance of twenty-five

meters in good daylight (with the aid of glasses, if worn) a series
of seven letters and numerals in white on black ground of the
same size and arrangement as those of the registration mark of a
motor car.

5. A degree of deafness, which prevents the applicant from hearing

without hearing aids, the ordinary sound, signals;

6. Color blindness or inability to distinguish the pigmentary colors

red, amber and green.

7. Night blindness

8. Addiction to excessive use of alcohol or drugs.

THE FOURTH SCHEDULE

[See section 6 (6) and section 11 (4)]

81
TEST OF COMPETENCE TO DRIVE

Sign t est:- The candidate shall satisfy the examiner that he knows the
meaning of the traffic signs specially in the Seventh Schedule by giving
nine correct answers to ten questions asked

PART II

Rule t est:- The candidate shall satisfy the examiner that the cognizant
of the provisions of the Eighth Schedule and rules laid down by the
Government and can give correct answers to questions pertaining to the
traffic safety rules and regulations. The candidate if he can read and
write shall give written answers and if he is not literate he shall be
tested orally.

PART III

Physical fitness:- The candidate shall satisfy the examiner that he does
not suffer from any disease or disability whereby his driving is likely to
be a source of danger to the public, particularly vision, color blindness,
field vision, depth perception and hearing.

PART IV

Driving test:- The candidate shall satisfy the examiner that he is well
conversant with all the instructions and rules governing parking, road
test, starting, stopping, turning, backing, traffic signals, signs and road
markings, overtaking up or down hill, speed, attitude towards other road
users, etc.

82
THE FIFTH SCHEDULE
[See section 42]

MAXIMUM PERMISSIBLE SPEED LIMITS

Type of Highways Maximum
Minimum
Kilometer per Hour kilometer per
Hour
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
-----------------------------
(A) Rural Area

Motorway upto 130 65

4-lane highway “ 110 --
3-lane highway “ 90 --
2-lane road “ 80 --
Single lane road “ 70 --
Gravel road “ 50 --

(B) Urban Area

Motorway upto 110 50

4-lane highway “ 90 --
3-lane highway “ 80 --
2-lane road “ 70 --
Single lane road “ 55 --
Gravel road “ 40 --

THE EIGHTH SCHEDULE

83
[See sections 48(1) and 79(1)]

PART I
FOR ALL NATIONAL HIGHWAY USERS

(1) No person shall push another person while boarding or alighting a

bus or other vehicle.
(2) No passenger shall board or alight a bus or other transport vehicle
at a place other than recognized bus stop and till the vehicle has
come to a complete stop except at an intersection.
(3) The guardian of minor children shall make sure that a minor child
does not play on or near a national highway or crosses the national
highway alone.
(4) The passenger in a transport vehicle shall not distract the attention
of the driver in any way that may hamper his driving.
(5) The passenger in a transport vehicle, other than the driver, shall
always enter on get off from the left side.
(6) No road user shall act in a manner, which is likely to cause
inconvenience or obstruction to another road user or damage to
property.

PART II
FOR DRIVES OF ROAD VEHICLES

The driver of a road vehicle shall:-

(i) not drive or cause to be driven, a motor vehicle unless it is in

fit mechanical and technical condition and fulfils body building
requirements as per rules.
(ii) observe the prescribed limits while hauling wide and
protruding loads and marks the ends of the load with red flag
by day and red light by night.
(iii) Observe the speed limits as indicated by an appropriate sign
or as laid down in the Fifth Schedule.

84
(iv) Give appropriate light or manual signals before starting,
stopping, slowing down, turning or changing lanes, clearly,
correctly and well in time as laid down in the Ninth
Schedule.
(v) Not drive a vehicle without sea belts and properly
functioning lights and indicators.
(vi) Ensure that his view through the rear-view mirror is not
obstructed in any way.
(vii) Keep the rear screen of the vehicle, if installed, clear at all
times.
(viii) Not engage in any action which is likely to distract his
attention or impair his driving concentration in any manner.
(ix) Keep well to the left of the road on a two lane road but give
pedestrians, cyclists and other slow moving traffic sufficient
room.
(x) Keep a slow moving vehicle in the extreme left lane.
(xi) When passing on-coming traffic on a two-way road move
over to the left half of the road and yield right-of-way on the
right half to the traffic approaching from the opposite
direction.
(xii) Drive the vehicle on the left of the road on two lane two-way
road except when making a legitimate overtaking maneuver.
(xiii) While following another vehicle maintain a minimum safe
distance equal to one meter for every two km per hour of
speed, i.e. thirty meters if the speed is sixty kilometers per
hour.
(xiv) Before crossing a level crossing with no gates bring his
vehicle to a complete stop, look both ways and listen to
make sure no train is approaching.
(xv) Not attempt to cross a level crossing when the gates or
barriers are closed and shall not attempt to pass through half
opened gate.
(xvi) Not attempt to gain a forward position by “jumping the
Queue” if traffic in front is held-up.

85
(xvii)Give way to ambulance, fire engine and police vehicle,
funeral precession and other emergency vehicle on
emergency run.
(xviii) Not cross a single or double unbroken continuous lines
“marked on the road under any circumstances except when
getting in or out of premises or a sire road.
(xix) May cross a pair of parallel lines, one continuous and one
broken, provided the line near to driver side is broken, there
is no vehicle approaching from the opposite direction and
overtaking can be safely completed.
(xx) Not cross parallel lines for overtaking if the continuous line
is near to driver side even if no vehicle is approaching from
the opposite direction.
(xxi) Not use indicators for any purpose other than to signal
turning, lane changing maneuver or emergency.
(xxii)Not overtake another vehicle by crossing the center line on
multi-lane road with no central reserve(median) whether or
not marked on the road.
(xxiii) Not occupy the extreme right lane for overtaking
purposes on a three-lane road with two-way traffic.
(xxiv) On a multi-lane road before overtaking make sure: -
(a) that no driver who is following him has begun to
overtake him,
(b) that the driver ahead of him in the same lane has not
given indication to overtake the vehicle in front of him,
and
(c) that the lane he is about is clear for a sufficient
distance, having regard to the difference between the
speed of his vehicle and the vehicle being overtaken.
(xxv) overtake only on the right except when the driver in front
has signaled right turn.
(xxvi) Stop and give way to vehicles proceeding up hill while
going down a narrow hill road.
(xxvii) Not pull out sharply from behind or cut in front
immediately while overtaking another vehicle.

86
(xxviii) Obey and observe all traffic signs and signals
(xxix) Obey the signals of the traffic police officer in uniform
even if they are in contraction of any rule.
(xxx) While turning right, give way to the traffic approaching from
opposite direction.
(xxxi) Give way to traffic approaching from his immediate
right.
(xxxii) Give way to the traffic in the round about.
(xxxiii) Not operate a radio, tape/cassette recorder, etc. while
driving in a public place. If the vehicle is fitted with
television-type receiving equipment, it should be so located
that the viewer of screen is not visible from the driver‟s seat.
(xxxiv) Not reverse his vehicle on a main road or within a
school zone.
(xxxv) Not use full headlight from dusk to dawn on undivided
roads within built-up areas.
(xxxvi) Turn on the lights from sunset to sunrise or when there
is insufficient natural light due to mist, fog, rain, dust storm
or snow.
(xxxvii) Not turn on the headlights if the vehicle is stationed or
parked.
(xxxviii) Dip his headlights when approaching on-coming
vehicle on undivided road or driving close behind anther
vehicle at nighttime.
(xxxix) Give signal of his intention by flashing headlights a
few times at night time before overtaking a vehicle.
(xl) Not drive a vehicle fitted with lights, except those specified
in this rules.
(xli) Not stop his vehicle where it endangers or obstructs the
traffic and shall not park on the black top portion of the
highway outside the city limits.
(xlii) Not open the door of a vehicle until the vehicle has stopped
and has made sure that it shall not cause any danger or
inconvenience to other road users on the road or footpath.
This also applies passengers.

87
 (xliii) Switch on parking lights while parking outside the city
limits as night.
(xliv) In case of a breakdown or other emergency stop outside the
city limits, park his vehicle on the shoulders if one exists;
turn on hazard lights and place an advance warning sign (a
red reflecting triangle) 50-100 meters before the place of
stopping.
(xlv) On a four lane highway keep in the left hand lane unless he
is going to over take, or turn right, or pass parked vehicles.
(xlvi) While joining a multi lane national highway give way to
traffic already on that highway and merge with the traffic on
the national highway so as not to hamper or endanger the
flow of traffic.
(xlvii) Remain in the extreme left lane while driving heavy
transport vehicle or any vehicle drawing a trailer, on a multi-
lane highway.
(xlviii) While driving a motorcycle, scooter or moped and the
pillion rider wear a safety helmet.
(xlix) Not be without a warning triangle.

PART III
PARKING

The driver of a road vehicle, motorcycle, animal drawn vehicle, moped

or bicycle shall not park or let his vehicle stand: -

(i) within ten meters of a road intersection

(ii) within three meters of a fire hydrant.
(iii) More than 0.5 meter from a curb.
(iv) Less than 0.5 meter behind or in front of another parked
vehicle.
(v) On a footpath.

88
 (vi) At a bus stop.
(vii) In front of any drive way or blocking passage to a premises.
(viii) In “No Parking” zone.
(ix) On the black topped part of the road where there is a
shoulder.
(x) Opposite or nearly opposite another standing vehicle or
other obstruction(e.g. road repairs).
(xi) On the wrong side of the road.
(xii) Near the crest of a hill.
(xiii) On a bridge
(xiv) Within ten meters of railway level crossing
(xv) On the grass verge.

PART IV
FOR DRIVERS OF ANIMAL DRAWN VEHICLES

(1) The driver of cycle shall:-

i. Not ride a bicycle unless he has made sure the cycle is in good
mechanical condition particularly the brakes and tyres.

ii. hold the handle bar of the bicycle with both hands except while
signaling to turn keep his feet on the peals.

iii. Not hold o n to another road vehicle, animal drawn vehicle or

another cyclist.

iv. Not carry any passenger except a minor child less then twelve
years.

v. Not lead an animal while riding his bicycle.

vi. Use the cycle path where provided, if there is no cycle track, the
driver of a bicycle shall ride along the left edge of the road. The

89
 driver of a cycle, may however use a footpath if specially
permitted by a traffic sign.

vii. Stop, change course or turn only after giving proper signals well
time.

viii. Carry a white light in front and a clearly visible reflector in the
rear while riding at nighttime.

ix. Ride in a single file.

x. Observe all traffic signs, signals and rules especially those

regarding overtaking, turning, passing and crossing.

xi. Get down while turning right at a major intersection in urban

area and cross the road as a pedestrian.

PART VI
FOR PERSONS INCHARGE OF ANIMALS

The person Incharge of animals shall:-

i. Make sure that the road is clear before he lets or take animals on the
road.

ii. Keep the animals bring led or driven as far to the left side of the
road as possible.

iii. Cause the animal to use the cattle creeps or overload ramp where
provided.

iv. Carry a light when herding, riding or leading animals after dark.

90
PART VII
FOR DRIVING ON MOTORWAY

(1) Entry of animal drawn vehicles, farm machinery including tractor,

harvester, etc and construction machinery including roller and
bulldozers on any part of the motorway including slip way and
shoulders, etc is prohibited.

(2) Do not walk along any part of the motorway including shoulders
and slipway except:-

i. In case of emergency, walk on the shoulders to reach the nearest

point for help;
ii. To retrieve an object which is a source of hazard to the traffic,
provided approaching traffic is at a safe distance and it is not a
very busy motorway;

(3) Do not enter the motorway except at the designated points. When
joining the motorway, approach from the slip road on the left,
check the traffic already on the motorway, adjust your speed, look
over the right shoulder or outside mirror and join only when there
is a safe gap between you and the approaching traffic.

(4) always drive in the assigned lane except when necessary to

overtake. Do not weave in and out of lanes.

(5) Transport vehicles and vehicles drawing a trailer are prohibited to

use any lane other then the extreme left lane except for overtaking
or when otherwise unavoidable in the interest of safety.

(6) Park only in the areas specially designated for the purpose and in
the service areas.

91
(7) Do not park on any part of the motorway including shoulder, slip
way or central reserve.

(8) In case of breakdown, move the vehicle immediately on to the

shoulder, turn on the hazard warning lights and place the red
warning triangle 50-100 meters back from the rear of the vehicle.

(9) Change lane only when it is necessary and do not change more
than one lane at a time.

(10) Never reverse or drive in the direction opposite to the traffic, even
on the shoulders or slip way.

(11) Do not cross the central reserve (median) to make U-turn.

(12) Do not drive slower than the posted minimum speed limit unless
dictated by the traffic conditions.

(13) Don‟t overtake using extreme left lane or the shoulder.

(14) Overtake only on the right unless traffic is moving in queues and
the queue on your right is moving slower. Don‟t move to a lane on
your left to overtake.

(15) Take special care at road works. One or more lanes may be closed
to traffic. Slow down and merge with traffic on adjoining lanes
only when a safe gap becomes available. Don‟t force your way
into other traffic.

(16) Don‟t stop on a slip road or on any other part of the motorway
(including shoulder) to pick up set down anyone.

(17) Leave the motorway by a slip road on your left when a sign
indicates so. Move into it well before reaching your exit and stay

92
 in it. Signal left in good time and slow down to the exit speed of
the slip way or ramp.

(18) All the rules other than those concerning particular class of road
users or situations apply to motorway driving.

(19) Don‟t use any kind of phone inside a vehicle in any manner,
which is likely to adversely affect driving concentration.

THE NINTH SCHEDULE

[See section 50]

HAND SIGNALS

1. Right turn:- When about to turn to the right or to drive tot the right
hand side of the national highway a driver shall extend his right
arm in a horizontal position outside of and to the right of his
vehicle with the palm of the hand turned to the front.

2. Left turn:- When about to turn to the left or to drive on the left-
hand side of the national highway, a driver shall extend his right arm
and rotate it in an anti-clockwise direction.

3. Slow down:- When about to slow down, a driver shall extend his
right arm with the palm downward and to the right of the vehicle and
shall move the arm so extended up and down several times in such a
manner that the signals can be seen by the driver of any vehicle which
may be behind him.

4. Stop:- When about to stop, a driver shall raise his right forearm
vertically outside of and to the right of the vehicle, palm to the front.

93
THE TENTH SCHEDULE

MAJOR VIOLATIONS AND PENALTIES

--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
-----------------------------
Sr.No Violation Fine
Imprisonment
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
-----------------------------

1. Driving when disqualified upto Rs 1000

Upto six months
2. Obtaining or applying for Rs 500-1000
Upto six months
A driving license without
Disclosing particulars of
Endorsement

3. Offences relating to Rs 500-1000

Upto six months
Construction of vehicle.

4. Offence relating to permits Rs 1000-2000

Upto six months

5. Overloading of goods 15% Rs 1000-5000

Upto one month
in excess of permissible limits

6. Overloading of passengers 30% Rs 1000-5000

Upto one month

7. Offences relating to accidents Rs 1000-2000

Upto six months

94
8. Taking vehicle without lawful Rs 1000-2000 upto
six months
authority

9. Unauthorized interference with Rs 500-1000

Upto six months
vehicles.

10. Willful disobedience or obstruction Rs 1000-2000

Upto six months
of lawful orders.

11. Altering a license or using an altered Rs 1000-2000

Upto six months
or forged license.

12. Driving a transport vehicle without Rs 500-1000

Upto one month
Obtaining a license or without a
License which is effective or without a
License applicable to the vehicle driven.

13. Taking part unauthorized race Rs 1000-2000

Upto one month
or trail or speed

14. Overtaking by transport vehicle Rs 500-1000

Upto one month
dangerously Where prohibited

15. Driving at speed forty kph Rs 750-1500

Upto one month
Higher then specified

95
16. Driving a transport vehicle Rs 500-1000
Upto three months
not covered by a certificate
of fitness

17. Failing to stop when ordered Rs 500-1000

Upto one month
by a police officer in uniform

18. Driving when mentally or Rs 5000-10,000 Upto one

month
physically unfit to drive or under
Influence of drug or alcohol

19. Driving recklessly Rs 500-1000

Upto one month

THE ELEVENTH SCHEDULE

[See section 86]
POINT SYSTEM FOR TRAFFIC VIOLATIONS
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
-----------------------------
Sr.No Violation Points

96
1. Causing an accident which results in:

(a) Death 15
(b) Serious bodily injury 10
(c) Minor bodily injury 8
(d) Property damage 6

2. Failing to stop the occurrence of an accident 10

3. Driving with a suspended license 10

4. Overloading passenger or goods in excess of 6

permissible limit, to the extent of 30%

5. Driving without a license valid for the vehicle driven. 6

6. Driving under influence of drugs or alcohol 8

7. Failure to observe traffic signals 6

(a)Red light
(b) Amber light 4

8. Driving at speed in excess of permissible limits by

40km/hr 6

9. Overtaking dangerously or where prohibited 6

10. Reckless driving 6

11. Failure to stop when ordered by a Police officer in uniform

6

12. Driving wrong way in one-way road 4

13. Failure to stop at a stop sign 4

97
14. Improper crossing of railway tracks 4

15. Failure to yield the right-of-way to other vehicles 4

16. Driving at night without proper lights 4

17. Interfering, etc, with an emergency vehicle 4

18. Driving a vehicle without proper authority 4

19. Taking prohibited U-turn 2

20. Disobeying yield sign 2

21. Failure to yield the right-of-way to pedestrian 2

22. Following too closely or cutting in too sharply 2

23. Driving with rear screen covered 2

24. Jumping traffic queue 2

25. Driving on the wrong side of the road 2

26. Failing to dip headlight for other traffic 2

27. Using turn indicator for any purpose other than turning 2

28. Reversing where prohibited 2

29. Failing to observe lighting hours 2

30. Failure to observe silence zone 2

98
31. Loading in excess of the restriction on dimension of goods
2

32. Towing violations 2

33. Failure to protect beginner drivers, etc 2

34. Changing lane or turning without giving proper signal 2

35. Careless driving 2

36. Obstructing traffic 2

37. Improper turn (turn from wrong lane 2

38. Failure to stop for a school bus or emergency vehicle 2

39. Improper loading of goods 2

40. Other violations as listed in Part I and Part VII of Eighth Schedule
1

41. Defective brakes 3

42. Defective steering 3

43. Tyre – unsuitable type 3

44. Tyre – over/under inflated 3

45. Tyre – tread less than prescribed 3

46. Tyre – different types on different axles 3

47. Condition/load likely to cause nuisance 3

99
48. Provisional license holder driving on national highway 3

49. Contravening double white lines 3

50. Contravening height restriction 3

51. Stopping on zebra crossing 3

52. Motorcycle passenger not sitting astride 3

THE TWELFTH SCHEDULE

[See section 79(3) and (4)]

STANDARD PENALTIES

PART I
MOVING VIOLATIONS
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
-----------------------------
Sr.No Violation Fine

--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
-----------------------------

1. Exceeding speed limits by less than forty kph

Rs 750/-

2. Carrying passenger in a public service vehicle less

Rs 1500/-
than 30% in excess of the permissible limits
3. Failure to observe traffic signals:

100
 - Amber flashing Rs
200/-
- Red flashing Rs 200/-
- Red light Rs
300/-

4. Carry goods less than 15% in excess of permissible load

Rs 1000/-
5. Overtaking where prohibited
Rs 300/-
6. Failure to yield the right-of-way to other vehicles
Rs 300/-
7. Interfering with an emergency vehicle Rs
500/-
8. Loading in excess of the restriction of dimension of goods
Rs 500/-
9. Driving at night without proper lights Rs
1000/-
10. Driving on the wrong side of the road Rs
500/-
11. disobeying stop sign Rs
500/-
12. Improper crossing of railway track
Rs 500/-
13. Following too closely or cutting in too sharply
Rs 300/-
14. Driving with rear screen covered

(i) Partially Rs 150/-

(ii) Fully Rs 300/-
15. Jumping traffic queue Rs
500/-
16. Failing to dip headlight for other traffic
Rs 500/-

101
17. Driving wrong way in one way street
Rs 500/-
18. Using turn indicator for any purpose other than those prescribed
Rs 300/-
19. Plying where prohibited Rs
500/-
20. Improper loading of goods Rs
500/-
21. Failing to observe lighting hours Rs
500/-
22. Obstructing traffic Rs
500/-
23. Failure to observe slow sign
Rs 200/-
24. Driver of motor cycle without safety helmet
Rs 200/-
25. Failure to stop for a school bus Rs
200/-
26. Prohibited lane changing Rs
200/-
27. Disobeying yield sign Rs
200/-
28. Failure to protect beginner drivers etc Rs
200/-
29. Failure to yield the right of way to pedestrian
Rs 300/-
30. Careless driving Rs 300/-
31. Driving without driving license Rs
750/-
32. Driving an unregistered vehicle Rs
500/-
33. Driving a motor vehicle without a certificate
Rs 1000/-
of “No fault insurance” coverage

102
34. Carrying passengers in dangerous position in a transport vehicle
Rs 750/-
35. Opening doors dangerously Rs
200/-
36. Improper turn (turn from wrong lane) Rs
300/-
37. Improper lane usage (lane straddling)
Rs 200/-
38. Driving vehicle emitting smoke, visible vapors,
Rs 500/-
grit, sparks, ashes or oily substance
39. Using horn in silence zone Rs
200/-
39. Driving motor vehicle producing unduly harsh,
Rs 300/-
Shrill, loud or alarming noise
41. Improper U-turn Rs 300/-
42. Other violations listed in Part I or II of the
Rs 300/-
Eighth Schedule

PART II
PARKING VIOLATIONS

1. More than 0.5 meter from the curb

Rs 200/-
2. Parking on a sidewalk Rs
200/-
3. Less than 0.5 meter from another car
Rs 200/-
4. Parking on a zebra crossing
Rs 300/-

103
5. Less than 3 meters from fire-hydrant Rs
200/-
6. Less than 10 meters from a stop sign
Rs 200/-
7. Less than 10 meters from intersection Rs
300/-
8. Parking in a “No Parking “ Zone Rs
300/-
9. Parking in front of an entrance to premises
Rs 300/-
10. Parking on a bus stop Rs
200/-
11. Parking on a bridge Rs
300/-
12. Parking on the road pavement outside municipal limit
Rs 200/-
13. Parking on a footpath Rs
200/-
14. Parking on or near the brow of a hill
Rs 200/-
15. Parking on grass verge Rs
200/-
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
-----------------------

MUHAMMAD RAFIQ
TARAR,
President.

____________

MR. JUSTICE
(FAQIR MUHAMMAD
KHOKHAR)
Secretary.

104
ENCROACHMENT

Definition
(i) To size on the right of others
(ii) to intrude beyond boundaries
(iii) to extend into the territory/spheres of other

West Pakistan High Way Ordinance 1959

High Way includes a Common and Public High way and all
roads, carriage ways, cart ways, streets, and lanes along with footpaths,
fences, bridges, and barms etc.

Section: 3. No person shall except under the provision of sub section-3,

make any encroachment on or above any high-way by.
a) erecting any structure whether permanent or temporary,
movable or immovable.
b) Setting up any fence, hedge, post, sign board, advertisement
board or banners.
c) Depositing or causing to be deposited building material,
goods for sale or any other article

On Contravention.
(h) after notice of 24 hours by highway remove the
encroachment.
(i) May fix payment.

Section: 7. Certain works on Highway are not allowed but with the
approval of Highway Authorities.

Section: 8. Restrictions or ribbon development on certain Highway

105
 The following restrictions shall apply and it shall not be
lawful without the consent of the Highway Authority.

a) to construct or lay out any means of access to or from

Highway.
b) Erect any building upon land within two hundred any twenty
feet from the middle of the Highway.

Section: 21 Driving of vehicle of animal in a way to endanger

human life or be likely to cause hurt to any person.

Section: 24. Cognizance of Offence.

No court shall take cognizance of any offence except

on the written report of Highway Authority or person so
authorized by the Deptt.

Section: 25. Penalties

Whoever contravenes any provision of this Ordinance, shall

be punished with fine of Rs. 500/- and imprisonment upto 3
months. It shall be cognizable.

Nuisance

i) Some thing which annoys or hurts.

ii) That which is offensive to the senses.
iii) A person or some thing which is trouble some or
obstruction in some way.
iv) Hurt or injury to person, property or reputation.

Cr. PC Section.133

106
 Disst magistrate or SDM or Magistrate on receiving a Police
report or other information and on taking such evidence, as he thinks fit
that obstruction or nuisance is required to be removed from:-

i) any property
ii) trade or occupation which is injurious to health
iii) construction of building or disposal of any substance is
likely to explosion.
iv) Well tank etc. needs to be fenced.
v) Dangerous animal shall make conditional order for the
removal of such obstruction etc.

Section :13.4 Order for removal .

Section 144. Temporary orders of a public urgent cases of nuisance

or apprehension of danger can be passed by DM/AC but for two
months only at a time.

PPC

Section : 268. Public Nuisance

A person is guilty of a public nuisance who any act or is guilty of

an illegal omission which causes any common injury, danger or
annoyance to the public or to the people in general who dwell or occupy
property in the vicinity, or which must necessary cause injury,
obstruction, danger or annoyance to persons to persons who may have
occasion to use any public right.

A common nuisance is not excused on the ground that it causes

some convenience or advantage.

Section 269. Negligent act likely to spread infection of

decease/dangers to life.

107
Section 272. Adulteration of food or drink intended for sale.

Section 273. Sale of Noxious food or drink.

Section 274. Adulteration of drugs.

Section 278. Making atmosphere noxious to health.

Section 290. Punishment of fine of Rs. 200/- if the Public nuisance

is not punishable under PPC.

Tress Pass

i. To enter into/upon property in possession of an other.

ii. Having lawfully entered into/upon the property of other, unlawfully
remains there.

Criminal Tress Pass

i. To enter into/upon property in possession of an other with intent

to commit an offence
to intimidate, Insult or annoy any person in possession of such
property.

ii. Having lawfully entered into/upon such property, unlawfully

remains there with intent thereby to intimidate, insult or annoy
any person or with intent to commit an offence.

Essential ingredients : Section-441 PPC

108
i. Entry into/upon property in possession of an other.

ii. Having Lawfully entry, unlawfully remaining upon such property.

iii. Such entry and unlawfully remaining there should be with intent

a) to commit an offence
b) to intimidate
c) to insult
d) to annoy

Intention

i. Criminal intent can be gathered from the acts which accused does.

ii. it has most cases to be inferred from the circumstances where the
probable consequence of the act was to cause annoyance etc.

iii. it may even be presumed from acts which are reasonably was
susceptible of only one inter pretation.

iv. Tresspasser knows that his act was practically certain in the
natural course of events to cause annoyance etc.

v. Intention is necessary for this purpose.

Section 441. Criminal Tress pass – Punishable u/s 447 PPC. 3

month. Fine Rs. 500)

109
Section 442. House tress Pass – Punishable u/s 448 PPC (1 year,
Fine Rs. 1000/-)

Section 443. Lurking House Tress Pass – Punishable u/s 454 PPC
(3-10 years)

Section 444. Lurking House Tress Pass by night – Punishable u/s

556 (3 years)

110
MIISION

111
The mission of National Highways and Motorway Police is to ensure
safety and provide assistance to road users. In this endeavour , it is our
commitment to due respect to all road users, be fair and equitable and to
uphold ethical practices at all times.

112
 Organization
National Highways & Motorway Police
IG

AIG (Establishment) AIG (G & H)

SP (Security) AIG (TRG)

PRO Director Finance

DIG DIG
N-5(Central)
M-2

SSP SSP SSP SSP

North (South) N-5 (Central-I) N-5 (Central-II)

DIG DIG
N-5 (North) N-5 (South)

Operating Agencies on M-2.

SSP SSP SSP SSP SSP
(N-5 North –I) (N-5 North –III) (N-5 South –I) (N-5 South –II)
(N-5 North –II)

Following are the organizations / Agencies working in

collaboration with
National Highways and Motorway Police :

1. F.W.O.

F.W.O. has been assigned the following objects on motorway:-

113
a. Toll Collection at Toll Plazas Ticketing system has been
introduced for the first time in the history of Pakistan to collect
revenue from the highways . Vehicles entering on motorway
awarded with tickets and at the time of turning out from
motorway , they have to pay prescribed levy imposed by
Federal Government .F.W.O. staff has been deputed at Tall
Plazas to collect Toll from the commutes on motorway.

b. Recovery Services F.W.O. has also been assigned the special

task of recovery the wreckage of accidental vehicles towards
service areas to ensure the smooth flow of traffic on
motorway but the system is not that efficient as required on the
motorway.

c. Medical Assistance : In case of severe injuries during

accidents/incidents on motorway, F.W.O is supposed to
provide all sorts of medical assistance to victims. For this
purpose they have been equipped with ambulance, medicals as
well as paramedical staff.

d. Cleanliness of motorway/service areas : F.W.O. has also been

assigned the task of maintaining the cleanliness on motorway.

114
 Several persons have been deputed for this purpose and they
are keeping the motorway as required.

2. Daewoo
Mainly Deawoo is concerned with all types of
constructions and maintenance of motorway (M-2) as well as the
Service Areas, Restaurants, Patrol Pumps, Service Shops , Service Area
workshops, Bath Rooms.

3. PRAL
PRAL has been assigned the job to maintain the record
of In/Out vehicles from motorway and provide the
same FWO, NHA, PMP, etc.

4. SPECIAL COMMUNICATION ORGANIZATION

SCO is responsible to run and maintain the emergency
call booth system. It works under 62 Signal Battalion
of SCO. Its main control room / server installed in
Sardeeh near Kalar-Kahar. 6 MHDs (Main Holding
Dispatch) are installed for effective communication at
the following places:
a. Lahore (Main Tool Plaza)
b. Sukhekee.

115
 c. Sial Mor
d. Bhera
e. Kalar-Kahar
f. Chakri
62 Signal Battalion of SCO.

NH & MP Background

In the past, the traffic control and security on the highways

is under the direct control of the Provincial/Local Police. But due to
various constraints has failed to muster enough resources and develop
expertise to create a specialized highway patrol, which is an essential
component of highways and admitted by the lifeline for economic
development of a country.

With the constitution of a extensive road network in the

country by the Govt. updating of the existing highways and
implementation of the most modern projects of Motorways, it because
imperative that a specialized police force at the National level was
created to facilitate the fire flow of traffic on these roads. A decision to

116
establish a new force was taken and an officer of the Police Service was
appointed as IGP enforcement in 1993.

During developing the N-5 grand trunk Road (having 1762

KM long distance) and M-2 (having 354 KM distance from Islamabad
& Lahore), in April 1997 Prime Minister of Pakistan was pleased to
approve the special Police force for policing and to facilitate the
commuters on Motorway vide survey No. F.A.P-4/G/E/07, dated
15/04/1997 under the command of Mr. Iftikhar Rasheed from IG.E the
name of Pakistan Motorway Police which has subsequently being
renamed as National Highways and Motorway Police and is declared as
attached department of Ministry of Communications.

NH & MP Policing Principles

According to the community demand NH & MP sets

following principles and also define its priority as:

a. To provide the safety (To prevent the Injury or loss of life.)

b. To facilitate the free flow of traffic.
c. To assist the motorist in needs.

117
d. To enforce the law.

In addition to this following sub objectives were also focused: -

(1) Enforcement of Traffic laws in order to achieve.

a. Facilitate the free flow of traffic

b. Control on the speeds.
c. Control on the excessive loads.

(2) Rescue and Medical assistance in emergencies.

(3) Providing protection and security on the highways on the other

hand ground realities were: -

a. Ineffective enforcement of Traffic laws.

b. Corruption.
c. A dumping ground for inefficient and corrupt official.
d. Identification of places for officers and camping for new
force.
e. Financial typical rules.
f. Provincial assistance for the provision of Manpower.
While finalizing the plans for this force, it is imperative that
certain steps are taken to provide a set-up in which there problems are

118
taken core of and an effective and viable force is created to patrol the
Motorway.
In order to achieve this, the following guide lines have been
Adopted: -
a. The provincial force will be of officers level i.e. ASI and
above.
b. With the maximum expensive of traffic, well educated and
physically fit with a very close supervision by the senior
command.
c. The force will be given substantial monetary benefit in the
shape of allowances.
d. Upper subordinates will be deployed of emerge in this force
according to the provincial quota into Federal set-up.
e. The force will be equipped and housed with proper logistic
support.
f. Emphasis will be laid on initial and in-service training.

119
LEGAL COVER

Providing the legal Framework for the force to perform

the duties of enforcement of Traffic laws and also give security cover to
the road users will not pose any problem as National Highways and
Roads are in the Federal list, while setting-up of a Police force. In this
connection an ordinance in the name of National Highways Safety
Ordinance 1997 was announced for the establishment of this new force
and to achieve the Policing principal of this force. After receiving the
appreciation from every corner of the world/country some amendment
were made to facilitate the free flow of traffic and new amended
ordinance was implemented in 2000 and is still in force.
The promulgation of National Highways & Safety Ordinance, 1997 has
empowered IGP/E to formulate rules for the establishment of force.
This empowerment includes recruitment, promotions and welfare of the
force. More over the exclusive authority of the traffic, reduction in
crime rate, accident rate is also vested to the IGP (E).

120
 M-2 LAHORE - ISLAMABAD SECTION

NATIONAL HIGHWAYS & MOTORWAY

DESCRIPTION OF MOTORWAY

121
Motorway Means a road especially designed and built for motor
vehicles which does not serve the properties bordering on it except at
special points and has separate carriageways for the two directions of
the traffic and does not cross at level with any road, railway, tramway,
cycle track or footpath.
Length Total length of Motorway (M-2) is 354 km. From
Lahore Thokar Niaz Bag to Islamabad Toll Plaza.
Carriage Way M-2 consist 06 lanes having 03 lanes for one way
Traffic and each lane width is 12 feet. The lanes are identified
numerically with the lane adjacent to hard shoulder being identified. OR
That part of Motorway:-
a. Which is provided for the regular passage of vehicular motor
traffic, and
b. Where a hard shoulder is provided, has the approx position of its
left-hand or near side edge marked with a continuous narrow
white strip. This strip may be of vibroline construction. This white
line is known as a marginal strip.
Hard Shoulder Part of Motorway, which is adjacent to and situated on
the left hand side or near side of the carriag way when facing to the
direction in which vehicles may be driven in accordance with
regulations and which is used in emergency for static position and its
width is 10 feet.

122
Central Reservation This part, which separates the carriageway to be
used by vehicles travelling in one direction from the carriageway to be
used by vehicles travelling in the opposite direction. The central
reservation is separated from the respective carriageways by a
continuous white line. The width of central reservation is 1.7 meter +
Crush barrier + 1.7 meter.
Fencing The boundary between the verge and land adjoining the
Motorway is normally stock proof fencing.

Total length of Motorway (Islamabad-Lahore Section (M-2) is 342 km.

Total service areas, interchanges, flyovers, under passes, bridges, nallas,
police stations on M-2 are as under: -

Service Area 10
Interchanges 11
Flyovers 43
Under passes 158
Long 07
Other Bridges 19
Nallas 42
No. of Districts M-2 passes 07
No. of Police Stations M-2 passes 28

123
 Length of Salt Range 08 Km

Detail of Emergency U-turns

Other than the interchanges, emergency U-turns have been provided on
Motorway to ease the return specially for mobiles of the motorway
police, vehicles of F.W.O, contractors etc. Construction as well as
repairing of U-turns is responsibility of NHA. Details of existing U-
turns are as under: -

124
Beat U-turn No. Emergency U-turn Location
(Booth No.)
1. 1 345
2 336
3 346
4 317
2. 1 313
2 301-302
3 295
4 283-284
5 275-276
6 267
3. 1 264
2 258
3 248
4 243
5 240
6 230
7 220
8 221
9 214

125
4. 1 212-213
2 202-203
3 198-199
4 197-198
5 186-187
6 177-178
7 175-176
8 166-167
5. 1 120
2 130
3 134
4 137
5 147
6 157
6. 1 118
2 108
3 97
4 90
5 87
7. 1 47
2 57

126
 3 65
4 75
8. 1 22-23
2 32-33
3 39-40
4 45-46
TOTAL 46

Police Stations /Districts Along M2

BEAT DISTRICT DIVISION POLICE STATION
Islamabad Islamabad P.S.Tarnol
P.S.Westridge
BEAT Rawalpindi Rawalpindi P.S.Chontra
1 P.S.Saddar(external)
Rawalpindi Rawalpindi P.S.Chontra
BEAT Chakwal Rawalpindi P.S.Saddar(Chakwal)
2 P.S.Nila
Chakwal Rawalpindi P.S.Saddar(Chakwal)
BEAT Jhelum Rawalpindi P.S.(Kalar Kahar)
3 P.S.Lillah
Jhelum Rawalpindi P.S.Lillah
P.S.Bhera

127
BEAT Sargodha Sargodha P.S.Phularwan
4 P.S.Kot Momin
Sargodha Sargodha P.S.Mudh Ranjha
BEAT Hafizabad Gujranwala P.S.Kot Momin
5 P.S.Pindi Bhattian
Hafizabad Gujranwala P.S.Pindi Bhattian
P.S.Jalal Pur Bhattian
BEAT Sheikhupura Lahore P.S.Sukheki
6 P.S.Khanqah Dogran
P.S.Khanqah Dogran
BEAT Sheikhupura Lahore P.S.Sheikhupura
7 P.S.Farooqabad
Sheikhupura Lahore P.S.Saddar Sheikhupura
BEAT P.S.Shera Kot
8 Lahore Lahore P.S.Factory Area

128
Facilities at Motorway M-2
Following facilities are available in the Motorway for Commuters: -
1. Service Areas 08 Service Areas are constructed at M-2. At
Service Areas following Hotel, Mosque, P.C.O, Tyre shop, vehicles
maintain shop. Patrol Pump, CNG station, Shell Shops are functioning:
-
Service Areas are situated at
Chakri Service Area 2 No of Service areas
Kallar kahar 2
Bhera
Salam
Sukeki
2. Rest Areas There are 06 Rest Areas on M-2. These are
constructed for improving the international standard of Driving. These
are situated at M-2. these are situated at : -
3. Weight Stations Total weight stations are five : -
these are situated at: -
4. Inter Changes: - There are Interchanges at M-2
Junctions A= Islamabad (Starting Point of M-1)
B= Chakri (Interchange)
C= Balksar (Interchange)
D= Kallar Kahar (Interchange)
E= Bhera (Interchange)

129
 F= Salam (Interchange)
G= Kot Momen (Interchange)
H= Pindi Bhattian (Interchange)
Junction: - I= Pindi Bhattian (Starting Point of M-3)
J= Sheikhupura (Interchange)
K= Kalla Shah Kaku (Interchange)
L= Babo Sabu (Interchange)
5. Emergency Telephone There is 354 Emergency Phone Box
after every each kilometer. This facility is free for all commuters.
This feature is also helpful to identify the location of area. The
maintenance contract is with PRAL. (Which is responsible for smooth
operating). Lahore – Islamabad Motorway (M-2)
Operations of M-2

Rs. Million
Sr. Yearly
Items Agency
No Expenditure
1. Operations & Management of
NH & MP 195
M-2
2. Maintenance of M-2 FWO 110
3. Emergency Phones SCO 11
4. Weigh Stations PRAL 14
5. Mobile workshops Services Group 12
6. Service Areas (BOT) Daewoo Nil
7. Procurement of Toll Tickets NHA 5
Operations / Maintenance of
8. NHA 7130
Camp
Man Power and its Detail
DETAIL OF POSTS OF (M-2/HQ)
S. Sanction Post (M-
No Post BPS 2/HQ)
A. Uniform Staff
1 Inspector General (E) 22 1
2 DIG 20 1
3 SP/AIG 18 2
4 ASP/DSP 17 15
5 Inspector/SPO 16 174
6 Sub-Inspector/PO 14 184
7 APO/Wireless Operator 7 41
8 APO/Security Guard 7 40
9 APO/Driver 7 78
Sub-Total A 536
B. Non-Uniform Staff
1 Director 19 1
2 Accounts Officer 17 1
3 Private Secretary 17 1
4 Computer Programmer 17 1
5 Computer Operator 16 16
6 Stenographer 15 2

131
 7 Stenotypist 12 5
8 Assistant 11 3
9 Photographer 10 12
10 Elec. Mech. Supervisor 7 1
11 U.D.C 7 12
12 L.D.C 5 4
13 Auto Mechanic 5 4
14 Electrician 5 3
15 Dispatch Rider 5 2
16 Orderly 5 22
17 Washerman 1 5
18 Cook 1 12
19 Store Helper 1 2
20 Mali 1 2
21 Sweeper 1 14
Total: - 124
Grand Total (A+B) 660

Training Post
1 Inspector 16 99
2 Sub-Inspector 14 105
3 Head Constable 7 106

132
Total: - 310

Police Accommodation

Chakri – 1 Beat No.2 – 8/3/0 NHA Camp

Beat No.5 – A/128 “
Kallar Kahar – 3 Beat No.6,7 – A / “
Bhera – 4 Beat No.8 – A/47 “

Map of breakdown of M-2 (Coral Draw)

133
Breakdown of Sectors

Beat No.1 315 – 353 Islamabad Trunal to Chakri Interchange

38 km

134
Beat No.2 267 – 314 Chakri Interchange to Balksar
47 km
Beat No.3 214 – 266 Balksar to Lilla Interchange 52
km
Beat No.4 213 – 163 Lailla Interchange to Sial Chowk
50 km
Beat No.5 162 – 120 Sial Chowk to PindiBhattioan
42 km
Beat No.6 119 – 82 PindiBhattion to Khankadogara
37 km
Beat No.7 82 – 47 Khankadogara to Sheikhupura
35 km
Beat No.8 47 – 01 Sheikhupura to Shaspure Interchange
47 km

Patrolling Procedure
Example of Patrolling Procedure in Beat No.6.
Beat six consists of 37 km starting from Pindi Bhattian Interchange
towards Sheikhupura. It has further been divided into 3-sub beats for
patrolling purpose. Following is the patrolling procedure in these sub-
beats.

135
 Sub beat No-1 starts from Emergency pole 119 and extends to 107
towards Lahore. Sub beat No-2 starts from emergency pole 107 and
goes up to pole 97. Sub beat No.3 starts form booth 97 and extends to
booth 82. Patrolling is made into 3 shifts. Each shift has its shift
incharge and at least 10 POs and SPOs perform patrolling duties. First
shift starts at 06:00 AM and ends at 02:00 PM. Second shift starts at
02:00 PM and extends to 10:00 PM. The third shift begins at 10:00 PM
and ends at 06:00 AM the next morning. While changing the shift each
vehicle is given half of an hour so that the presence on the road of
patrolling vehicle are clean and washed. Only the vehicle is allowed to
enter the camp while others are kept on patrolling in their respective
beats. During second and third shift the process of shift changing is
completed on the motorways. The Muharrar Camp is responsible to
complete the shift change in process in prescribed time, which is forty
minutes. Similarly, it is ensured that the patrolling be made according to
SOP issued by the Head Quarter and all instructions which from time to
time are issued are followed. Before start of shift all officers are
directed to perform their duties vigilantly. Their turn out is checked
before they go on duty. It is also ensured that equal number of vehicles
remain present on both sides of the road. Besides, these vehicles two
Motorcycles also patrol in two shifts that is from 6 AM to 2 PM and
from 2 PM to 10 PM.

136
 The patrolling is checked and supervised by the CPO and in case
if CPO is not patrolling the admin officer performs this function. The
patrolling vehicle also takes action against pedestrian and animal
crossing the road besides there regular function.

137
 NH&MP Registers

1 Daily Roaznamcha 13 Stock Register (Uniform

2 Diary / Dispatch Register 14 Stray Animal Register

3 Challan Register 15 Inspection Register

4 Accident / Incident Register 16 Visit Register

5 Help Register 17 O.R Register

6 Leave Register 18 Mal-Khana Register

7 Fuel Consumption Register 19 Movie Register

8 Govt. Property Register 20 Pam Register

9 Mess Attendance Register 21 Parade Register

10 In /Out Register 22 Bill Register

138
11 Issuance of Misc Register 23 Individual Register

12 Arms/Ammunition Register 24 M.T Repair Register

Duties and Responsibilities of CPOs
 Ensure to adopt the all precautionary measures to maintain the
smooth flow of traffic.
 Being a beat commander, responsible and accountable of all
activities of the beat.
 Responsible for the proper law enforcement.
 To supervise the camp/patrolling activities.
 Responsible for the maintenance of camp.
 Responsible for the maintenance of patrol vehicles.
 Responsible for the maintenance of record of beat.
 Responsible for the maintaining discipline of
patrolling/Supporting staff.
 Responsible for the proper financial management.
 To secure the Government assets/public property of the beat area.
 Security and safety of the accident property.
 Security of the VVIP/VIP movement.
 Awareness of the patrol area.
 Responsible of routine patrolling of 8 hours a day.
 Responsible to inform the SSP or control while finishing his
duties or leaving the camp.

139
  Responsible for the welfare of the patrolling staff.
 Steps should be taken to monitor the public education.
 Ensure the proper supervision of the mobile workshops.
 Motivate the patrolling staff to develop the police public
relationship that is help system.
 Liaison with other emergency services/other operating agencies
that is NHA, PRAL, FWO and local police.
 Liaison/co-ordination with the other neighboring beats.

Duties and Responsibilities of Admin

 Admin is a responsible person next to CPO.
 Responsible to implement the instructions/ directives of superior
officers.
 Security of all Government property of beat.
 Responsible to maintain all the record and registers.
 Responsible to maintain vehicles.
 Responsible to insure timely in/out of shifts.
 Responsible to make duty roaster and implement it as such.
 Proper dealing financial matters.
 Responsible of the welfare of the beat employees.
 Responsible of the welfare of the camp area.
 Facilitate the staff accommodation.

140
  Liaison with local police station.

Duties and Responsibilities of Patrolling Staff

 Bound to vigilant patrolling in the respective beats.
 Proper care for the patrol vehicle and street furniture.
 Responsible to maintain personal discipline.
 Responsible for the maintaining an exemplary behavior while
driving or on foot.
 To keep the control aware of usual/ unusual happenings of the
field.
 To observe mannerism while dealing with public.
 Should be well-versed with patrol and occasional procedure and
enforcement.
 Responsible to maintain log book and patrol report daily.
 Due care of arms and ammunition.
 Proper taking/ handing over of the charge of duties.
 Observe standard voice procedure in communication.
 Awareness of sensitive patrol area.
 Liaison/ coordination with local police station
 Liaison and coordination with the emergency services/ agent
authorities.
 Responsible for smooth flow of traffic.

141
142
MOTORWAY TRAINERS COURSE

This course presents a unique opportunity to the police force in Pakistan

to able to “get it fight first time”.

Motorway training in Europe has suffered from local initiatives,

which whilst improving the individual forces, standards, has created a
multitude of differing practices throughout the country, which has led to
a lack of standardization not just in the training but also common
operational practices of patrol officers. This course being the first of its
kinds in Pakistan can set the mould for future training when new
motorways are opened.
Perhaps the easiest part of the course will be to pass on 20
years experience with motorway patrol, supervision and training; the
difficulty lies in the object of the course, and that is to give the trainers
an appreciation and understanding of all aspects of motorway policing

143
to a degree of excellence, do that they are able to pass on that
knowledge and experience.
The motorway is a hostile and dangerous environment and
each officer relies on another‟s skills and knowledge, perhaps more than
in any other policing activity. Often Lives are at stack. Thus officers
should be given the opportunity to acquire
Those skills as soon as possible as they may be needed in the very first
day of patrol.
Therefore, I would recommend that all officers, who may be
required to operate on motorways, should receive formal training in the
skills required, irrespective of their rank.
In designing this course, I have attempted to deliver the
requirement in a relevant and forward-looking manner.
Much if the syllabus contains a combination of pre-
reading, classroom and
Bands-ion training. Provision has also been made for training in the
individuals forces local part B section of the manual.

In this approach, I take the view that the “National

Motorway Manual”
Provides the standards and tactical optional, this much if the
background and preparatory work has been done prior to the
commencement of the course.

I recommend therefore that training be constructed upon the

standards and procedures set by the “National Motorway Manual” Parts
A and B.

The course has been designed to maximize time with the

majority of the lectures being “butt-ended”. Leeway has been built in at
the end of each day to enable a review of subjects, and provide an
opportunity to clear up any misunderstandings or ambiguity, also with
information fresh from the day trainers can commence noting audit trail
data. It is not intended that the flow of information should be one way;

144
the trainers are actively encouraged to make constructive contributions
and to express views openly.

The need for quality control and monitoring of instructional

standards is an issue, which needs consideration, and I suggest a
periodic conference of force trainers and consultants. This approach
would not only meet the quality control needs, but allow discussion on
the relevance and updating of the training notes if necessary. It would
also have value in providing a forum and information for the future
review of the “National Motorway Manual” thus facilitating national
standards of practice and quality control in future years.

In conclusion, I feel that my recommendations, if

implemented, will meet the force objectives and those of the training
needs for motorway officers. It should be recognized that, through the
existence of the “National Motorway Manual” there will be a large
measure of conformity, but ith out a formal and monitored training
package there is always the potential for the growth of differing
practices, which the motoring public will find hard to understand.

Not least of all by the very nature of the motorway between

Islamabad and Lahore officers may find themselves working across
borders and standards operating practice leads to greater safety,
efficiency, credibility, and in the ultimate, can save the life of a
patrolling officers or a member of the public.

DEREK J LEWIS
INSPECTOR
MOTORWAY TRAINING INSTRUCTOR

145
LIST OF CONTENTS PART „A‟

SUBJECT SECTION
INTRODUCTION 1
Environment 1.2

146
Crewing 1.3
Vehicles, Equipment, Livery 1.4
Clothing 1.5
Enforcement 1.6
Control Room Staff 1.7
DESCRIPTION OF MOTORWAY 2
Motorway 2.2
Carriage way 2.3
Central Reservation 2.4
Hard shoulder 2.5
Verge 2.6
Lances 2.7
Car Telephones 2.8
Junctions and Interchanges 2.9
Bridges 2.10
Observation Platforms 2.11
GENERAL PATROL PRINCIPLES 3
Emergency Calls 3.2
Rolling Closure 3.3
Detained Persons 3.4
Debris and Obstruction 3.5
MODES OF STOPPING VEHICLES 4
General Principles 4.1
Stopping from the Rear 4.2
Stopping from the front 4.3
Use of unmarked cars 4.4
Vehicles travelling the wrong way 4.5
INCIDENT AND ACCIDENT PROCEDURE 5
Ace Card 5.1
Approach Scene from Rear 5.2

147
 SUBJECT SECTION
Caution Signs 5.3
Examine Scene 5.4
Casualties 5.5
Ambulance/Other Services 5.6
Remove Obstruction 5.7
Detailed Investigation 5.8
Landing Helicopters 5.9
COMPLETE BLOCKAGE OF CARRIAGE 6
WAY
Diversion from Motorway 6.1
Rearward Relief 6.2
TRAFFIC QUEUE MANAGEMENT 7
Management 7.1
„tail-Back‟ Procedure 7.2
HARD SHOULDER 8
Use by Emergency Services 8.1
As Temporary Running Lane 8.2
EQUIPMENT 9
General 9.1
Emergency Lighting / Police Vehicles 9.2
HAZARDOUS SUBSTANCES 10
General Guidelines 10.1
Action 10.2
VEHICLES BREAKDOWNS 11
General 11.1
Abandoned Vehicles 11.2
Stolen Vehicles 11.3

148
ABNORMAL LOADS 12
General 12.1
ADVERSE WEATHER 13
General 13.1
Ice and Snow 13.2
Strong Winds 13.3
Fog Procedure 13.4
When Visibility Drops 200m or less
13.5

SUBJECT SECTION
MOTORWAY DISRUPTION 14
Closure of Service Areas 14.1

Note:- Local force information and procedures contained in Part

„B‟.

1. INTRODUCTION

1.1 This manual forms the basis for motorway policing and contains
guidance for both patrol officers and control room staff.
The primary purpose of policing motorway is to:

a. Prevent injury or loss of life.

b. Facilitate

Police patrol must set good example by their driving, appearance, and
confidence. Rendering assistance and good advice to motorway users
will do much to engender good police public relations and contribute to
the high standard of safety on these special roads.

149
Experience has shown that strict self-discipline is required from officer
engaged on motorway duties. A good knowledge of the motorway
system will be reflected in a swift and efficient response in any
emergency. Officers should become aware of motorway topography,
likely trouble spots, current road words, diversionary routes, etc.

This Manual also serves as a technical reference but cannot cover every
eventuality. At times, it may be necessary to consider course of action
not specifically mentioned in the manuals. Application of common
sense to the basic principles outlines will result in effective and safe
action.

The travelling public could be confused by different operational

practices throughout the country. It is important therefore that
motorway officers carry out their duties in a uniform manner dealing
with incidents according to set criteria and force instructions.

1.2 ENVIRONMENT
Motorways are special roads carrying high-speed traffic and will
form the backbone of the country‟s road system. An uninterrupted
flow of traffic is essential to ensure efficient transportation and
communications.

Police officers engaged on motorway policing are undertaking a

special task and carry out their duties in a unique and dangerous
environment, calling for a high
Degree of self-discipline and professionalism.

1.3 CREWING
Double crewing of motorway patrol vehicles should be normal
procedure. Safety of police officers is paramount and most
procedures require two officers to speedily and local conditions
sometimes necessitate single crewing of police vehicles. Such
occasions may be on urban motorways where a high ratio of police

150
vehicles to small patrol areas with numerous junctions allows
speedy back up facilities from adjacent patrols. On the other
occasions when a high profile is needed to influence driver
behavior, it may be necessary to single crew vehicles to achieve the
desired effect.

1.4 VEHICLES, EQUIPMENT, LIVERY

Each motorway station should have vehicles capable of high speed,

both marked and unmarked as well as those with a four wheel drive and
towing capability. Each marked vehicle should be fitted with a roof
lighting system, which incorporates rear-facing warning lights.

The level of equipment to be carried in every motorway patrol vehicle

should be sufficient to enable crews implement the incident procedures
outlined in this manual.

All cones and sings should conform to the appropriate standards.

1.5 CLOTHING

Motorway police should be recognizable as such to the motorist,

irrespective of the force area they are in. All operational motorway
officers should be equipped with a Saturn yellow light weight
conspicuity garment and a Saturn yellow weatherproof conspicuity suite
complying with current safety standard, viz : -
„ Class A garments provide the wearer with a significantly higher level
of conspicuity than Class B garments and these in turn provide
considerable higher conspicuity than Class C accessories. For this
reason Class A garments should selected wherever conditions allow
their use. In particular those wearers likely to be exposed to relatively
high risk (for example motor cyclists) should wear Class A garments

151
and those exposed to particularly severe risk (for example traffic police
officers or road workers) should consider wearing garments the
performance of which is significantly better than the minimum for Class
A.

A standard uniform should be issued to all personnel designed to take

into account safety, type of work, wearer comfort and should include
white or high conspicuity tops to uniform caps.

1.6 ENFORCEMENT

A standard approach should be adopted in respect of enforcement and

thereby the reduction of accidents. Motorway users should expect that if
they commit an offence, whilst on a motorway, in any part of the
country the offence will be detected and dealt with in the same way. To
achieve this, forces should operate within the enforcement criteria set
by their local policies.

1.7 CONTROL ROOM STAFF

Staff employed in force/ Motorway Control Room must be trained in
aspects of motorway policing.
*****

2. DESCRIPTION OF MOTORWAY

2.1 For the purpose of this manual the following expressions will have
the meanings respectively assigned to them.

2.2 MOTORWAY
Any road or part of road to which the Motorway Regulations apply.

2.3 CARRIAGE WAY

That part of a Motorway

152
 Which is provided for the regular passage of vehicular motor
traffic and
 Where a hard shoulder is provided, has the approximate position
of its left hand or
Near side edge marked with a continuous narrow white strip? This
strip may be of vibroline construction. This white line is known as
marginal strip.

2.4 CENTRAL RESERVATION

That part of a motorway, which separates the CARRIAGE WAY to be

used by vehicles travelling in one direction from the CARRIAGE WAY
to be used by vehicles travelling in the opposite direction. The central
reservation is separated from the respective CARRIAGE WAYS be a
continuous white line.

2.5 HARD SHOULDER

That part of the motorway which is adjacent to and situated on the left
hand side or near side of the CARRIAGE WAY when facing in the
direction in which vehicles may be driven in accordance with
regulations and which is designed to take the weight of a vehicle.

2.6 VERGE
Any part of a motorway, which is not a CARRIAGE WAY, a hard
shoulder, or central reservation, the verge is located to the outer
extremities of each CARRIAGE WAY and form an ideal reservation
for vehicles during incidents. The boundary between the verge and land
adjoining the motorway is normally stock proof fencing which must be
well maintained.

2.7 LANES

153
The lanes of any CARRIAGE WAY must be identified numerically
with the lane adjacent to the hard shoulder being identified as lane 1 and
subsequent lanes as 2,3,4 etc towards the central reservation.
THE TERM „SLOW LANE‟ AND „FAST LANE‟ ARE NOT USED.

2.8 CAR TELEPHONES

Modern technology now allows motorists to report incidents via car
telephones and citizen band radios etc. it is important to remember that
callers often have no idea of where they are speaking from on the
motorway. Operators should always be aware that such calls my
originate from outside their police area and must therefore question the
caller carefully to extract the correct location of the incident. If this
cannot be obtained, the caller should be asked to stop at the next
emergency telephone so that the location can
be identified.

2.9 JUNCTIONS AND INTERCHANGES

An interchanges is where one motorway joins another whereas a
junction is where a non-motorway road joins motorway.
(Full descriptions of motorways relevant to individual forces may be
contained in part „B‟ of the Manual).

2.10 BRIDGES
The standard height of over bridges provides a minimum clearance of
5.03 meters. Damage, obstruction, or other difficulties should be
reported to Control who will in turn notify the Agent Authority of the
National Rail where the bridge carries a railway line.

2.11 OBSERVATION PLATFORMS

154
Police observation platforms are located at strategic points on
motorways, normally close to junctions and / or emergency cross over
points. They are intended to provide legal parking positions for police
patrol vehicles in close proximity to the carriage ways. Crews should
use them for the purposes of observing traffic, detecting offences, or to
increase their visual impact upon driver behavior.

3. GENERAL PATROL PRINCIPLES

3.1 Patrol officers attending any indigent on the motorway should
always work as a team, one member taking charge of the incident until
relieved by a supervisory officer. Officers carrying out motorway patrol
should be given training appropriate to the duties they can reasonably
be expected to perform.
Codes have been drawn up to cover police action at all incidents and are
generally known as „ACE CARD‟ and „CHALET‟. They cab be
studied in more detail in section „5‟ of this manual which deals
specifically with incidents.
In all serious incidents or those involving the closure of a carriage way,
a request should be made for the attendance of a supervisory officer at
the scene.
When officers are patrolling on a motorway, and for any reason, they
are required to leave their vehicle, they must wear high conspicuity
clothing in the interests of their own safety. Conspicuity clothing must
conform to current safety specifications.
Officers assigned to motorway patrol duties will not leave the
motorway for any reason other than with the permission of a
supervisory officer and control should be notified.
Officers on motorway duties must always consider their own
vulnerability and safety, especially when crossing carriage ways on foot
or dealing with incidents whilst out of their vehicle.
Patrol speeds of motorways will normally be about the speed of the
traffic in lane(1). Occasional runs at a higher speed should be
undertaken, overtaking vehicles to demonstrate correct lane discipline
to other traffic. This is of vital importance and it must be appreciated
that example and advice can achieve much.

155
Motorway crews should occasionally take up advantage points on
observation platforms or other safe positions. These points should
normally be near junctions in order to be able to proceed in either
direction should a sudden emergency arise. Use of the hard shoulder
must be restricted for safety reasons, to a minimum.
It is of vital importance that motorway carriage ways be kept clear at all
time. If for any reasons a vehicle breaks down it must be moved from
the carriage way immediately. Where this not possible, it is essential
that obstruction be adequately protected. This is one of the most
important duties of motorway patrols.
In the interests of road safety, crews, during the course of their patrol,
must record and inform control of any defects to motorway street
furniture, lighting, etc. Early notification to authorities will expedite
necessary action and enhance road safety.
Officers should be encouraged to make observations and
recommendations for improvements to any aspects of safety or
procedure relating to their patrol area. Road works should be visited
regularly and the adequacy of signing checked. Defects must be
reported to expedite remedial action. A good liaison between patrols
and maintenance crews is essential.
Patrols should endeavor to check their entire patrol section including
slip roads, for all stationary vehicles at least once during their duty
period, to ensure necessary assistance is being provided.

3.2 EMERGENCY CALLS

When answering an emergency call motorway crews will use the
vehicles emergency warning lights, headlights and audible sirens as
appropriate. The speed should always be reasonable. No emergency is
so great that it justifies an accident-it is far better to arrive safely than
not at all.

3.3 ROLLING CLOSURE

A rolling closure is a traffic control method which provides a means of
gradually slowing traffic to create a void in the traffic flow or where
necessary of gradually bringing traffic to a halt.

156
It is implemented by the use of one or more patrol vehicles driving,
where appropriate alongside each other, with all rear facing emergency
lights illuminated thus preventing any vehicles from passing.
Consideration must always be given to the protection of any build up of
traffic with the use of tail back vehicle.
When this system is utilized, a traffic free zone will created ahead of the
patrol vehicles. This allows a safe working area for :
 Initiation of roadwork
 Clearance of debris
 Alteration to major roadwork
 Recovery of vehicles from the carriage way
 Safe access to the motorway for special convoys and abnormal loads.
 Any other incident where it is necessary in the interests of road
safety, e.g. animals in the carriage way.
The amount of time required for this type of work in the carriage way
will determine how far back along the motorway the rolling closure will
commence. Remember to cover all access points to the motorway
between the rolling closure and the work area. At the start of this
maneuver, the speed of the patrol vehicles should be that of the normal
traffic flow
and then gradually and safely reduced.

It should be clearly understood that in the interest of safety, a rolling

closure utilizing other road users to slow down an offending driver
could put lives at risk and must not be undertaken. The risk of such a
maneuver can never be justified.

3.4 DETAINED PERSONS

157
Detained persons will be taken to the nearest suitable police station. In
all cases, motorway control must be informed immediately so that
alternative cover can be arranged. Patrols will return to motorway duty
as soon as practicable.
3.5 DEBRIS AND OBSTRUCTIONS
Debris and spillage of loads from vehicles on the motorway present a
considerable hazard to traffic and crews. Reports of these occurrences
must be dealt with as a matter of urgency.
Crews are expected to clear or reduce any obstruction affecting the free
flow of traffic. If this cannot be done expeditiously or the task is too
great and outside the capability of police, then a call for assistance of
the Agent Authority should be made through Control.
Patrols should consider the necessity of protecting the scene of the
obstruction by the placing of emergency signs and comes on the
approach side as outlined in the incident and accident.
For small removable debris, the police vehicle will be stopped on the
hard shoulder with rear facing emergency lights activated. When it is
safe to do so, the debris will then be removed. Consider your own safety
and, it necessary, the use of a rolling closures.

*********

MODES OF STOPPING VEHICLES

4.1 GENERAL PRINCIPLES

The general principle of motorway policing is that traffic should be kept
moving but where it is considered necessary to stop a vehicle, great care
should be taken and thereafter, any period spent on the hard shoulder
kept to a minimum. Officers who have received the appropriate training
should only carry out the stopping of vehicles on the hard shoulder of
motorways.
Where possible, vehicles should be directed off the motorway at the
next available point, if return access is available. The vehicle can then
be examined and the driver interviewed in safety.

158
In stopping another vehicle, drivers of police vehicles must decide
whether to stop from behind or in front. There are advantages to both
techniques although the added protection provided by a police vehicle
being to the rear of any stationary vehicle may influence the decision.
Police drivers mist consider : -
 The expected response of the driver they wish to stop
 The prevailing road and traffic conditions
 The availability of suitable places to stop (i.e. slip roads etc.)
 The possible threat i.e. of firearms being used
 The type of vehicle they are attempting to stop
 Vulnerable road users and the need for them to be sure of identifying
a police vehicle
Police officers when walking to a stationary vehicle should always be
alert to the dangers of passing traffic and their approach should be made
accordingly. Special care is necessary during the hours of darkness
and in adverse weather conditions.
Where possible an approach to any stationary vehicle should always be
from the neared of the vehicle. Police officers should always stand in a
position of safety facing oncoming traffic and should not stand between
stationary vehicles. Members of the public will not be aware of such
safety measures and should be given guidance where necessary.

NEVER STAND ON THE OFFSIDE OF A VEHICLE TO TALK TO

THE OCCUPANTS
The driver of a stopped vehicle should be given clear instructions how
to safely rejoin the carriage way. The driver should be instructed to use
the hard shoulder as an acceleration lane in order to achieve a safe
speed and then merge with the traffic on the main carriage way.

4.2 STOPPING FROM THE REAR

When stopping a vehicle from the rear the following guidelines should
be adopted : -
 Leave a safe margin between the vehicles to give the driver time to
react and monitor from the rear.

159
 Use headlights and other ancillary equipment to attract the driver‟s
attention and if no other means are available, use the left indicator
and or point to the neared to signal what is required.
 At night as an aid to identification, the interior light of the police
vehicle can be switched on.
 When the vehicle has stopped, take all necessary steps to protect the
scene by using ancillary equipment. Consider moving to a safer
location if necessary.
 Approach and interview the driver from the safest possible position
having regard to traffic conditions for the possibility of attack by the
occupants.

4.3 STOPPING FROM THE FRONT

In stopping a vehicle from the front the following guidelines should be
adopted :-
 Overtake and leave an adequate safety margin for the speed
involved. Before commencing, the stopping procedure allows a good
margin for the driver‟s reaction.
 Close attention must be paid to the vehicle to be stopped but not tot
the exclusion of other traffic movements.
 The order to stop should be signaled by the use (or continued use) of
ancillary equipment, using the left hand indicator and perhaps a
„slow down‟ hand signal. Hand signals may be more appropriate in
double-crewed vehicles.
 Ensure that the vehicle has stopped before bringing the police vehicle
to halt ahead of it.
 At all times, consider the safety of other road users as well as that the
person being stopped. Use ancillary equipment if required and move
to a safer location if necessary.
 Approach and interview the driver from the safest possible position
having regard to traffic conditions or the possibility of attack by the
occupants.

Discretion is necessary when stopping vehicles particularly at high

speeds when a considerable distance may be covered in completing the

160
maneuver. There should be no question of the patrol car causing danger
by cutting in or slow too quickly in front of other vehicles. Vehicles
must never be allowed to stop on the carriage way.

4.4 USE OF UNMARKED CARS

Regardless of stopping technique, drivers of unmarked police cars must
be aware of the need to identify their vehicle as a police car to the
suspect/offending driver. Misinterpretation of signals from an unmarked
car can cause unnecessary pursuits. Where ancillary equipment (e.g.
blue lights or sighs), is not available during the hours of darkness, the
selection of a well-lit section of motorway will assist those officers who
are in uniform. Turning on the interior light may help with
identification in the dark.
Officers in unmarked vehicles should be aware that the driver of the
vehicle being stopped can reasonably expect proof of identity to be
produced by the officers, i.e. Warrant Card.
Care should be taken into the alarm vulnerable road users.

4.5 VEHICLES TRAVELLING THE WRONG WAY

If a vehicle travels the wrong way on a carriage way, motorway
patrol vehicles must be alerted to the incident immediately. If the
vehicle is located the patrol vehicle should travel in the same
direction but along the correct carriage way and attempt to stop the
vehicle by signaling to the driver.
Should this fail patrols ahead of and on the same carriage way as
the offending vehicle should implement a rolling closure to slow the
approaching traffic thus avoiding a serious incident.
Patrols must never pursue a vehicle on the same carriage way.
Consideration should also be given for the carriage way ahead of
the offending vehicle being closed as quickly as possible at the most
appropriate junction thereby directing traffic off the motorway

161
away from the offending vehicle and the potential danger of a head
on collision.
********
5. INCIDENTS & ACCIDENT PROCEDURE
5.1 ACE CARD
Effective action at the scene of an accident depends on sound
assessment of the situation, good communication and the efficient use
of vehicles and equipment. To this end, the accident code 5 „ACE
CARD‟ and „CHALET‟ has been prepared and should form part of the
basic training of all officers.
 Approach from the rear
 Caution signs (police emergency/motorway signals)
 Examine scene
 Casualties
 Ambulance and other emergency services
 Remove obstructions
 Detailed investigation
Each feature of the „ACE CARD‟ procedure must be considered in
sequence but not necessarily implemented on every occasion. The code
is explained below and the basic principles of „ACE CARD‟ should be
committed to memory.

5.2 „A‟ APPROACH THE SCENE FROM THE REAR

whenever possible, all motorway accidents must be approached from
the rear. There will be occasions in very serious accidents, which
qualify as major incidents, when very special circumstances apply and
the approach to the scene will be directed by Control. Where an
accident has occurred on the opposite carriage way to that on which the
police vehicle attending the accident is travelling, it may be necessary
to turn at the next junction in order to approach from the rear. The crew
of the patrol vehicle passing a incident on the opposite carriage way
will inform Control of the exact location.

5.3 „C‟ CAUTION SIGNS

162
The first patrol to arrive at the scene of an accident or incident will
assess whether or not the scene can be quickly cleared or whether it will
require protection by advance signing is necessary, a second patrol
should, where possible be requested to implement it.
Where a second unit is not readily available the initial response crew
should undertake the sinning. Police emergency signs may be placed on
the motorway so that the approaching motorist sees identical sign on
both sides of the carriage way. By placing sighs on the hard shoulder
and the central reservation it will eliminate the danger caused by some
signs being masked by moving vehicles. (where circumstances allow,
signs should be placed adjacent to the hard shoulder. This will enable
other emergency service vehicle and recovery agents to access the
accident zone, see diagram). When placing the advanced signing in
position, drive the police vehicle onto the hard shoulder and switch on
all rear facing emergency warning lights, then place advance signing to
achieve the following sequence.
 900 meters prior to the first divert arrow “POLICE ACCIDENT”
signs.
 600 meters prior to the first divert arrow “POLICE ACCIDENT”
signs.
 300 meters prior to the first divert arrow “POLICE ACCIDENT”
signs.
(Recommended distances are only approximate)

The police vehicle will be placed 50 meters from the obstruction in a

position so as to:

1. Afford the maximum protection to all persons at the scene and

2. Obtain the best benefit firm its emergency lights and conspicuity
markings.

Ensure that the facing emergency lighting is still operation on the police
vehicle and place out cones in a diagonal line, starting at the marginal
strip and working across the lanes and towards the incident. DO NOT

163
TURN YOUR BACK ON THE APPROACHING TRAFFIC. The
objective is to cause traffic to change lanes gradually before reaching
the obstruction. if the taper of the diagonal line is too server, further
accidents could occur through vehicles being forced into the path of
traffic using the adjoining lane. Ideally the maximum taper of cones
should be at least 100 meters for each closed lane. with the cones being
evenly spaced out over the distance. Cone off complete lanes only.
(See diagram within this obstruction )

Under no circumstances will an island be formed in the center of the

carriage way with traffic passing in the same direction on each side of
the obstruction.

In the case of a two lane carriage way, where an obstruction is in the

first lane, coning will commence from the hard shoulder, and in the case
of an obstruction in the second lane, coning will commence from the
central reservation.

In the case of a three lane carriage way, where the obstruction is in

the first lane, coning will similarly commence from the hard shoulder,
and in the case of an obstruction in the third lane, coning will
commence from the central reservation. Where an obstruction is in the
second lane, coning may commence from either the central reservation
to close the third and second lane, or from the hard shoulder to close the
first and second lane. Officers attending an incident requiring a second
lane closure should use their discretion as to which pattern of coning is
adopted. Choosing the safest option according to the nature of the
incident and the location.

Protection of the scene is vital and all other action must be secondly
at the initial stage.

„Rearward facing only‟ lights, where fitted, should be used at a scene

and then only sufficient to adequately warn approaching traffic. The

164
excessive use of emergency warning lights at the scene of an incident
can have an adverse effect on traffic on both carriage ways.
5.4 „E‟ EXAMINE SCENE

A quick examination should be made of the scene to determine whether

assistance is required. Sufficient information should be obtained and
passed by radio to the motorway supervisor for an assessment as to the
extent of any further action, which needs to be taken. Radio contact
must be maintained at all times and control constantly updated.

The basis of this assessment should provide information on the

following:

 Likelihood of further accidents.

 Extent of obstruction of both carriage ways.

 The need for a carriage way closure.

 The need for further police personnel or special equipment.

 The possibility of radioactive, corrosive or explosive

Substances being involved.

 Number of injured persons, the severity of injuries and the need for
the attendance of paramedic who will in turn advise if a doctor or
hospital emergency unit is required.

 Number of ambulances required.

 The presence and likelihood of the fire and the need for special
equipment carried by the fire service, bearing in mind the fire service
are trained in the release of trapped persons and I dealing with
hazardous chemicals.
 Visibility and road surface conditions at the scene.

165
 It will be necessary at an early stage to move disabled vehicles from
the carriage ways to the hard shoulder. A request should be made for
the appropriate breakdown equipment to attend.
 Consider the need to inform the media

5.5 „C‟ CASUALTIES

When directing patrols to the scene of the accident, control staff will
advise motorway personnel if an ambulance has been instructed to
attend. Frequently the police are the first emergency service to arrive
but first aid should not be rendered to injure persons until the scene has
been fully protected. Thereafter police should assist casualties within
limits of their first aid abilities.
An early check should be made to establish that all casualties have been
found. This is essential at night when a person or vehicle might have
been throw down an embankment or persons trapped in wreckage.
Where injured persons are removed from the scene the name of the
hospital should, if possible, be obtained from the ambulance crew.
5.6 „A‟ AMBULANCE AND OTHER EMERGENCY SERVICES
emergency services arriving at the scene will be directed to the best
position in which to stop their vehicles taking into consideration the
danger of passing traffic and the position, numbers and the extent of
injuries to casualties. Emergency services will normally be directed
within the coned barrier and protected at the rear by a police vehicle.
Where possible ambulance loading points should be beyond the incident
and protected by it. (See diagram).
To avoid confusion to the motorway public, only the rear emergencies
vehicles that are protecting the scene should keep their emergency
lights on. All ancillary vehicles should have their emergency lights
switched off.
In the event of a fire at which the fire service are in attendance, the
responsibility for fire fighting will be with the senior fire officer. The
fire ground will be under their control and it will be the responsibility of
the police to assist with any reasonable request.
The co-operation of all emergency services will be required to maintain
a free passage to anf from the scene and to keep traffic moving at a

166
controlled speed. The overall control of the situation is a police
responsibility.

5.7 „R‟ REMOVE OBSTRUCTION

breakdown vehicles arriving at the scene will be controlled and directed
by the police. All efforts must be concentrated on clearance of the
carriage way and to reopen the route as soon as possible.

5.8 „D‟ DETAINED INVESTIGATION

This will mean the normal; system of accident investigation and
reporting in the force concerned. Witnesses will be removed from the
vicinity of the accident as soon as possible. All property found at the
scene and in vehicles will be dealt with as per local force instructions.
Where large commercial loads are involved, it will be a police
responsibility to safeguard the load until the owner had been informed
and arrangements made for its removal.

5.9 LANDING HELICOPTERS ON ROADS

5.1 GENERAL
Whilst the safety of a helicopter and its passengers remains the
responsibility for scene management and the control and safety of all
road users.

5.10 GUIDELINES
Helicopters will not land on a road unless the following requirements
can be complied with:-
 Whenever possible the helicopter shall first land adjacent to the road.
 Where a landing is made on a road, radio or verbal communication
must have taken place with the police to confirm the road is spare
and the pilot has authority to exercise his discretion to land.
 Minimum amount of time shall be spent on the road by the helicopter
sufficient to fulfil its emergency function.
*******
6. COMPLETE BLOCKAGE OF CARRIAGE WAY

167
6.1 DIVERSION FROM MOTORWAY
In the event of a serious accident or obstruction, it may be necessary to
close on or both carriage ways of a motorway between junctions.
Control must be informed immediately.
Under normal weather conditions, the closure will be effected at the
junction prior to the incident. Access link roads are also to be closed.
Under certain FOG conditions or if a more suitable diversion can be
planned, consideration could be given to the closure at earlier junctions.
Police personnel and equipment may be required to effect the closure in
the first instance, later supplemented by Agent Authority signing and
lighting.
The positioning of the police vehicle and signs, cones etc, should
normally follow the incident and accident procedure.
Further assistance should be requested through control.
Access link roads from Service Areas to main carriage way must also
be closed Traffic may leave the service area via the service road under
such conditions.

6.2 REARWARD RELIEF – TAILBACK

When it is anticipated that a carriage blockage will be for a lengthy
period, consideration should be given for the removal of the stationary
vehicles located to the rear of the incident back to a point where traffic
is being diverted off the motorway.
This must be undertaken as a last resort, under full police control and
with the authority of the police incident officer.
The system of the rearward relief is to turn the rear-most vehicles in the
queue around and escort them back along the me carriage way, treating
that carriage way as a normal two-way road, to the point where they
will leave the motorway under police control. Particular care must be
taken to avoid any danger of broken down vehicles restarting their
journey towards oncoming traffic.
All other emergency services and agencies must be notified that this
procedures in operation and that the rules of a two way road apply to
that particular carriage way.

168
********

7. TRAFFIC QUEUE MANAGEMENT

Slow moving and stationary traffic on motorways can be caused by a
variety of factors such as:
a. Excess volume of traffic.
b. Accidents or other carriage way obstructions.
The use of a police vehicle for traffic queue management is not always
possible due to the lack of police resources.

7.2 „TAILBACK‟ PROCEDURE

The procedure is to prevent further incidents involving stationary or
queuing traffic by warning oncoming vehicles of the hazard ahead. It is
achieved by positioning a marked patrol unit, displaying emergency
lighting, on the hard shoulder at least 2000 meters to the rear of the
queuing vehicles. This unit will reverse or drive forward as necessary to
be able to maintain that constant distance. The crew will supply regular
reports on „tail back‟ conditions to Control in order that motorway
signals can be updated.

8. HARD SHOULDER

8.1 Use of the hard shoulder by emergency services must be kept to a

minimum. The hard shoulder may be the only rout open to patrols
attending incidents when there is heavy build-up of traffic prior to an
incident. In such cases, it must be borne in mind by each patrol that
there is a tendency by motorists, on seeing emergency lighting and
hearing sirens, to veer onto the hard shoulder to clear a way through for
the emergency services. It is therefore recommended that the use of
sirens to be kept to a minimum and that extreme caution be exercised.
(NOTE-Non emergency service vehicles may only be permitted to
travel on the hard shoulder with the express permission of the Police
incident officer. Where practicable, such vehicles should be under
police escort).

169
8.2 USE OF HARD SHOULDER AS TEMPORARY RUNNING
LANE
Emergencies may seriously reduce the capacity of motorways. It may
then become necessary to allow traffic to use the hard shoulder as a
temporary running lane. It will always be necessary to use signs to
indicate that drivers may use the hard shoulder, and to rejoin the
carriage way.

A „USE THE HARD SHOULDER‟ sign, protected by a line of cones

should be placed at the desired commencement of the „running lane‟
section of hard shoulder.
A further line of cones placed at an angle across the hard shoulder to
prevent early access should precede this.

A „REJOIN CARRIAGE WAY‟ sign and a line of cones should be

placed on the hard shoulder at the completion of the section to indicate
the path traffic should follow to rejoin the main carriage way.
A further line of cones should be placed in a taper from the hard
shoulder across lane one, to lane two, in order to direct vehicles not
previously using the hard shoulder, into lane two, thereby allowing
traffic from the hard shoulder o rejoin the main carriage way in safety.
(See diagram).
The actual number of cones to be used will be at the discretion of the
officer in charge but should be sufficient for tapers of 100 meters per
lane.
Police have the powers to use any authorized sign in an emergency
when it may be displayed for up to seven days.

(One page of diagrams)

170
9. EQUIPMENT

9.1 GENERAL
Equipment carried in a vehicle should be sufficient to implement the
basic „ACE CARD‟ procedure. Additional equipment may be carried
according to local instructions, which reflect individual force
requirements.
It is essential that crews taking over motorway vehicles check the
equipment and immediately replace defective or missing items.
Motorway personnel must familiarize themselves with the operation of
each and every part of the equipment.
All signs used for advance warning must have reflective surfaces. At
night portable blue flashing lamps should be used in conjunction with
cones.

9.2 USE OF EMERGENCY LIGHTING ON POLICE VEHICLE

In order to educate the motoring public to react uniform actions by the
police on the motorways, the following instructions on the use of
emergency lighting, which has been fitted, to police vehicles will
normally be complied with.

 ATTENDING INCIDENTS
Activate forward facing emergency lighting equipment.

 ON ARRIVAL
Switch off forward facing emergency lighting equipment.

 INCIDENT ON THE CARRIAGE WAY

Activate all rear facing emergency lighting equipment.

 INCIDENT CONFINED TO HARD SHOULDER ONLY

171
 Use rear facing red flashing lights and the vehicles amber hazard
warning lights.

Blue lights will cause traffic to slow down and should not be used as a
matter of course. Rears facing red flashing lights are considered to be
most effective when there is no intentions to slow the speed of the
traffic and should be used in conjunction with the vehicle amber
flashing hazard warning lights.
************

10. HAZARDOUS SUBSTANCES

10.1 GENERAL GUIDELINES

It is essential that patrol officers recognize the hazards facing them
when attending or dealing with incidents involving hazardous
substances.

IF IN DOUBT STAY OUT

It is vital that officers do not place themselves in positions, which could

render them unable to protect themselves, their colleagues and the
public.
The fire and Rescue Service posses the necessary equipment, expertise
and training to allow a much closer approach than Police does.
It may be better to stop all vehicles until the Fire and Rescue Service
attend. Always be guided by the advice of the Senior Fire Officer.

10.2 ACTION

 Any approach should if possible, be made so that as you face the

incident the wind blows from behind you towards the incident.
 It is worth remembering that most substances are heavier than air.
That means they will ordinarily travel down hill so keep until if
possible.

172
 Stop in a safe position. This may well be a greater distance than
recommended under ACE CARD, depending on the circumstances.
 Inform Control immediately.
 Officers should go no closer than absolutely necessary to request
driver/occupant to come to the police vehicle with the written
information or to view the markings on the affected vehicle or
container.

*********
11. VEHICLE BREAKDOWNS
11.1 GENERAL
If a vehicle is stranded in the carriage way the first consideration should
be the removal of its occupants to a safe place and the vehicle to the
hard shoulder as quickly a possible. Consideration should be given to
the use of the patrol car to protect the scene from approaching traffic,
come off, if circumstances dictate.
Breakdowns involving buses or coaches carrying passengers should be
treated with priority to ensure the safe removal of all passengers.
Consideration should be given providing some protection to the vehicle
if it is impractical for passengers to alight on the verge well away from
the hard shoulder. It passengers are removed into the verge until a relief
coach attends then specific instructions should be given as to their
conduct and the dangers of being close to the motorway carriage way. If
passengers remain on the vehicle then they should be advised to vacate
the rear rows of seats to minimize injury should the vehicle be impacted
from the rear. The circumstances of each situation will determine the
correct course of action from those indicated above.
When a vehicle requires work to be undertaken to its offside, then a
safety zone should be created. To achieve this, a physical lane one
closure may, be necessary.
Should an exceptionally heavy vehicle become stationary on a bridge,
the agent authority must be contacted for any action they may deem
appropriate.

173
When a police patrol finds a broken down vehicle on the motorway and
the driver requires the services of a motoring organization, a garage or
other assistance, details must be passed by radio to control.
Where the breakdown involves a lone female or other vulnerable person
the police patrol should offer every assistance having regard to their
safety or special needs.

Broken down vehicles, which have to be removed from the

motorway for repair must be towed to the next motorway exit.

11.2 ABANDONED VEHICLES

It is prohibited to leave a vehicle at rest on the hard shoulder of a
motorway „longer than necessary‟.
Where vehicles are found abandoned and the driver has made no report
to Control, removal should, if conditions allow be effected as soon as is
possible. Force procedures relating to such removals should be
complied with.
A patrol may institute the immediate removal of any broken down or
abandoned vehicle, which in their opinion constitutes a hazard to other
motorway users. During the hours of darkness on an unlit section of
motorway, immediate arrangements will be made to remove any vehicle
left without adequate lights.

11.3 STOLEN VEHICLE

Where a stolen vehicle is found abandoned on a motorway it should be
removed immediately and dealt with in accordance with force
instructions.

***************

12 ABNORMAL LOADS

12.1 GENERAL
All loads, the dimensions of which are in excess of these deemed
normal MUST be notified to police.

174
Motorway police are to provide an escort where local force policy
dictates.
Abnormal loads should be encouraged to move at off peak times
including night, with enhanced lighting, when it is safe to do so. The
enhanced lighting should, in addition to all other legal requirements
consist of two illuminated amber beacons each within 305mm, of lateral
extremities of load.
Only motorway patrols should escort abnormal loads on the motorway.
The safety of all motorway users is paramount and every effort should
be made to complete the escort without stopping on the motorway.
To achieve this, close co-operation and free flow of information
between control rooms about the progress of loads is vital.
The movement of more than one load in convoy should be considered
favorable, taking account of their speeds, dimensions, rout(s) and
prevailing traffic and weather conditions.
When escorting loads police vehicles will normally be positioned not
less than 50 meters to the rear and occupy a complete lane(under
normal circumstances they should not straddle lanes). The rear facing
emergency warning lights will be operated at all times when on escort
duties.
The drivers of abnormal loads MUST be made aware of their
responsibilities when driving on the motorway. Drivers of abnormal
loads are not allowed to drive on the hard shoulder, however, the load
may be allowed to overhand the hard shoulder. Officers escorting such
loads MUST continually check the hard shoulder ahead of the load for
obstructions and be in a position to prevent or restrict overtaking of the
load when it moves out to pass such obstructions.
The breakdown of an abnormal load on a bridge or elevated section
may present serious structural problems should this occur, crews must
notify control immediately and seek directions.

NOTE
Under no circumstances will an escorted abnormal load be allowed to
deviate from its notified route without prior consultation with control.

175
********

13.1 ADVERSE WEATHER

13.1 GENERAL
it will not be necessary for motorway patrols to „stand by‟ solely
because of adverse weather conditions, e.g. snow, ice, frost of fog. At
such times, frequent checks will be requires on the changing weather
conditions.
Motorway maintenance units will also require notice of changes in road
conditions and this will be supplied to them by control from information
provided by motorway patrols.

13.2 ICE AND SNOW

During the winter months, motorway maintenance units may be manned

throughout the day and night. When frost and or snow warnings are
given to motorway maintenance staff, gritting machines will tour the
motorway at regular intervals; treatment should take place before any
ice forms or snow becomes established.
Where a carriage way is affected by ice or snow patrol officers covering
that section motorway should inform the control, who will request the
appropriate motorway maintenance unit to attend.

13.3 STRONG WINDS

Strong winds can often be a hazard on motorways, especially to
caravans and high winds on any section of motorway should reported
by motorway patrols to control for the appropriate action to be taken.

FOG PROCEDURE

176
The meteorological officer definition of „fog‟ is when visibility varies
between 50 and 200 meters and dense fog when visibility is less than 50
meters.
Officers will notify control immediately fog or similar hazards, which
reduce visibility, affect the motorway. Further visibility reports should
be passed to control at regular intervals.
WHEN VISIBILITY DROPS TO 200 METERS OR LESS

The Control room will alert the other emergency services.

Motorway officers should continue to patrol having regard to prevailing
conditions. As an example to others using the motorway they should;
1. Drive at a safe speed.
2. Switch on appropriate lighting.

In such conditions officers should at regular intervals stop at suitable

points to combat the effects fatigue.
Should the density of fog reduce visibility to such an extent that it
precludes the continuance of patrols, crews will park in strategic
locations.
The control room must be kept informed of all changes in conditions.
Under no circumstances should vehicles be stopped for routine traffic
matters.

REMEMBER DRIVING IN ADVERSE CONDITIONS IS

HAZARDOUS AND REQUIRES FULL CONCENTRATION.

***********

14.1 CLOSURE OF SERVICE AREAS

It may be necessary to close a service area for situations such as public
disorder, bomb threats etc.
The management of a service area will have the responsibility to make
the decision regarding its closure and this may be taken after
consultation with a senior police officer.

177
The closure of the access slip road(s) to traffic from the main carriage
way, will be the sole responsibility of motorway patrols.
Closure will be affected by the placing of coning and relevant signing,
including lighting during the hours of darkness.

LING TERM CLOSURE SHOULD BE ACHIEVED THROUGH

CONSULTATION WITH THE APPROPRIATE AGENT
AUTHORITY.

******

INCIDENT AND ACCIDENT PROCEDURE

INITIAL RESPONSE
The first call regarding a serious incident if often garbled and
confusing. It is therefore extremely important to obtain accurate
and detailed

178
 Sectors Breakdown of M2

Beat No. Km from Beat Villages/Cities

Distance
Lahore
Beat No.1 315 – 353 Islamabad Trunal More to Chakri Interchange

38 km

Beat No.2 267 – 314 Chakri Interchange to Balksar Interchange

47 km

Beat No.3 214 – 266 Balksar Interchange to Lilla Interchange

52 km

Beat No.4 213 – 163 Lailla Interchange to Sial Chowk 50

km

Beat No.5 162 – 120 Sial Chowk to PindiBhattian Interchange

42 km

Beat No.6 119 – 82 PindiBhattin Interchange to Khankadogara 37

km

179
Beat No.7 82 – 47 Khankadogara to Sheikhupura Interchange 35

km

Beat No.8 47 – 01 Sheikhupura to Shaspure Interchange Lahore

47 km

Sectors Breakdown of N-5

Beat No. Km from Beat Villages/Cities
Distance
Karachi

N-5 South Sector

Beat-1 36 to 70 Km/h Karachi Toll Plaza to Noriabad 34

Km
Beat-2 70 to 114 Km/h Noriabad (Awan Pump) to Pak Pump 34
Km
Beat-3 114 to 146 Km/h Pak Pump to Hyderabad Toll Plaza
32 Km
Beat-4 Hydeabad Toll Plaza to Halla(Saeedabad)

N-5 Central

180
Beat No. Beat Villages/Cities
Beat-18 Bwp to Basti Malook
Beat-19 Basti Malook to Multan
Beat-20 Multan to Khanawal Toll Plaza
Beat-21 Khanawal Toll Plaza to Chehawatni
Beat-22 Chehawatni to Shaiwal
Beat-23 Shaiwal to Okara
Beat-24 Okara to Jamber Kalan
Beat-25 Jamber Kalan to Thokar Lahore
Beat-25-A Babusabu to Ravi Bridge Band Road
Lahore
N-5 North
Beat No. Beat Villages/Cities
Beat-26-A Ravi Bridge to Moreedki
Beat-26 Moreedki to Gujranawala
Beat-27 Gujranawala to Gujrat
Beat-28 Gujrat to Kharian
Beat-29 Kharian to Jhelum
Beat-30 Jhelum to Gujjar Khan
Beat-31 Gujjar Khan to Rawat
Beat-32 Rawalpindi to Texila
Beat-33 Texila to Kamra
Beat-34 Kamra to Adamzai Noshehra

181
Beat-35 Adamzai Noshehra to Jhagra Peshwar
Detail N-5 Total Distance 1798 Kms
Total zones = 03
Functional Beats = 22
Nonal Functional = 13
Total Beats 35
M-2 NH & MP Enforcement

DIG M-2 SSP M-2 (North)

SSP M-2 (South)
SSP M-2 (North) CPO Beat -01
CPO Beat -02
CPO Beat -03
SSP M-2 (South) CPO Beat -04
CPO Beat -05
CPO Beat -06
CPO Beat -07
CPO Beat -08
CPO Beat/Strength SPOs/20(Inspectors)
Pos/25(SubInspectors)
APOsDvr/04
APOsW/O/04
APOsSG/04
Vehicles/Beat Cars = 02 , Pick-up = 02
Hi-ace = 01 M/Cycle= 02

N-5 NH & MP Enforcement

DIG N-5(North) SSP N-5 (North-03)

SSP N-5 (North-02)
SSP N-5 (North-01)

DIG N-5 (Central) SSP N-5 (Central-02)

SSP N-5 (Central-01)

182
DIG N-5 (South) SSP N-5 (South)

SSP N-5 (North-03) CPO/Beat 35, 34, 33& 32

SSP N-5 (North-02) CPO/Beat 31, 30, 29& 28

SSP N-5 (North-01) CPO/Beat 27, 26, 26/-A

SSP N-5 (Central-02) CPO/Beat 25-A, 25, 24, 23, 22

SSP N-5 (Central-01) CPO/Beat 21, 20, 19, 18

SSP N-5 (South) CPO/Beat 04, 03, 02 & 01

.Foreword

The Pakistan Highway Code was last updated 25 years back. As

such it is out dated and incomplete in the context of technological
advances in the field of high way safety. It also does not contain any
instructions for the use of motorway.

This Highway and Motor Code (HMC) contains important advice

for all road users. It is designed to prevent accidents by ensuring that we
designed to prevent accidents by ensuring that we all adopt the same
rules when using the road. The rules are just not for motorists; they
apply also to pedestrians & cyclists. The Highway & Motorway Code is

183
essential reading for every one. The rules in the code do not give you
the right of way in any circumstances – but they do tell you when you
should give way to others. Always give way if it can help to avoid an
accident or ease congestion.

High way safety has developed over the years into a

comprehensive set of rules. Observance is best achieved by making
certain that the rules are seen to be both necessary and fair and that they
are as straightforward as possible. The Highway Code helps to ensure
that the rules are more easily understood. Most people follow the rules.
For those who do not, road traffic lays down both general bad driving
offences and more specific ones aimed at particular types of behaviour.
Abide by the rules for your own safety and the safety of others. All road
users share a personal responsibility to reduce the terrible toll of death
and injury on the roads.

Pakistan Highways and Motorway Police

Ministry of Communications

184
FOR PEDESTRIANS

GENERAL INSTRUCTIONS

1. Avoid walking next to the kerb with your back to the traffic. If
you have to step into the road, watch out for traffic coming from both
sides. Walk on the side of oncoming traffic.
2. Where there is a footpath use it. If there is no footpath, walk on
the right shoulder of the road. If there is no shoulder, walk along the
right ective materials (e.g. reflective armbands and sashes) which can
be seen in headlights up to three times as far away as non reflective
materials.
3. Do not let young children out alone on the pavement or road.
When taking children out, walk between them and the traffic and
hold their hands firmly. Strap very young children in push-chairs or
use reins.
4. You MUST NOT walk on motorway on their slip roads except in
emergency.

185
 HOW TO CROSS THE ROAD

5. Never Allow Children out alone until they can understand traffic
rules and use it properly. The age when they can do this is
different for each child. Many children fewer than Ten cannot
judge how fast vehicles are going or how far away they are.
Children learn example, so parents should always use the Code in
full when out with children. Parents are responsible for deciding at
what age their children can use it safely by them selves.

Parents should not allow small children to cross a road alone and
never let the children play on or near the road.

a. Remember that it is safer to cross footbridges, islands, Zebra

and Pelican crossings, traffic lights or where there is a police
officer, school crossing patrol. Other wise choose a place where
you can see clearly in all directions. Try to avoid crossing
between parked cars. Move to a space where drivers can see
you clearly.

b. Do stop just before you get to kerb – where you can see if
anything is coming, but where you will not be too close to the
traffic. If there is no pavement, stand back from the edge of the
road but make sure you can still see approaching traffic.

c. Look around as traffic could come from any direction.

Listen also because you can sometimes traffic before you se it.

d. If there is any traffic near, let it go first. Then look around

again. Listen to make sure no other traffic is coming.

186
 e. If there is no traffic near, it is safe to cross. Remember, even
if traffic is a long way off, it may be approaching very quickly.
When it is safe, walk straight across the road – do not run.

f. If you have started to cross, keep looking and listening in

case there is any traffic you did not see or in case other traffic
suddenly appears.

Zebra Crossing
6. When you cross the road at a junction look out for traffic coming
round the corner, especially from behind you.
7. When you are on a Zebra Crossing you have the right of way, but
allow sufficient time to the approaching vehicles to give way, and
keep a lookout to right and left as you cross.

8. Give traffic plenty of time to see you and to stop before you start
to cross. Vehicles need more time to stop when rain or ice have made
the road slippery. If necessary put one foot on the crossing, the traffic
does not have to stop. But do not cross until traffic has stopped. Do
not push a wheel chair or pram on the crossing until the traffic has
stopped.

9. When the traffic has stopped, walk straight across but keep
looking both ways and listening in case a driver or rider has not seen
you and attempts to overtake a vehicle that has stopped.

10. If there is an island in the middle of a crossing wait on the

island and follow previous rules before you cross the second half of
the road – it is a separate crossing.

Pelican Crossing

187
 11. For safe crossing of roads by pedestrian at places, other than
the intersections, special signals are provided. These crossing are
called Pelican Crossing. If there is a Pelican crossing nearby, use it.
Do not cross at the side of crossing on the zigzag lines – it is very
dangerous. At this type of crossing the traffic lights instruct, the
traffic when to stop and pedestrians, when to cross. When the red
figure shows, do not cross. Press the button on the box and wait.
When the lights change to show a steady green figure check that
traffic has stopped and then cross with care. (At some Pelicans there
is also a bleeping sound or voice to tell blind or partially sighted
people when the steady green figure will begin to flash. This means
that you should not start to cross. But if you have already started you
will have time to finish crossing safely.

12. A „staggered‟ crossing should be treated as two separate

crossings. On reaching the central island you MUST press the button
again to obtain a steady Green figure.

At Traffic Lights

13. Some traffic lights have pedestrian signals similar to those at

Pelican crossings. The green figure does not flash but there will be
enough time to finish crossing after it goes out. If there are not
pedestrian signals, watch carefully and do not cross until the traffic
lights are red. Remember that traffic lights may let traffic move in
some lanes while other lanes are stopped.

Crossing Controlled by police

14. Where a police officer or school crossing patrol is

controlling the traffic, do not cross the road until they signal you to
do so. Always cross in front of them.

188
Guard Rails

15. Guard rails are there for your safety. Cross the road only at
the gaps provided for pedestrians. Do no climb over the guard rails
or walk between them and the road.

One – Way Streets

16. Check which way the traffic is moving. Do not cross until it
is safe to do so without stopping. In some one-way streets, bus lanes
operate in the opposite direction to the rest of the traffic.

Parked Vehicles

17. In case you have to cross between parked vehicles, use the
outside edge of the vehicles as if it were the kerb. Stop there and
make sure you can see all around and that the traffic can see you. Do
not stand in front of or behind any vehicle that has its engine
running.

At Night

18. In case there is no pedestrian crossing or central island

nearby, cross near a street light so that traffic can see you more
easily. It is harder for others to see you at night so wear something
reflective.

19. In case you see or hear ambulances, fire engines, police or

other emergency vehicles with their blue, red or amber lights
flashing or their sirens sounding, KEEP OFF THE ROAD.

189
 20. Only get on or off a bus when it has stopped to allow you to
do so. Never cross the road directly behind or in front of a bus. Wait
until it has moved off and you can see the road clearly in both
directions.

21. Take extra care at railway level crossings.

FOR ALL CATEGORY OF DRIVERS

GENERAL INSTRUCTIONS

Vehicle
22. You MUST ensure you vehicle is road worthy. Take special
care of lights, brakes, steering, tyres (including spare), exhaust
system, seat belts, demisters, windscreen wipers and washers. Keep
windscreens, windows, lights, indicators, reflectors, mirrors and
number plates clean and clear. Ensure your seat, seatbelt, head
restraint and mirrors are adjusted correctly before you drive
23. All transport vehicles, passenger as well as goods, or any
vehicle drawing a trailer must only use extreme left lane unless there
are exceptional circumstances i.e. to overtake vehicles moving below
the minimum posted speed limits or unavoidable in the interest of
safety.

Loads
24. Any loads carried or towed MUST be secure and MUST
NOT strict out dangerously. You MUST NOT overload your vehicle
or trailer. Mark the ends with red flags by day and red lights by
nights.

Motorcycles
25. The rider and the pillion passenger on a motorcycle, scooter
or moped MUST wear an approved safety helmet which MUST be

190
 fastened securely. It is also advisable to wear eye protectors, and
strong boots, gloves and clothes that will help protect you if you fall
off. Pillion passengers MUST astride the machine on a proper seat
and keep both feet on the footrests. To help you to be seen, wear
something light coloured or bright. Fluorescent material helps in the
day light, as do dipped headlights on large machines. Reflective
material helps in the dark.

Physical Condition
26. If you feel tired or ill, DO NOT DRIVE.

27. Driving can make you feel sleepy. To help avoid this, make
sure there is a supply of fresh air into your vehicle. If you feel tired
while driving, find a safe place to stop and rest.

28. You MUST NOT drive under the influence of drugs or

medicines. When taking prescribed medicines, ask your doctor if it is
safe to drive.

Eye – Sight

29. You MUST be able to read a vehicle number plate from a

distance of 20.5 meters (67ft) which is about five car lengths. If you
need glasses (or contact lenses) to do this you MUST wear them
when driving.
30. At night or in poor visibility, do not use tinted glasses,
lenses or visors. Do not use spray-on or other tinting materials for
windows and windscreens.
Beginners
31. Learner drivers in a car MUST be supervised by someone
experienced who has held a licence for that type of car (automatic or
manual) for at least three years and still holds one.

191
32. If you are learning to ride a motorcycle, scooter or moped
you MUST take basic training with an experienced driver before
riding on the road. You MUST NOT carry a pillion passenger, pull a
trailer. Learner‟s should not ride a solo motorcycle with an engine
capacity in excess of 125 CC.
33. All vehicles under the control of learner MUST display L-
Plate.
34. DO NOT DRINK AND DRIVE. Drinking alcohol and
taking drugs seriously affects your driving. It reduces your co-
ordination, slows down your reactions, affects your judgment of
speed, distance and risk, and gives you a false sense of confidence.
Remember: you may still be unfit to drive in the evening after
drinking at lunchtime or in the morning after drinking the previous
evening.
Seat Belts
35. Wearing seat belts saves lives and reduces the risk of serious
injury in an accident. You MUST wear a seat belt if one is
available. Basic guidelines are given

REAR
FRONT SEAT WHOSE
SEAT RESPONSIBI
LITY
DRIVER
Must be _____ Driver
worn if
fitted
CHILD Child Child Driver
UNDER 3 restraint restraine
YEARS d

192
 Child Aged Seat-belt Seat-belt Driver
3 To 11 or child or child
And Under restraint restraint
1.5 Meters
(About 5
Feet) In
Height
Child Aged Adult Adult Driver
12 To 13 seat belt seat belt
Or must be must be
Younger worn if worn if
Child 1.5 available available
Meters Or
More In
Height
ADULT Must be Must be Passenger
PASSENG worn if worn if
ERS available available
(Fig-1)

36. An appropriate child restraint is a baby carrier, child seat,

harness or booster seat appropriate to the child‟s weight.
37. Do not let children sit behind the rear seats in an estate care
or hatchback. Make sure that child safety door locks, where fitted,
are used when children are in the car. Keep children under control in
the car.
38. You MUST exercise proper control of your vehicle at all
times. Do not use a hand-held telephone or microphone while you
are driving. Find a safe place to stop first. Do not speak into a hands

193
free microphone. It will take your mind off the road. You MUST
NOT step on the hard shoulder of a motorway to answer or make a
call except in an emergency
39. You MUST obey all traffic light signals and traffic signs
giving orders. Make sure you also know and act on all other traffic.
40. All signals are signs are given in Annex A to D. Give signals
to help and warn other road users, including pedestrians. Give them
clearly and in plenty of time. Make sure your indicators are cancelled
after use.
41. Watch out for signals given by other road users and take
appropriate action.
42. You MUST obey signals by police officers and signs used
by school crossing patrols.

BASICS OF DRIVING

Before Moving
43. Use your mirrors before you move off. Signal if
necessary before moving out. Look as well for a final check. Only
move off when it is safe to do so.
While Driving
44. Keep to the left, except where road signs or markings
indicate otherwise or when you want or overtake, turn right or
pass parked vehicles or pedestrians in the road. Let others
overtake you if they want to.
45. You MUST NOT drive on a pavement or footpath except
for access to property.
46. Use your mirrors frequently so you always know what is
behind and to each side of you. Use them well before you carry
out a manoeuvre or change speed; then give the correct signal if
you need to. Motorcyclists should always look behind before
manoeuvring.

194
 Remember: mirror- signal manoeuvre
47. Watch out for cycles and motorcycles. Two wheelers are
far harder to spot than larger vehicles – but their riders have the
same rights as other road users and are particularly vulnerable.
Give riders plenty of room, especially if you are driving a long
vehicle or towing a trailer.
48. Do not hold up a long queue of traffic. If you are driving
a large or slow-moving vehicle and the road is narrow or
winding, or there is a lot of traffic coming towards you, pull in
where you can do so safely so that other vehicles can overtake.
49. While driving a vehicle one should no continuously talk
or argue with the fellow passengers. Singing and other such
actions, which may distract the attention, should also be avoided.

Littering
50. Do not lighted cigarettes or refuse on the road.

Speed Limits
51. Drive slowly in residential areas. In some roads there are
features such as road humps and narrowing intended to slow
you down. A 32 Km/h maximum speed limit may also be in
force. Remember by heart the maximum speed limits as
provided in law for various roads. Never exceed the posted
speed limit. Where speed limit is not specified do not exceed.

195
(May vary from time to time)

MAXIMUM PERMISSIBLE SPEED LIMITS

Maximum Minimum
Type of Highways Kilometer Kilometer
Per Hour Per Hour
(A) Rural Highways:
Primary Upto 120 65
Secondary 100 --------------
Tertiary 80 --------------
(B) Urban Highways
Primary 100 50
Secondary 80 --------------
Residential Street 50 --------------
(C) Near mosque,
40 --------------
school and hospitals

(Fig-2)

Note: Primary – motorway, expressway, dual carriage.

Secondary – Two lanes.

196
 Tertiary – Signal lane, gravel.

52. On wet, muddy or icy roads; during night times and when
visibility is poor, the permissible speed limit should be reduced by
16 Kmh for each adverse factor or to 32 Kmh whichever is higher.
A speed limit does not mean it is safe drive at that speed. Drive
according to the conditions. Slow down if road is wet or icy and in
fog. Drive more slowly at night when it is harder to see
pedestrians and cyclists.

Stopping Distances
54. Drive at a speed that will allow you to stop well within the
distance you can see to be clear. Leave enough space between you and
the vehicle in front so that you can pull up safely if it suddenly slows
down or stop. The safe rule is never to get closer than the overall
stopping distances shown on next page. But in good conditions on roads
carrying fast traffic, a two second time gap may be sufficient. The gap
should be at least doubled on wet roads and increased further on icy
roads. Large vehicles and motorcycles need time to stop than cars. Drop
back if someone overtakes and pulls into the gap in front of you. (Fig -
3)
Fog Code
55. Before driving in fog, consider if your journey is essential. If
it is, allow extra time. Make sure you windscreen, windows and
lights are clean and that all your lights (including brake lights) are
working.

When driving in fog:

197
 See and be seen. If you cannot see clearly use dipped headlights.
Use front or rear fog lights if visibility is seriously reduced but
switch them off when visibility improves. Use your windscreen
wipers and demisters.
 Check your mirror and slow down. Keep a safe distance behind
the vehicle in front. You should always be able to pull up within
the distance you can see clearly.
 Do not hang on to the tail lights of the vehicle in front; it gives a
false sense of security. In thick fog, if you can see the vehicle in
front you are probably too close unless you are travelling very
slowly.
 Be aware of your speed; you may be going much faster than you
think. Do not accelerate to get away from a vehicle which is too
close behind you. When you slow down, use your brakes so that
your brake lights warn drivers behind you.
 When the word „Fog‟ is shown on a roadside signal but the road
appears to be clear, be prepared for a bank of fog or drifting
smoke ahead. Fog can drift rapidly and is often patchy . Even if it
seems to be clearing, you can suddenly find yourself back in thick
fog.

Winter Driving
56. Prepare your vehicle for winter. Ensure that the battery is
well maintained and that there are appropriate anti-freeze agents
in the radiator and windscreen washer bottle.
57. In freezing or near freezing conditions, drive with great care
even if the roads have been gritted. Roads may be slippery and
surface conditions can change abruptly. Take care when
overtaking gritting vehicles, particularly if you are riding a
motorcycle.

198
58. D not drive in snow unless your journey is essential. If it is,
drive slowly but keep in as high a gear as possible to help avoid
wheel spin. Avoid harsh acceleration, steering and braking. You
MUST use headlights when visibility is seriously reduced by
falling snow.
59. Watch out for snow – ploughs which may throw out snow
on either side. Do not overtake them unless the lane you intend to
use has been cleared of snow.

Summer Driving
60. Use a coolant instead of ordinary water because in excessive
heat your vehicle is likely to get over heated and the engine may
also seize.
61. Keep the recommended tyre pressure of the lower readings.
Overheated tyre can burst leading to an accident.
62. If the engine gets heated take the following measures:

a. Stop and switch all systems.

b. Spray / throw cool water on the radiator to bring down the
temperature.
c. Don‟t remove the radiator cap immediately. Using a thick
cloth unscrew the radiator cap slowly and without removing
it allow the steam to ooze out slowly.
d. For lessening the intensity of steam coming out keep on
rotating the cap till it is safe to remove it.
e. Replenish the water the engine started & check temperature
levels. Once the reading is normal, drive.

199
63. Don‟t drive at excessive speeds and minimise the load of the
A.C on the engine by manipulating the thermostat.
Consideration to Pedestrians
64. Dive careful for deaf and blind people) or using guide dogs
and for people with other disabilities. Give them plenty of time to
cross the road. Do not assume that a pedestrian can hear your
vehicle coming; they may have hearing difficulties.
65. Drive slowly near school. In some places, there may be a
flashing amber signal below the „School‟ warning sign which tells
you that there may be children crossing the road ahead. When
these signals are flashing, drive very slowly until you are well
clear of the area. Drive carefully when passing a stationary bus
showing a „School Bus‟ sign as children may be getting on or off.
66. You MUST stop when a school crossing patrol shows a
„STOP‟ for children sign.
67. Be careful near a place where children have gathered to
purchase things to eat or drink. Children are more interested in
eatables than in traffic.
68. At road junctions, give way to pedestrians who are already
crossing the road into which you are turning.
69. Give way to pedestrians on a pavement you need to cross,
e.g. to reach a driveway.
70. Be prepared for pedestrians walking in the road, especially
on narrow country roads. Give them plenty of room. Take extra
care on left-hand bends and keep your speed down.
71. As you approach a Zebra crossing, look out for people
waiting to cross (especially children, elderly people or people with
disabilities). Be ready to slow down or stop to let them cross.

200
 When someone has stepped on to a crossing, you MUST give
way. Allow more time for stopping on wet or icy roads. Do not
wave people across; this could be dangerous if another vehicle is
approaching.
72. You MUST NOT overtake or park on a Zebra, Puffin or
Pelican crossing, including the area marked by zigzag lines. Even
when there are no zigzags, do not overtake just before the
crossing.(Fig-4)
73. In a queue of traffic, you MUST keep pedestrian crossing
clear.
74. At pelican crossings, a flashing amber light will follow the
red „STOP‟ light. When the amber light is flashing, you MUST
give way to any pedestrians on the crossing. A Pelican crossing
which goes straight across the road is one crossing even when
there is a central island and you MUST wait for pedestrians
crossing from the other side of the island. Do not harass
pedestrians – for example, by revving your engine.
75. At pedestrian crossing controlled by lights, give way to
pedestrians who are still crossing after the signal for vehicles has
changed to green(Fig-5).
76. When passing or meeting a procession or a body of troops or
police on the march, drive at a speed not greater than 24 kilo
meters an hour.
77. Slow down near schools hospitals and mosques.
78. Look and listen for ambulances, fire engines, police or other
emergency vehicles with flashing red, amber, blue lights or
sounding sirens. Make room for them to pass (if necessary by
pulling to the side of the road and stopping) but do not endanger
other road users.
Buses

201
79. Give way to buses whenever you can do so safely, especially
when they signal to pull away from bus stops. Look out for people
leaving the bus and crossing the road.
Animals
80. Watch out for animal s being led or ridden on the road and
take extra care at left-hand bends and on narrow country roads.
Drive slowly past animals. Give them plenty of room and be ready
to stop. Do not scare animals by sounding your horn or revving
your engine.
81. Look out for horse rider‟s signals and be aware that they
may not move to the centre of the road prior to turning right.
Riders to horses and ponies are often children – so take extra care.
82. Some roads (often called single-track roads) are only wide
enough for one vehicle. They may have special passing places.
Pull into a passing place on your left, or wait opposite a passing
place on your right, when you see a vehicle coming towards you
or the driver behind you wants to overtake. Give way to vehicles
coming uphill whenever you can. Do not park in passing places.

LANES AND LINES

83. A single broken line, with long markings and short gaps,
along the centre of the road is a hazard warning line. Don‟t cross it
unless you can see that the road is clear well ahead.
84. Where there are double white lines along the road and the
line nearest you is unbroken, you MUST NOT cross or straddle it
unless it is safe to do so and you need to do so enter adjoining
premises, or a side road, to pass a stationary vehicle, or pass a

202
 road maintenance vehicle, pedal cycle or horse moving at 16 km/h
or less.
85. Where there are double white lines along the road and the
line nearest to you is broken, you may cross the lines to overtake
if it is safe, provided you can do so before reaching an unbroken
white line on your side.
86. Areas of white diagonal stripes or white chevrons painted on
the road are to separate traffic lanes or to protect traffic turning
right. Where the marked area is bordered by an unbroken white
line, you MUST NOT enter it except in an emergency. Where the
line is broken, you should not enter the area unless you can see
that it safe to do so.
87. Short broken white lines divide the road into lanes – keep
between them. Coloured reflecting road studs may be used with
white lines - white studs to mark the lanes or middle of the road,
red studs by the central reservation of a dual carriageway. Green
studs may be used across lay-bys and side roads.
88. On some hills an extra uphill „crawler‟ lane may be
provided. Use this lane if you are driving a slow-moving vehicle
or if there are vehicles behind you wishing to overtake.
Lane Discipline
89. If you need to change lane, first use your mirrors to make
sure you will not force another driver or rider to swerve or slow
down. If it is safe to move over, signal before you do so.
Remember: mirror – signal manoeuvre
90. Change lane only when it is necessary and do not change
more than one lane at a time.
91. At some junctions, lanes may go in different directions.
Follow the signs and get into the correct lane in good time.

203
92. In a traffic hold-up, do not try to „jump the queue‟ by
cutting into another lane or by overtaking the vehicles in front of
you.
93. Where a single carriageway has three lanes and the road
marking do not give priority to traffic in either direction, use the
middle lane only for overtaking or turning right. Remember – you
have no more right to use the middle lane than a driver coming
from the opposite direction. Do not use the right – hand lane.
94. Where a single carriageway has four or more lanes, do not
use the lanes on the right-hand side of the road unless signs and
markings indicate that you can.
95. On a tow-lane dual carriageway, use the right-hand lane only
for overtaking or turning right.
96. On a three-lane dual carriageways, stay in the left-and lane.
If there are slower vehicles than you in that lane, use the middle
lane to overtaking them but return to the left-hand lane when it is
clear. The right-hand lane is for overtaking (or turning right); if
you use it for overtaking, move back into the middle lane and
them into the left-hand lane as soon as it is safe to do so.(fig-6)
97. In one-way streets, choose the correct lane for your exit as
soon as you can. Do not change lanes suddenly. Unless road signs
or markings indicate otherwise, choose the left-hand lane when
going to the left, the right-hand lane when going straight ahead.
Remember – traffic could be passing on both sides.
98. Cycle lanes are shown by road markings and signs. You
MUST NOT drive or park in a cycle lane marked by an unbroken
white line during its period of operations. DO NOT drive in a
cycle lane marked by a broken white line unless it is unavoidable.

204
 Position on Road
99. Keep well to the left of the road, but give pedestrians,
cyclists and other slow moving traffic sufficient room. Do not hug
the middle of the road.
Slow Moving Vehicles
100. Slow moving vehicles must keep to the extreme left of the
road.
Passing
101. When passing on-coming traffic on a two lane road, both
vehicles must move over to the left as much as possible. Each
vehicle must be in its respective half of the road.

RULES FOR OVERTAKING

102. Do not overtake unless you can do so safely. Make sure the
road is sufficiently clear ahead and behind. Don‟t get too close to
the vehicle you intend to overtake – it will obscure your view of
the road ahead. Use your mirrors. Signal before you start to move
out. Take extra care at night and in poor visibility when it is
harder to judge speed and distance.
Remember: mirrors – signals – manoeuvre
103. Once you have started to overtake, quickly move past the
vehicle you are overtaking, leaving it plenty of room. Then move
back to the left as soon as you can but do not cut in.
104. When overtaking motorcyclists, pedal-cyclists or horse
riders, give them at least as much room as you would give a car.
Remember that cyclists may be unable to ride in a straight line,
especially when it is windy or the road surface is uneven.

205
105. DO NOT overtake on the left unless:
 The vehicle in front is signalling to turn right, and you
can overtake on the left safely;
 Traffic is moving slowly in queues and vehicles in a lane
on the right are moving more slowly than you can.
106. In slow-moving traffic queues, move to a lane on your left
only to turn left. DO NOT change lanes to the left to overtake.
Cyclists and motorcyclists overtaking traffic queues should watch
out for pedestrians crossing between vehicles and vehicles
emerging from junctions.
107. DO NOT increase your speed when you are being overtaken.
Slow down if necessary to let the overtaking vehicle pass and pull
in.
108. On a two-lane single carriageway give way to vehicles
coming towards you before passing parked vehicles or other
obstructions on your side of the road.
109. (a) you MUST NOT overtake:
 if you would have to cross or straddle double white lines
with an unbroken lines near to you;
 if you are in the zigzag area at a pedestrian crossing;
 after a „No Overtaking‟ sign and until you pass a sign
cancelling the restriction.
(b)
(i) where you cannot see far enough ahead to be sure it is
safe, for example when you are approaching or at:
 a corner or bend;
 a hump bridge;
 the brow of a hill;
(ii) where you might come into conflict with other road
users, e.g.

206
  approaching or at a road junction on either side of the
road;
 where the road narrows;
 when approaching a school crossing patrol;
 where you would have to drive over an areas marked
with diagonal stripes or chevrons;
 where you would have to enter a lane reservation ofr
buses, or cyclists;
 between a bus and the kerb when it is at a stop;
 where traffic is queuing at junctions or road works;
 when you would force another vehicle to swerve or slow
down;
 at a level crossing;
if in doubt - don‟t overtake
110. before overtaking a vehicle at night, give signal of your
intention jto the vehicle in front by flashing your headlights a few
times and overtake only when there is no traffic approaching from
the opposite direction.
111. overtake only when the vehicle being overtaking is moving
at a speed at least 10 kmh slower than yours.
112. On narrow hilly roads, if you are going down hill, stop and
give way to vehicles proceeding uphill.
113. While overtaking, don‟t pullout sharply from behind or cut
in front. Change to right lane before reaching the minimum
following safe distance i.e. two second gap and revert to the left
lane only after the overtake vehicle can be seen in the rear view
mirror.

JUNCTIONS AND ROUNDABOUTS

207
114. Take extra care at junctions. Check your position and speed.
Junctions are particularly dangerous for cyclists, motorcyclists and
pedestrians, so watch out for them before you turn. watch out for
long vehicles which may be turning at a junction ahead; they may
have to use the whole width of the road to make the turn.
115. At a junction with a „STOP‟ sign and an unbroken white line
across the road, you MUST stop behind the line. Wait for a safe
gap in the traffic before you move off.
116. At a junction with broken white line across the road (it may
also have a “Give Way” sign or a triangle marked on the road),
you MUST give way to traffic on the other road.
117. When waiting at a junction, don‟t assume that a vehicle
coming from the right and signalling left will do so. Wait and
make sure.
118. Box junctions have cirss-cross yellow lines painted on the
road. You MUST NOT enter the box until your exit road or lane
from it is clear. But you may enter the box when you want to turn
right and are only stopped from doing so by oncoming traffic or
by vehicles waiting to turn right.
Junctions Controlled by Traffic Lights or Traffic Police
119. At junctions controlled by traffic lights, you MUST stop
behind the white „STOP‟ line across your side of the road unless
the light is green. You MUST NOT move forward when the red
and amber light are showing. Don‟t go forward when the traffic
lights are green unless there is room for you to clean the junctions
safely or you are taking up a possible to turn right.
120. When amber light is flashing, slow down proceed carefully.
When red light is flashing and give right-of-way.

208
121. If the traffic lights are not working, proceed with caution.
122. At an inter-section controlled by a traffic police.
a. Obey the signals of the traffic police only and ignore all
other traffic control devices.
b. Stop at the stop-line till the policeman gives signal to move
on.
123. Where traffic lights have a green filter arrow indicating a
filter-only lane, don‟t enter that lane unless you want to go in the
direction of the arrow. Give other traffic, especially cyclists, room
to move into the correct lane.
Turning
124. Get in the extreme let lane at least 200 meters before making
left turn and in the extreme right lane at least 200 meters before
making the right turn. Don‟t turn left from right lane and right
from left lane.
125. Give way to pedestrians crossing a road into which you are
turning.
Exclusive Turning Lanes
126. Where “Exclusive Turning Lanes” are provided, only use
right exclusive lane for turning right and left exclusive lane for
turning left.
Turning Right
127. When going straight across or turning right into a dual
carriageway, treat each half as a separate road. Wait in the central
reservation until there is safe gap in the traffic on the second half
for the length of your vehicle, wait until you can cross both
carriageways in one go.
128. Well before you turn right, use your mirrors to make sure
you know the position and movement of traffic behind you. (it

209
 may be noted that traffic coming from behind is actually at much
closer distance and moves faster than appears in the mirror). Give
a right-turn signal and , as soon as it is safe for you to do, take up
a position just left of the middle of the road or in the space marked
for right-turning traffic. If possible leave room for other vehicles
to pass on the left. Wait until there is safe gap between you and
any oncoming vehicle. Watch out for cyclist, motorcyclists and
pedestrians; then make the turn, but do not cut the corner. Take
great care when turning into a main road; you will need to watch
for traffic in both directions and wait for a safe gap.
129. When turning right at a junction where a oncoming vehicle
is also turning right, it is normally safe to keep the other vehicle to
your right and turn behind it i.e. offside-to-offside. Before you
complete the turn, check for the traffic on the road you want to
cross.
130. If the layout of the junction or the traffic situation makes
offside-to-nearside passing impracticable, pass near to near side
but take care. The other vehicle could obstruct your view of the
road so watch carefully for oncoming traffic.
131. When turning right from a dual carriageway, wait in the
opening in the central reservation until you are sure it is safe to
cross the other carriageway.
132. Do not turn right on red light under any circumstances.
133. Do not make a U-tun on a multi-lane (whether divided or
not) road except where indicated by an appropriate warning sign.
134. Always give way to the approaching traffic before turning
right, except at steady Right Turn. Give indicator in signalised
intersections.
135. While turning right on steady “Right Turn Arrow” you have
the right of way. However on “Flashing Right Turn Arrow” or

210
 when no arrow is exhibited but green signal is displayed, you can
turn right only after giving way to on-coming traffic approaching
from opposite direction.
136. Well before turning right, use your mirror, give right turn
signal and approximately 200 meters before the intersection, bring
right wheel of your vehicle close to the centre line of the road but
never cross it and then turn through the centre of the intersection,
leaving adequate room for the left turning vehicles on other road.
Before turning, yield to oncoming traffic.
Turning Left
137. Well before you turn left, use your mirrors and give a left-
turn signal, Do not overtake a cyclist, motorcyclist or horse rider
immediately before turning left and watch out for traffic coming
up on your left before you make the turn. When turning, keep as
close to the left as it is safe to do so.
138. If you want to turn left across a bus lane, or cycle lane, give
way to any vehicle using it from either direction.
139. Well before you turn left, use your mirror and give a left turn
signal and approximately 200 meters before the intersection, bring
left wheel of your vehicle as close to the left lane. Do not swing
out to the right before or after the turn.
140. On an intersection controlled by a signal, it is prohibited to
turn left on red, except where specifically permitted by a sign or it
is a slip road.
141. Use your indicator or signal for turning or lane change
manoeuvre only. Do not use this device for giving help to
overtaking vehicle or for any other purpose.
Turnings on Roundabouts

211
 142. On approaching a roundabout, decide as early as possible
which exit you need to take and get into the correct lane, reduce your
speed. On reaching the roundabout, give way to traffic on your right
unless road markings indicate otherwise. Watch out for traffic
already on the roundabout, especially cyclists and motorcyclists. At
some junctions there may be more than one roundabout. At each one,
use the normal rules for roundabouts.
144. Unless signs or road marking indicate otherwise;
 When turning left on roundabout
- Signal left and approach in the left-hand lane;
- Keep to the left on the roundabout and continue signalling
left.;
- Continue to signal right until you have passed the exit
before the one you want, then signal left.
 When going straight ahead
- do signal on approaching :
- approach in the left – hand or centre lane on a three – lane
road (on a three – lane road (on a tow – lane road you
may approach in the right hand lane id the left- hand lane
is blocked );
- take the same course on the roundabout;
- signal left after you have passed the exit before the one
you want.
 When turning right on roundabout or full circle:
- Signal right and approach in the right-hand lane;
- Keep to the right on the roundabout ;
- continue signalling to signal right until you have passed
the exit before the one you want, then signal left.
When there are more than three lanes at the entrance to a roundabout,
use the most appropriate lane on approach and through the roundabout.

Fig.9

212
 Fig.9 -A
145. Watch out for traffic crossing in front of you on the
roundabout, especially vehicles intending leave by the next exit.
Show them consideration.
146. Watch out for motorcyclist, cyclists and horse riders. Give
them plenty of room. Cyclists and horse riders will often keep to the
left on the roundabouts they may also indicate right to show they are
continuing around the roundabout.
147. Long vehicles may have to take a different course, both
approaching and on the roundabout watch for their signals and
give them plenty room.
148. The same rules apply to mini-roundabouts. If possible, pass
around the central marking, watch out for vehicles making a U-
turn and for long vehicles which may have to cross the centre of
the mini-roundabout.
149. When two vehicles are turning into same street
simultaneously, the vehicle turning left has the right of way over
the right turning vehicle, whether there are multi lanes or not.
Crossing
150. Before crossing a major highway or where there is a stop
sign you must come to a complete stop, look to the right, then to
the left and again to the right to see if any traffic is approaching.
Don‟t enter as long as there is traffic on the main road.

REVERSING PROCEDURES

151. Before reversing make sure there are no pedestrians

particularly children or obstructions in the road behind you. Be
aware of the „blind spot‟ behind you the part of the road you
cannot see from the driving seat. Reverse with care. If you cannot

213
 see clearly, get someone to guide you. You MUST NOT reverse
your vehicle for longer than necessary.
152. NEVER reverse from a side-road into a main road. Avoid
reversing into the road from a driveway; where possible reverse
in and drive out.

USE OF LIGHTS

153. You MUST:

 Make sure all lights are clean, that they work and that your
headlights are properly adjusted – badly adjusted headlights can
dazzle other road users and may cause accidents;
 Use sidelights between sunset and sunrise;
 Use headlights at night (between half an hour after sunset and half
an hour before sunrise) on all roads without street lighting and on
roads where the streets lights are more than 185 meters (600 ft)
apart or are not lit;
 Use headlights or front fog lights when visibility is seriously
reduced, generally when you cannot see for more than 100 meters
(328 ft).
154. you should also:
 Use headlights at night on lit motorway and roads with a speed
limit in excess of 80 km/h;
 Use dipped headlights at night in built-up areas unless the road is
well lit;
 Cut down glare. If you vehicle has dim-dip, use it instead of
dipped headlights in dull daytime weather and at night in built-up
areas with good street lighting.
 Dip your headlights when meeting vehicles or other road users
and before you dazzle the driver of a vehicle you are following;

214
 Slow down or stop if you are dazzled by oncoming headlights.
155. DO NOT drive at night without proper tail lights.
156. decorations or any other lights except those specified in the
law are prohibited.
Fog Lights
157. use fog lights when visibility is seriously reduced, generally
when you cannot see for more than 100 meters (328 ft). You
MUST NOT use fog lights at other times. Remember to
switch them off when visibility improves.
Hazard Warning Lights
158. Hazard warning lights may be used when your vehicle is
stopped to warn that it is temporarily obstructing traffic. You
may only use them whilst during if you are on a motorway
or unrestricted dual carriageway and you need to warn
drivers behind them for just long enough to ensure that you
warning has been observed. Never use them as an excuse for
dangerous or illegal parking. Don‟t use them as an indicator
of going straight through an intersection.
Flashing Headlights
159. Flashing your headlights means only one thing it lets another
road user know you are there. Do not flash your headlights
for any other reason and never assume that it is a signal to
proceed.
Use of The Horn and Musical Instruments
160. When your vehicle is moving, use your horn only if you
need to warn other road users of your presence. Never sound
your horn aggressively. You MUST NOT use your horn:
 Between 11.30 p.m and 7.00 a.m in a built up area.

215
  When your vehicle is stationary, unless a moving vehicles
poses a danger.
161. Use of musical instruments such as radio, tape-recorder,
phonogram etc. is prohibited in public transport vehicles and
goods vehicles.
Rear Screen
162. Keep the rear screen clear of obstruction like curtains and
other decorations, lights etc. at all times.

PARKING
163. Wherever possible, pull of the road on to an area provided for
parking. If you have to stop on the road, stop as close as you
can to the side, Leave plenty of room when parking next to or
behind a vehicle displaying a disabled person‟s badge. Before
you or your passengers open a door, make sure it will not hit
anyone passing on the road or pavement or force them to
swerve; watch out particularly for pedestrians, cyclist and
motorcyclist. It is safer for you and your passengers
(especially children) to get out on the side next to the kerb.
You MUST switch off the engine and headlights. Before
leaving the vehicle, ensure the handbrake is on firmly. Always
lock your vehicle.
164. You MUST NOT stop or park on:
 The carriageway of a motorway
 a pedestrian crossing, including the area marked by the zigzag
lines
 a Clearway
 an Clearway except to pick up or set down passengers
 a road marked with double white lines even if one of the lines
is broken, except to pick up or set down passengers
 a bus, or cycle lane.

216
165. You MUST NOT park where are parking restrictions shown by
yellow lines along the edge of the carriageway. Use an authorised
parking space if one is available.
166. Think before your park. DO NOT park your vehicle where it
would endanger or inconvenience to pedestrians or other road
users, for example:
 On a footpath, pavement or cycle track;
 near a school entrance
 at or near a bus stop or taxi rank;
 on the approach to a level crossing;
 within 10 meters (32 ft) of a junction, except in an
authorised parking space;
 near the brow of a hill or hump bridge;
 opposite a traffic island or (if this would cause an
obstruction) an other parked vehicle.
 Where the kerb has been lowered to help wheelchair users;
 In front of the entrance to a property.
Parking at Night
167. You MUST NOT park at night facing against the direction of the
traffic flow.

ROAD WORKS
168. Special care is needed at road works. Watch out for and act on all
signs on the approach to and at road works. Use your mirrors and
get into the correct lane for your vehicle in good time. Do not
switch lanes to overtake queuing traffic or drive through an area
marked of by traffic cones. Watch out for traffic entering or
leaving the work area, but do not be distracted by what is going on
there.
169. You MUST NOT exceed any temporary maximum speed limit.

217
 TRANSPORTATION OF HAZARDOUS MATERIAL
170. A goods vehicle which is being used to transport hazardous
materials must be clearly marked in accordance with the Annex-D
of this code to indicate the type of hazardous material being
carried. Drivers should act upon all rules regarding attendance,
parking, handling, vehicle conditions, hazardous materials
transportation law.

EMERGENCIES AND ACCIDENTS

171. If you have a breakdown, think first of other traffic. Get your
vehicle of the road if possible.
172. If your vehicle is causing an obstruction, warn other traffic by
using your hazard warning lights. If you carry a red warning
triangle, put it on the road at least 50 maters (164 ft) before the
obstruction and on the same side of the road (150 meters (492 ft)
on the hard shoulder of motorways). At night or in poor visibility,
do not stand behind your vehicle or let anyone else do so – you
could prevent other drivers seeing your rear lights.
173. If anything falls from your vehicle on to the road, stop and
retrieve it ad soon as it is safe to do so.
174. If you see warning or the flashing lights of emergency vehicles or
vehicles in the distance moving very slowly or stopped, there
could have been an accident. Slow down and be ready to stop, Do
not be distracted when passing the accident; you could cause an
other one.
175. If you are involved in, or stop to give assistance at, an accident:
 Warn other traffic, e,g. by switching on your hazard warning
lights. Ask drivers to switch off their engines and put out any
cigarettes;

218
 arrange for the emergency services to be called immediately with
full details of the accident location and any casualties; on a
motorway; use the emergency telephone;
 do not move injured people from their vehicles unless they are in
immediate danger from fire or explosion. Do not remove a
motorcyclist‟s helmet unless it is essential. Be prepared to give
first aid.
 Move uninjured people away from the vehicles to safety; on a
motorway this should be well away from the traffic, the hard
shoulder and the central reservation;
Stay at the scene until emergency services arrive.
176. Vehicles carrying dangerous goods in packages will be marked
with plain orange reflectorised plates. Road tankers and vehicles
carrying tank contains will have hazard warning plates. If an
accident involves a vehicle containing dangerous goods. Follow
the relevant advice of this code particulars:
 Switch off engines and DO NOT SMOKE:
 Keep uninjured people well away from the vehicle and where the
wind will not below dangerous substances towards them. Even if
you act save a life, take care that you too are not affected by
dangerous substances:
 Give the emergency services as much information as possible
about the labels and other markings.

SELECTING AND MAINTAINING A CYCLE

177. Choose the right size of cycle for comfort and safety.
178. Make sure that the:
 Lights and reflectors are kept clean and in good working order;
 Tyres are in good condition and inflated to the pressure
recommended by the cycle manufacture;
 Braked and gears are working correctly;
 Chain is properly adjusted and oiled;

219
 Saddle is adjusted to the correct height.
179. fit a bell and use it when necessary to warm other road users,
particularly blind and partially sighted pedestrians, that you are
there.
SAFETY EQUIPMENT
180. Wear a cycle helmet which confirms to recognised safety
standards. choose appropriate clothes for cycling. Avoid long
coats or other clothes which may get tangled in the chain or a
wheel. Light-coloured or fluorescent clothing helps other road
users see you in daylight and poor visibility.
181. At night you MUST use front and rear lights and a red rear
reflector. Reflective material such as belts, arm and ankle bands,
wheel reflectors and „spacer‟ flags will also help you to be seen
at night.

CYCLING
182. You MUST obey traffic signs and traffic light signals. You
MUST NOT cycle on the pavement.
183. Look all around before moving away from the kerb, turning or
manoeuvring to make it is safe to do so. Then give a clear arm
signal to show other road users what you intend to do.
184. Look well ahead for obstructions in the road, such as drains, pot-
holes and parked cars, so that you do not have to swerve suddenly
to avid them. Leave plenty of room when passing parked cars and
watch out for doors being opened into your path.
185. Take care near road humps, narrowing and other traffic calming
features. Do not ride along a drainage channel at the edge o the
road to avoid such features.

220
186. Do no leave your cycle where it would endanger or obstruct other
road users, for example lying on the pavement. Use cycle parking
facilities where provided.
Road Junctions
187. watch out for vehicles turning in front of you from or into a side
road. Do not overtake on the left of vehicles slowing down to turn
left. Pay particular attention to long vehicles which need a lot of
room to manoeuvre at corners and may have to move over to the
right before turning left. Wait until they have completed the
manoeuvre.
188. When turning right, check the traffic behind you, signal and when
it is safe move to the centre of the road, wait until there is a safe
gap in traffic before completing the turn. It may be safer to wait
on the let until there is a safe or to dismount and walk your cycle
across the road.
Signal Controlled Junctions
189. traffic signals also apply to cyclists. You MUST NOT cross the
stop line across the road when the lights are red. Some junctions
have advanced stop lines which enable cyclists to position
themselves ahead of other traffic. Where these are provided, use
them.
Roundabouts
190. rules 143-149 set out the correct procedures of roundabouts but
you may feel safer approaching in the left-hand lane and keeping
to the left in the roundabout. If you do keep to the left, take extra
care when cycling across exists and signal right to show you are
not leave or join the roundabout.
191. Watch out for long vehicles on the roundabout as they need more
space to manoeuvre. It may be safer to wait until they have
cleared the roundabout.

221
192. If you are unsure about using the roundabout, dismount and walk
your cycle round on the pavement or verge.
Bus Lanes
193. You may only use a bus lane if the signs include a cycle symbol.
Be vary careful when overtaking a bus or leaving a bus lane as
you will be entering a busier traffic flow.
Dual Carriageways
194. Take great care when crossing or turning on to a dual carriageway
where there are no traffic light signals. Wait for safe and cross
each carriageway in turn. Remember that traffic on most dual
carriageways travels quickly.
Cycle Lanes and Tracks
195. Use cycle lanes and tracks wherever possible. They can make
your journey safer and quicker.
196. Cycle lanes are marked by either an unbroken or broken white line
along the carriageway. Keep within the lane and watch out for
traffic emerging from side turnings.
197. Cycle tracks are located away from the road. Where a cycle track
is shared with a footpath, you MUST keep to the track intended
for cyclists. Watch out for pedestrians, especially elderly people
and people with disabilities, using the footpath or crossing the
cycle track.
198. Cycle tracks on opposite sides of the road are sometimes linked by
signals crossings. If the crossing is provided for cyclists only, you
may ride across but you MUST NOT cross until the green cycle
symbol is showing. Do not ride across a Pelican crossing.
Safe Riding
199. When cycling:
 Keep both hand on the handlebars except when signalling or
changing gear;

222
 Keep both feet on the pedals;
 Do not ride more than two abreast;
 Ride in single file on cycle tracks and lanes, and on narrow roads
when in traffic;
 Do not ride close behind another vehicle;
 Do not carry anything which will affect your balance or may get
tangled up with your wheels or chain.
200. You MUST NOT carry a passenger unless your cycle has been
built or adapted to carry one.
201. You MUST NOT ride under the influence of drink or drugs.

MOTORWAYS
Rules 202 to 232 of this code specially relate to the Motorway. This
does not mean that the other rules of this code do not apply while using
the motorway. They do sometimes partly and sometimes wholly.

GENERAL INSTRUCTIONS
202. Motorways MUST NOT be used by pedestrians, provisional
licence holders, riders of motorcycles, scooters and moped under
80cc, cyclist and horse riders. Slow-moving vehicles, agricultural
vehicles and few invalid carriages are also prohibited. On
motorway hand and animal drawn vehicles, construction
machinery and herding of animals is also not permitted.
203. Traffic on motorways travels more quickly than on other roads, so
you have to think quickly too. It is especially important to use
your mirrors earlier and look much further ahead than you would
on other roads.
204. Make sure your vehicle is fit to cruise at speed, has correct tyre
pressure and enough fuel, oil and water to get you at least to the
next service area. See that the windscreen, windows, mirrors,
lights and reflectors are clean and that the windscreen washer

223
 bottle is stopped up. You MUST make sure that any load you are
carrying or towing is secure.
HOW TO JOIN THE MOTORWAY
205. When you join the motorway you will normally approach it from
a road on the left (a slip-road). You MUST give way to traffic
already on the motorway. While on the slip-road, check the traffic
already on the motorway and adjust your speed so that you join
the left-hand lane where there is a safe gap and at the same speed
as traffic in that lane.
206. At some junctions the slip-road will continue as an extra lane on
the motorway. Where signs indicate that this will happen. Stay in
that lane until it becomes part of the motorway.
207. After joining the motorway, stay in the left hand lane long enough
to get used to the speed of traffic before overtaking.
WHEN ON THE MOTORWAY
208. When you can see well ahead and the road conditions are good,
drive at a steady cruising speed which you and your vehicle can
handle easily. You MUST NOT exceed the maximum speed limit
for your vehicle. Keep the safe distance from the vehicle in front
and increase the gap on wet muddy or icy roads or in fog.
209. Driving can make you feel sleepy. To help prevent this, make sure
there is a supply of fresh air into your vehicle, stop at a service
area or leave the motorway and find a safe place to stop.
210. You MUST NOT reverse, cross the central reservation or drive
against the traffic flow. Even if you have missed your exit, or have
taken the wrong rute, carry to the next exit.
Lane Discipline
211. Keep in the left hand lane unless overtaking. you may use the
lane to the right of a stream of slower vehicles to overtake them
but return to the lane to your left when you have passed them.

224
212. When approaching a junction make sure you are in the correct
lane, at some junctions a lane may lead directly off the motorway.
213. Some vehicles MUST NOT use the right-hand lane of a
motorway with three or more lanes. If you are driving:
 Any vehicle drawing a trailer:
 A goods vehicle:
 A bus, coach, wagon (public service transport)
Overtaking
214. overtaking only on the right unless traffic is moving in queues and
the queue on your right is moving more slowly than you are. Do not
move to a lane on your left to overtake. MUST NOT use the hard
shoulder for overtaking.
215. Do not overtake unless you are sure it is safe to do so. Before you
start to overtake, make sure that the lane you will be joining is
sufficiently clear ahead and behind. Use your mirrors.

Remember that traffic may be coming up behind you very quickly.

Signal before you move out. Be especially careful at night and in poor
visibility when it is harder to judge speed and distance.
216. always get back to the left-hand lane or if it is occupied. The
middle lane, as soon as you can after overtaking. Signal your
intention to change lanes. Do not cut in on the vehicle you have
overtaken.

Motorway Signals
217. motorway signals are used to warn you of a danger ahead. For
example an accident or risk of skidding, usually they are situated
on the central reservation where they apply to all lanes. On very
busy stretches, they may be overhead with a signal for each lane.

225
218. Where there is a danger, amber lights flash the signal may also
show a temporary maximum speed limit, lanes that are closed or a
message (for example, “Fog”). Reduce your speed and look out
flashing and you are sure it is safe to increase your speed.
219. If red lights on the overhead signals flash above your lane (there
may also be a red X), you MUST NOT go beyond the signal in
that lane. If red lights flash on a signal in the central reservation or
a slip-road, you MUST NOT go beyond the signal in any lane.
220. All signals are there to protect you. Always do what they say.
Remember – danger, such as drifting fog, may be there even if
you cannot immediately see the cause.
Road studs and Signs
221. to help drivers on motorways at night, there are amber-coloured
studs marking the right-hand edge of the road, red studs marking
the left-hand edge and green studs separating the lanes on the
motorway.
222. On some motorways, direction signs are placed over the road. If
you need to change lanes, do so in good time.
Road Works
223. take special care at road works. One or more lanes may be closed
to traffic and a lower speed limit may apply. Keep a safe distance
from the vehicle in front.
Obstructions
224. if anything that could be dangerous falls from your vehicle or any
other vehicle, stop at the next emergency telephone to tell the
police. Do not try to remove it itself.
Stopping and Parking
225. you MUST NOT stop except:
 in an emergency;

226
  when told to do so by the police, by an emergency sign or by
flashing red light signals.
226. You MUST NOT park on:
 The carriageway;
 The slip-road;
 The hard shoulder;
 The central reservation.
227. you MUST NOT pick up or set down anyone on a slip-road or on
any other part of the motorway.
228. You MUST NOT walk on the carriageway except in an
emergency.
Breakdowns
229. if your vehicle develops a problem, leave the motorway at the next
exit or pull into a service area. If you cannot do so, you should:
 try to stop near an emergency telephone (you will find them at
intervals along the hard shoulder ).
 Pull on to the lard shoulder and stop as far as the left as possible.
 Switch on your hazard warning lights;
 Keep your side lights on if it is dark or visibility is poor;
 Leave the vehicle by the left-hand door and ensure your
passengers do the same(leave any animals inside);
 Ensure passengers wait near the vehicle, but well away from the
carriageway and hard shoulder, and that children are kept under
control;
 Walk to an emergency telephone (following the arrows on the
back of the hard shoulder) – it is free t o use and connects directly
to the police – tell them if you are a woman travelling alone – and
then return to your vehicle;
 Wait near your vehicle but well away from the carriageway and
hard shoulder. If you feel at risk, return to your vehicle by a left
hand door and lock all doors. Leave your vehicle again as soon as
you feel the danger has passed.

227
If you cannot get your vehicle on to the hard shoulder:
 Switch on your hazard warning lights;
 Leave your vehicle only if you are sure you can safely clear of the
carriageway;
 If in doubt, remain in your vehicle wearing a seat belt until the
emergency services arrive;
 Do not attempt to place a warning triangle on the carriageway.
If you have a disability which prevents you from following the above
advice:
 Stay in your vehicle with all doors locked; switch on your hazard
warning lights;
 Display a “help” pennant or, if you have a car telephone, contact
the emergency services.
 Do not attempt even simple repairs and remember you MUST
NOT try to cross the motorway.
230. before rejoining the carriageway, build up speed on the hard
shoulder and watch for a safe gap in the traffic.
HOW T O LEAVE THE MOTORWAY
231. unless signs indicates that a lane leads directly off the motorway,
you will leave the motorway by a slip –road on your left. Watch
for the signs letting you know you are getting near your exit, if
you are not already in the left-hand lane, move into it well before
reaching your exit and stay in it. Signal left in good time and slow
down as necessary.
232. When leaving the motorway or using a link road between
motorways, your speed may be higher than you think. 80 km/h
may feel like 48 km/h. check your speedometer and adjust your
speed accordingly. Some slip-roads and link roads have sharp
bends so you will need to slow down.

ANIMALS

228
 GENERAL INSTRUCTIONS
233. do not let your dog out on its own. Keep it on a short lead when
taking it for a walk on or near a road or on a path shared with
cyclists.
234. Keep animals under control in vehicles. Make sure they cannot
distract you while you are driving. Do not let a dog out of a
vehicle on to the road unless it is on a road.
235. If you are herding animals, keep to the left of the road, if possible,
send another person along the road to warn other road users, for
example at bends and the brows of hills.
236. If you have to herd animals after dark, wear reflective clothing
and ensure that white lights are carried at the front and red lights
at the rear of the herd.
237. Before you take a horse on to a road, make sure you can control it.
If you think that your horse will be nervous of traffic, always ride
with other, less nervous, horses.
238. Make sure all tack fits well and is in good condition. Never ride a
horse without a saddle or bridle.
239. Wear safety helmet and fasten it securely-children under the age
of 14 MUST do this. You should also wear boots or shoes with
hard soles and heels.
240. If you have to ride at night, wear reflective clothing and make sure
your horse has reflective bands on its legs above the fetlock joints.
Carry lights which white to the front and red to the rear.
241. Never ride more than two abreast, ride in single file on narrow
roads.
242. When riding:
 Keep both hands on the reins unless you are signalling;

229
 Keep both feet in the stirrups;
 Do not carry another person;
 Do not carry anything which might affect your balance or get
tangled up with the reins;
 Wear light-coloured or fluorescent clothing in daylight and
reflective materials at nights.

FOR DRIVERS OF
ANIMAL DRAWN VEHICLES

243. Always keep well to the left of the road even if it appears clear of
traffic.
244. Before turning, stopping or changing lanes, give hand-signals
clearly and well in time.
245. Keep your animals under proper control.
246. Don‟t allow a child to take charge of your vehicle.
247. Don‟t turn or change course abruptly.
248. Don‟t sleep while driving or leave your vehicle un-attended.
249. Don‟t drive at night without a lantern and reflectors. Make sure
that the lantern is visible from the rear as well as from the front.
250. While hauling wide and projecting loads, observe permissible
limits, mark the end of your load with a red flag by day and with a
red light by night.
251. Whenever you hear or see a motor vehicle approaching, draw well
on to the left side of the road immediately.

230
252. Traffic signs, signals and rules of the code equally apply to you;
learn them and faithfully follow them.

253. Don‟t tie cattle together when leading them along a road a street.
254. Make sure that the road is clear before you let or take animals on
the road.
255. If you are herding animals along or across the road and there is
someone with you, send him along the road to warn drivers at
places such as bends and top of the hills where they may not be
able to see. When there are several animals, one person should
lead them and one should follow them.
256. Keep the animals being led or driven as far to the left side of the
road as possible. Keep yourself between the traffic and the
animals.
257. If you are riding a horse, keep to the left and take particular care if
the animal is traffic shy.
258. Carry a lantern when herding, riding or leading animals after dark.
259. Use cattle creeps where provided.

RAILWAY LEVEL CROSSINGS

GENERAL INSTRUCTIONS

260. A level crossing is where a road crosses railway lines. Approach

and cross it with care. Never drive on to a crossing until the road

231
 is clear on the other side – do not drive “nose to tail” over it.
Never stop on or just after a crossing. Never park close to a
crossing.
261. If the gates or barriers are closed, stop and wait behind the
stopped traffic, till the gates are opened. Never attempt to pas
through half opened gates or gain a favourable forward position
by overtaking, even on shoulders.
262. At crossing with half barriers, never zigzag around the barriers.
They are lowered because a train is approaching.
263. If your vehicle breaks down, or if you have an accident on a
crossing:
 Get everyone out of the vehicle and clear of the crossing;
 If there is a railway telephone, use it immediately to tell the
signal operator and follow the instructions you are given;
 If it is possible, and there is time before a train arrives, move
the vehicle clear of the crossing. If the alarm sounds, or the
amber light comes on, get clear of the crossing.
Railway Crossings with no Control
264. At level crossing with no gate, attendant or warning lights, stop
look both ways, listen and make sure there is no train coming
before you cross.
Unattended crossings without signals
265. Some crossings have gates but no attendant or traffic signals. At
such crossings, stop, look both ways, listen and make sure no train
is approaching. If there is a railway telephone, contact the signal
operator to make sure it is safe to cross. If crossing with a vehicle,
open the gates on both sides of the crossing, then check that no
train is coming and cross quickly. When you have cleared the
crossing, close both gates. Remember to inform the signal
operator again when you are clear of the crossing.

232
 GENERAL INSTRUCTIONS
RELATED TO LAW
ROAD TRAFFIC LAW
The instructions given herein are not comprehensive. These are general
guidelines for all type of road users dealing with situations which
commonly arise. For exact application of law read the relevant
legislations.
(A) DRIVERS
1. You MUST have:
 A valid driving licence.
 A current vehicle excise licence token
 Valid third party insurance covering your use of the vehicles;
 A current fitness certificate
 The Highway and Motorway code.
2. The law requires that the conditions of your vehicle, any trailer it
is drawing, its load, and the number of passengers and the way in
which they are carried are such that they don‟t involve danger of
injury to yourself or others. There are more detailed regulations
which require the different parts of your vehicle to be kept in good
condition and working under. These include brakes, steering,
lights, windscreens and windows, exhaust, seat belts and fittings,
speedometer and horn.
Tyres MUST have a continuous tread depth of at least 1.6 mm on
cars, light vans and light trailers (1 mm for other vehicles) across
the centre three quarters of the width. They MUST also be
properly inflated and free from cuts and other defects.
Headlights MUST be properly adjusted to prevent dazzling
oncoming traffic.

233
 Windscreens and windows must be free from obstruction to
vision, and MUST be kept clean.
3. you and your passengers MUST wear a seat belt in the front and
(if fitted) the rear of the vehicle, unless you are exempt.
Exemptions include the holders of medical exemption certificates,
people making local deliveries in a vehicle designed or adapted
for that purpose, and children in the rear of taxis with partitions.
It is the driver‟s legal responsibility to ensure that children under
14 years comply with the law.
4. Your eyesight MUST be up to the standard required for the
driving test at all times when you drive.
5. You MUST NOT:
 Drive under the influence of drinking or drugs;
6. You MUST comply with:
 Maximum speed limits or any special speed limit fixed for your
vehicle;
 Amber and red „STOP‟ signals, traffic signs giving orders,
double white lines and yellow road markings.
 The direction of police officer controlling traffic.
7. You MUST NOT:
 Drive dangerously;
 Drive without due care and attention or without reasonable
consideration for other road users;
 Drive on a footway, footpath or cycle track;
8. Pedestrians have precedence on the carriageway within the limits
of a Zebra crossing, and on a Pelican crossing when the signal to
cross it lit up. You MUST give way to pedestrians on a Zebra
crossing or when an amber light is flashing on a Pelican crossing.
9. The carriageway on the approach to a Zebra or Pelican crossing is
normally marked by zigzag lines. In this area you MUST NOT:

234
  Overtake the moving motor vehicle nearest the crossing;
 Overtake the leading vehicle which has stopped to give way to
a pedestrian.
10. You MUST stop when singled to do so by a school crossing patrol
exhibiting a „STOP‟ for children sign.
11. You MUST:
 Ensure your front and rear side lights and rear registration plate
lights are lit at night;
 Use headlight at night on all unit roads and those where the street
lights are more than 185 meters (600 ft) apart;
 Use headlights when visibility is seriously reduced.
12. You MUST NOT:
 Use headlights in a way which would dazzle or discomfort
other road users;
 Use front or rear fog lights unless visibility is seriously
reduced;
 Sound your horn at night (11.30 p.m to 7 a.m) in a built-up
area.
13. There are a number of places where the law specifically forbids
you to let your vehicle stand. In addition there is a more general
legal requirement that you MUST NOT park on the road in such a
way that your vehicle or trailer is likely to cause danger to other
road users or an unnecessary obstruction.
14. You MUST stop your vehicle when required to do so by a
uniformed police officer, who may require you to produce
documents including your driving licence, certificate of insurance
and vehicle fitness certificate, and the highway and motorway
code.
15. Most of the requirements of the law relating to drivers of motor
vehicles also apply to motorcyclists.

235
 In addition they MUST:
 Wear an safety helmet on all journeys;
 Ensure that exhaust system and silencer of a reasonable type
 Carry no more than one passenger on a motorcycle
Learners MUST comply with the requirements mentioned in the
Rules 32 to 35 of this code.
16. Pillion passengers MUST:
 Wear an approved type of safety helmet;
 Sit astride the cycle on a proper seat securely fitted
behind the driver‟s seat and with proper rests for the feet.
(B) MOTORWAY DRIVING
Motorway MUST NOT be used by pedestrians, holders of provisional
ordinary licences, pedal cycles, motorcycles under 80cc, certain invalid
carriages, slow-moving vehicles carrying oversized loads, agricultural
vehicles, animals, animal drawn vehicles and construction machinery.
You MUST:
 Drive on the carriageway only;
 Observe one-way driving on the carriageway;
 Observe maximum speed limits or any special speed limit for
your vehicle;
 Observe flashing red signals when displayed over your lane or
at the side of the carriageway;
 Keep any animals in the vehicle or (in an emergency) under
proper control on the verge.
You MUST NOT:
 Drive in reverse on the carriageway;
 Stop on the carriageway; on the central reservation or verge.
(C) TO PEDESTRIANS
You have precedence over other road users when you are on the
carriageway within the limits of a Zebra crossing, and on a Pelican

236
crossing when the signal to cross it lit. But you MUST NOT loiter on a
pedestrian crossing.
You MUST NOT:
 Walk on motorway or their slip-roads;
 Walk on the carriageway when directed not to do so by a police
officer or controlling traffic.
 Hold on to get on a moving motor vehicle or trailer.
(D) CYCLISTS
You MUST obey the same rules as apply to drivers at pedestrian
crossings and school crossing patrols in addition you MUST:
 Ensure that your brakes are efficient;
 At night, ensure your front and rear lights are lit and that your
cycle has an efficient red rear reflector;
 At night, if you are wheeling your cycle or are stationary
without lights, keep as close as possible to the nearside edge of
the road;
 Stop when required to do so by a uniformed police officer.
You MUST NOT:
 Ride dangerously;
 Ride without the due care and attention or without reasonable
consideration for the other road users;
 Ride under the influence of drink or drugs;
 Ride on a footway or footpath unless there is a right to do so;
Leave your cycle on road in such a way that it is likely to cause
danger to other road users, or where waiting is prohibited;
PENALTIES
 Carry a passenger on bicycle not constructed or adapted to
carry more than one person
 Hold on to a moving motor vehicle or trailer.

237
The penalty table indicates the offences and the associated penalties.
This list is not comprehensive and there are other offences / violations
for which one can be prosecuted.
2. As can be seen there are penalty points for offences listed in the
table. These are intended to deter people from unsafe driving. The
accumulation of penalty points acts as a warning to drivers that they
risk disqualification if further offences are committed. Any driver who
accumulates 20 or more points within a two-year period must be
disqualified by the S.P Highway and Motorway Police for a minimum
period of six months and for a longer period if the driver has previously
been disqualified.

VEHICLE SECURITY
When you leave your vehicle always:
 Remember the ignition key and engage the steering lock.
 Lock the car, even if you only leave it for a few minutes.
 Close the windows completely – even the smallest gap is asking for
trouble. But never leave children or pets in an unventilated car.
For extra security fit an anti-theft device such as an alarm or
immobiliser. If you are buying a new car it is good idea to check the
level of built-in security features and it is worthwhile having your
registration number etched on all your car windows. This is a cheap and
effective deterrent to professional thieves.
FIRST AID
Take the following actions;-
DANGER – Deal with threatened danger or you and the casualties may
be killed. FURTHER COLLISIONS and FIRE are the dangers in a road
accident.
1. if possible warn other traffic. Switch off the
engine. Impose a „No Smoking‟ ban.

238
2. Send a bystander to call an ambulance as soon as
possible; state the exact location of the accident and the numbers
of vehicles and causalities involved.
3. Causalities remaining in vehicles should not be
moved unless further danger is threatened.
If breathing has stopped:
4. Remove any obvious obstruction in the mouth.
Keep the head tilted backwards as far as possible breathing may
begin and the colour may improve. If not, pinch the casualty‟s
nostrils together and blow into the mouth until the chest arises;
withdraw, then repeat regularly once every four seconds until the
causality can breathe unaided.
5. Movement may further damage an injured back,
so only move if in danger. If breathing becomes difficult or stops,
treat as above.
6. Apply firm hand pressure over the wound,
preferably using some clear material, without pressing on any
foreign body in the wound. Secure a pad with a bandage or length
of cloth. Raise limb to lessen the bleeding, providing it is not
broken.
7. The casualty may be shocked but prompt
treatment will minimize this; reassure confidently; avoid
unnecessary movement; keep the casualty comfortable and
prevent them getting cold; ensure they are not left alone.
8. Give the casualty NOTHING to drink.
9. Carry a first aid kit. Learn first aid from a
qualified organization.

SAFE
DRIVING
TIPS 239
 CONTENTS
I SAFETY TIPS
II ROAD COURTESIES
III HAZARDS TO AVOID
IV ARE YOU FIT TO DRIVE
V HOW TO HANDLE YOUR VEHICLE
VI BAD WEATHER AND NIGHT DRIVING TIPS
VII MOTORWAY DRIVING
VIII COMMON FAULTS IN VEHICLES AND
IX SAFETY GADGETS
X ACCIDENTS AND EMERGENCIES.

Safety Tips
Over than 90 per cent of accidents are caused by a driver or rider
making a mistake. You need to be fully alert at all times – don‟t allow
yourself to be distracted. Try to be aware of all that is happening around
you.
Anyone can make a mistake. There is no such thing as a perfect driver.
While driving always give an allowance for the mistakes of other
drivers.

240
1. Be particularly careful if you
are a new driver Statistics show that the 17 to 25-year old age
group and those who have recently passed a test are more likely to
be involved in a fatal or serious accident.
2. Seeing something isn‟t the same
as being aware of it. You need to judge the degree of risk. A
pedestrian on the pavement may
 Stay where they are – no hazard at all
 Be looking the other way and about to run into the road – a
serious hazard
3. Being prepared for the
unexpected improve your safety. Be ready for difficult situations –
the road being blocked beyond a blind bend, for instance.
4. Adapt your driving to the type
of road. Take particular care on roads with junctions.

 Slow down
 Be prepared for vehicles pulling out
Inside streets and country lanes where there may be unmarked
junctions, proceed cautiously – nobody has priority at an
unmarked junction.
5. Don‟t treat speed limits as a
target. It won‟t always be safe to drive at that limit. Always take
the road and traffic conditions into account.
6. Position yourself sensibly on
the road. On right hand bends for instance, keeping a position to
the left will
 Improve your view of the road
 Help avoid the risk of colliding with traffic coming in the
opposite direction.

241
7. Choose an appropriate place to
manoeuvre. If you need to turn your car around, wait until you
find a safe place. DO NOT reverse or turn round in busy roads.
Find a quiet side road or drive round a block a side streets.
8. Driving safely needs all your
concentration. Avoid distractions such as listening to loud music
(which can mask other sounds) and don‟t try to other things at the
same time such as reading maps or using mobile phones.
9. Don‟t take drugs then drive.
Alcohol and drugs will
 Reduce co-ordination
 Slow down reactions
 Affect judgement of speed.
Alcohol takes time to leave the body; you might still be unfit to
drive the following morning. If you are going to drink, use public
transport.

Road Courtesies
Don‟t drive aggressively. Try to be understanding if another driver
causes a problem.
1. if someone is behaving badly on the road, don‟t get involved. If
you feel angry, pull over and calm down.
2. If a vehicle behind you is trying to overtake but can not, take no
action. Keep to a steady course and within the speed limit. Pull
over if it is safe to do so and let the vehicle pass. Never obstruct
drivers who wish to overtake. Speeding up or driving
unpredictably while someone is overtaking you can be very
dangerous.

242
3. Never overtake a vehicle indicating right. Even if you believe the
signal should have been cancelled. Don‟t take a risk. Wait for the
signal to be canceled.
4. If a vehicle pulls out into your path at a junction, slow down and
hold back to allow it to get clear. Don‟t over-react by driving up
too close behind it.
5. When following other vehicles leave enough space to stop if the
vehicle in front brakes or changes course. Rear-end collisions are
caused by not paying attention or by following too closely.
6. In slow-moving traffic, you may need to reduce the distance
between you and the car ahead to maintain traffic flow. However,
don‟t get so close that you cant stop safely. If the traffic is
blocked, always leave just enough space to manoeuvre should the
vehicle in front break down or an emergency services vehicle need
to get past.
7. In narrow residential streets with parked cars you shouldn‟t
normally exceed 30 km/h. look out for hazards such as
 Vehicle emerging from junctions
 Vehicles moving off
 Car door opening
 Pedestrians running out from between parked cars
8. If you are in a line of slow-moving traffic, don‟t stop directly on a
pedestrian crossing. Try to judge the flow of traffic and leave a
gap for pedestrians to cross.
Hazards to Avoid
1. In urban areas there is a high risk of pedestrians especially
children – stepping unexpectedly into the road. At 60 km/h your vehicle
will probably kill any pedestrian it hits. At 30 km/h there is a 1 in 20
chance of the pedestrian being killed. So kill your speed.

243
2. Elderly pedestrians may need more time to cross the road. Be
patient and allow them to cross in their own time. Don‟t hurry them by
waving at them or revving the engine.
3. If you need to reverse into a side a road, look all around the
vehicle and give way to any pedestrian who may be crossing the road.
4. Take care when you pass cyclists. Be prepared for cyclists to go in
any direction at road junctions or roundabouts. They are slow and
vulnerable and it is often safer for them to stay in the near-side lane
even then they are going most of the way round a roundabout.
5. The reaction of elderly drivers may not be quite as fast as they
once were. Make allowance of this.
6. You should also be prepared for drivers who may have little
driving experience and whose reactions may not be quite as fast as
those of a more practised driver. Most young drivers are relatively
inexperienced. Be particularly patient with learner drivers.
7. Large vehicle can block your view. Dropping back may increase
your ability to see and to plan ahead.
8. If you plan to overtake a large vehicle, keep well back to get the
best view of the road ahead. Passing a large vehicle is more risky and
can take a long time because of its length. Make sure that you have
room to complete your overtaking before you commit your self. Don‟t
take risks. If in doubt, don‟t overtake.
9. If the vehicle ahead begins to overtake a large or long vehicle,
don‟t assume that you can follow it. If a problem develops, the vehicle
ahead may abort overtaking and need to drop back.
10. A large vehicle may need extra road space to turn or to deal with a
hazard that you aren‟t able to see. If you are following a large vehicle –
an articulated lorry, for instance – be prepared to stop and wait if needs
room or time to turn.
11. If you are following a motorcycle, be prepared for it to swerve.
You may not be able to see what lies ahead. Motorcyclists may need to
avoid when road surfaces in wet whether such as drain covers and other
road features.

244
12. Look out for people getting on and off buses, coaches. Be
particularly attentive if you are passing a school bus or an ice cream
van, as children may run out from behind it.
13. In the country you are more likely to find animals in the road. If a
road is blocked by animals, stop until they left the road.

Are You Fit to Drive?

Don‟t drive if you feel unwell or are taking drugs, which may affect
your driving. If in doubt about the effect of medicinal drugs, don‟t
drive.

1. Check the instructions on medicines to make sure that they don‟t

affect your driving. If in doubt, ask your doctor.
2. If you feel tired or sleepy while driving, pull over into a safe place
(not the hard shoulder of a motorway) and take a short rest. Some
exercise, tea or coffee while you stop will help to keep you alert and
improve your concentration.
3. Make sure that you dress appropriately for driving. You should be
comfortable, and what you wear shouldn‟t interfere with your control of
the vehicle. Suitable shoes are particularly important to ensure that you
can use the pedals safely.

How to Handle Your Vehicle

Make sure that you can use the controls and equipment of your vehicle
correctly.

1. Adjust your seat and mirrors to ensure comfort, full control and
maximum vision. Properly adjusted head restrains will reduce the
risk of neck injuries in the event of an accident.
2. Remain in full control of the vehicle al all times. Learning your
arm on the door, resting your hand on the gear-stick or handbrake,
or holding the steering
3. Wheel with only one hand makes it harder to regain full control if
an unexpected hazard arises.

245
 Make sure that you never run out of petrol. It can be very
dangerous to lose power when driving in traffic. Only carry petrol in
a can or tank designed for that purpose.
4. Except in an emergency, the safest way to bake is to brake lightly,
then harder as you being to stop, then ease off just before
stopping. Easing the pressure as the car comes to rest avoids a
jerky stop.
5. In an emergency, brake immediately. If your vehicle isn‟t fitted
with anti-lock brakes (ABS), try to avoid locking your wheels by
using „cadence braking‟.
6. If the vehicle begins to skid when braking on a wet or slippery
road, release the brake pedal to allow the wheels to turn and then
brake again more gently. This may be repeated many times and is
known as „cadence braking‟.
7. Anti-lock braking systems apply cadence braking automatically
without the need to release the brake pedal so you shouldn‟t apply
this technique if your vehicle has ABS. If your vehicle is fitted
with ABS should continue to push hard on the pedal. ABS will
prevent the wheels from locking and so enable you to steer around
an obstacle.
8. Heavy acceleration, fast driving and late or harsh braking all
increase fuel consumption. Use fuel economically.
9. Water on brakes may cause them to lose their effectiveness. If you
have driven through water – for instance a flood, burst main a ford
– test your brakes at the first safe opportunity by pushing gently
on the brake pedal, to make sure that they work. If they don‟t
work, continue to apply the brakes gently while driving slowly.
This will help to dry them out.
10. Don‟t coast whatever the driving conditions. Coasting occurs
when you allow your vehicle to travel in neutral or with the clutch
depressed. This reduces the driver‟s control of the vehicle as it
eliminates the effect of engine braking. This means you have to
use the footbrake more, and over-use can reduce its effectiveness.
Coasting can also reduce steering control on bends and corners,

246
 increase vehicle speed on hills, and make it more difficult to select
the appropriate gear when you need it.
11. When turning or reversing you should check all round for other
road users or pedestrians. Use your mirror but look mainly
through the rear and side windows.
12. Think about the signals you give to other road users. Make sure
that your use of indicators won‟t mislead others. If, for instance,
you want to stop after a side road, avoid signalling too early or it
may give the impression that you intend to turn into the road. Use
indicators even if there are no other vehicles, for the benefit of
pedestrians.
13. If you think that your indicators can‟t be seen clearly because
another driver‟s view is obstructed, use an arm signal as well to
emphasize the point.
14. If an emergency service vehicle following you flashes its
headlights, allow it to overtake when it is safe to do.
15. To help control your speed on a long downhill slope, slow down
and select a low gear before you reach the slope. Use the brakes
carefully.
16. If you park on a hill, apply the handbrake firmly. Turning the front
wheels so they face into the kerb will help to stop the car rolling
downhill. Leave the car in gear – a forward gear if pointing uphill
and reverse if pointing downhill. Use „park‟ if your car has an
automatic gearbox.

Bad Weather and Night Driving Tips

1. try to avoid driving in bad weather. If you must drive, take
particular care. Drive only at a speed which allows you to stop
within the distance you can see to be clear.
 Stopping distances will be up to four times greater than on dry
roads because your tyres have less grip on the road. Keep well
back from the vehicle in front. This will increase your ability to
see and plan ahead.
 The steering may be affected. If you are driving on wet roads
and the steering becomes light, it means that the water is

247
 preventing the tyres from gripping the road. Ease off the
acceleration and slow down gradually if this happens.
 Spray from large vehicles may make it difficult to see to use
dipped headlights.
2. In icy or snowy weather
Before starting your journey, clear snow and ice from the windows,
mirrors, lights and number plates of your vehicle. Make sure the
windows are de-misted thoroughly.
 Stopping distances can be ten times greater than on dry roads,
so keep well behind the vehicle in front.
 Be extra gentle on the controls when the roads are icy as any
sudden movement could cause you to skid. Drive at a slow
speed in as high a gear as possible with low revs to avoid
wheelspin.
 When approaching bends and hazards, brake well before you
reach the bend and try to brake only when travelling in a
straight line. Otherwise you might skid. Slow right down before
turning and steer smoothly, avoiding sudden movements.
 Check your grip on the road surface when there is snow or ice
by choosing a safe place to brake gently. If the steering feels
light, this may indicate black ice and your vehicle losing its
grip on the road.
3. Don‟t think you can fully control a skid – there is rarely enough
space.
4. Avoid anything which may cause a skid, but if you do lose
control, steer in the direction of the skid. For instance, if the rear
skids to the right, steer quickly and smoothly to the right to
recover.
5. In windy weather
 Cars are less likely to be affected by strong winds than high-
sided vehicles, but remember that it is still possible for strong
gusts to blow a car off-course.

248
  Open stretches of road can often be exposed to strong cross-
wind. Look out for gaps in hedges or bridges which may alter
the effects of the wind on your vehicle.
If it is very windy, you may be affected by windbreaks or eddies
created by passing large vehicles.
6. In fog or poor visibility
 Slow down, because you can‟t see events ahead.
 At junctions with limited visibility, stop in the correct position
and then move forward carefully, checking both ways as fully
as possible. When you are sure it is safe to emerge, do so
decisively. Once you have reached a position where you would
be in the path of approaching traffic, don‟t stop.
 Keep well back from the vehicle ahead in case it stops
suddenly. This is particularly important when travelling fast on
motorways and dual carriageways, when vehicles can
unexpectedly enter fog banks.
7. In very hot weather
Be careful if the road surface becomes soft. Your steering and
braking might be affected.
Driving at night is more dangerous than driving in daylight, so be
particularly alert. You can see less detail and might not see the
bends in the road and other hazards.
8. Use your lights thoughtfully. When overtaking, remain on dipped
headlights until you are level with the other vehicle and then
change to main beam. This enables both cars to see ahead. If a
vehicle approaches from the other direction, or you are behind
another vehicle, dip your lights. Dazzling other drivers is
dangerous.
9. If you have left a brightly lit building, give your eyes time to
adjust before driving. If your night vision is poor, don‟t drive.

Motorway Driving
1. Motorways are generally safer than other roads. When accidents
do happen they can be very severe, due to the speed of the traffic.

249
After you have passed your practical test it is advisable to take some
lessons on the motorway before you drive unsupervised.
2. Before you start your journey, make sure that you and your
vehicle can cope with the demands of high-speed driving, check
your vehicle‟s
 Oil
 Water
 tyres
3. Always keep to the left lane unless overtaking. This applies
whatever speed you are travelling at. Extreme right lane is only
for overtaking and not for constant driving.
4. Look in your mirrors carefully before overtaking or changing
lanes. If you want to change into another lane, wait until it is clear
before indicating.
5. Large vehicles aren‟t allowed to use the extreme right lane of a
motorway, which has three or more lanes.
6. Contraflow system on motorways mean that you are travelling in a
narrower lane than normal and with no permanent barrier between
you and traffic coming towards you. you are twice as likely to
have an accident on a two-way contraflow compared to normal
driving. Drive slowly and keep a good distance from the vehicle
ahead, observing any speed limits.

Common Faults in Vehicles and Safety Gadgets

1. Make sure that you understand the meaning of all warning
displays on the instrument panel. Don‟t ignore warning signs of
faults developing. Your safety and that of others may be put at
risk.

250
2. Warning lights for brakes – fluid level warning, brake and pad
wear, anti-lock brakes (ABS) and the parking brake (handbrake)
should light up and then go out again when the vehilce moves off.
If they don‟t a dangerous fault may have developed and you
shouldn‟t drive the vehicle before having checks made.
3. If the warning lights for oil or water temperature come on while
you are driving, stop and have the problem investigated
immediately. There may be a serious fault which could lead to
engine seizure.
4. If the charge warning light comes on while you are drivign, it may
mean that the battery isn‟t possible to avoid loss of power for
lights and other electrical systems.
5. Make sure that you know where the switch for the hazard warning
lights is located. Both the switch and the warning light are red and
marked with a triangle.
6. Check tyre pressures at frequent intervals. Do this before your
journey, when they are cold. Warm or hot tyres may give a
misleading reading. Your braking and steering will be adversely
affected by under-inflated or over-inflated tyres. Excessive or
uneven tyre wear may be caused by faults in the braking or
suspension systems, or wheels, which are out of alignment. Have
these faults corrected as soon as possible.
7. If your vehicle pulls to one side when braking, it is most likely to
be caused by poorly adjusted brakes. However, incorrectly
inflated tyres or a serious mechanical failure may also be the
problem. Consult a garage or mechanic immediately.
8. If a vehicle continues to bounce after pushing down on the front or
rear, its shock absorbers are worn. Worn shock absorbers can
seriously affect the operation of a vehicle and must be replaced.

251
9. Ensure hat unusual smell is investigated immediately. Burning
rubber, electrical or petrol smells need urgent checks. Don‟t risk a
fire.
10. Check the fluid levels in your vehicle frequently. Low brake fluid
may result in brake failure and an accident. Make sure you
recognise the low fluid warning lights if your vehicle has them.
11. In petrol stations, never smoke on the forecourt. This is hazardous
and is a major fire risk.
12. If your car has additional lights which aren‟t required by law, they
must b correct fitted an adjusted and in working order.
13. It is advisable to use child locks if you carry children in the back
seats. Child locks prevent the rear door being opened from the
inside.

Accidents and Emergencies

1. If you have a flat tyre, stop as soon as it is safe to do so. Only
change the tyre if you can do so without putting yourself or others
at risk – otherwise call a breakdown service.
2. If a tyre bursts while you are driving, try to keep control of your
vehicle. Grip the steering wheel firmly and allow the vehicle to
roll to a stop at the side of the road.
3. Most engines are water cooled. If your engine overheats, wait
until it has cooled naturally. Only then remove the coolant filler
cap and add water or coolant.
4. If your vehicle catches fire, get the occupants out of the vehicle
quickly and to a safe place. Don‟t attempt to extinguish a fire in
the engine compartment, as opening the bonnet will make the fire
flare up. Call the fire brigade.

252
5. It is advisable to carry a first aid kit in case you are involved in or
arrive at the scene of an accident.
6. Keep injured people calm by talking to them. Keep them warm
and comfortable. Don‟t leave an injured person unattended.

253
 INTRODUCTION

Today‟s motorist is, subjected to the busiest roads ever. The congestion
and pressures places upon a driver often result in frustration and
deterioration in driving standards.

This together with the difficulty encountered in the detection and

prosecution of bad driving habits, has resulted in an increase in
dangerous and inconsiderate driver behavior.

The Police response to this has, up to now, been limited. In an attempt

to rectify this and improve drive behavior, JAI-A-S has developed the
Provida in car video system.

This system is intended to be used to educate. Advise and ultimately

prosecute the errant driver. Cases of dangerous and inconsiderate
driving are the main objectives of this system.

The ability to capture on video tape the actions of an offending driver

reduces arguments. With the facility to replay the incident and point out
the transgression. Confrontation is minimized and ultimately less
contested appear at court. The influence on the majority of the motoring
public by the display of video recording of their actions has been
powerful. The viewing by drivers of their own ability has a pronounced
and long lasting effect.

Many drivers do not perceive that they have done wrong and often to
criticize will provoke confrontation. To the police officer one the many
difficulties is the presentation of the case. Each police officer and
defendant will differing verbal accounts of the same incident leaving
the magistrate with the task of deciding which account is the more
credible. with the deployment of in car video the court does not have to
rely on recollection of the incident by either the police officer or

254
defendant but have the actual incident relayed. It will also provide
complete accountability of police officers thus promoting
professionalism and protection from spurious allegations of both police
behavior and driver manner.

255
II. GENERAL DESCRIPTION
A. System description

System Provide 2000 is a mobile precision system for video

surveillance of traffic offences etc. and also for measurements of
average speeds based on time – and distance measurements.

In addition to flexibility in operation there is also the following

data qualities: Time, distance, own speed. Zoom position, frame
counter, date, real and identification shown on the LCD monitor
(main module). On which the course can be followed visually and
at the same time recorded on the video cassette recorder.

By activating a key on the remote control or the LCD monitor.

The key function is shown on the LCD monitor for a brief
moment (only camera and CR commands). Information of the
VCR status is always shown on the LCD monitor. The data of the
key function and the camera/VCR settings are not recorded on the
video tape.

On screen menu. All the “not directly accessible settings” are

made through a menu.

When the police controls are activated different acoustics signals

will sound.

There is also the possibility for the connection of connections

modules through the LCD monitor (main module).

256
B. Equipment

1. Main unit

1. 5.6‟ LCD monitor display

4. Break Seal (When calibrating)
5. Loudspeaker

ON/OFF
2. Turns the system OFF
3. Turns the system ON

Monitor
6. Decrease brightness
7. Increase brightness

257
 8. Decrease color
9. Increase color

10. Decrease sound level

11. Increase sound level

Recorder
12. Play
13. Stop
14. Rewind tape
(if play button is pressed the reverse speed search is
activated)
15. Fast forward tape
(if play button is pressed the forward speed search is
activated )
16. Still/pause (works only if play button is pressed)
17. Slow

Setup
18. Show menu
19. Go up in the menu
20. Enter /Carry out
21. Go down in the menu
22. Go to the left in the menu (Turns beep sound
down)
23. Go to the right in the menu (Turns beep sound
up)

2. Remote Control Unit

258
Display

1. Speedometer and the measured PP flashes for approximately

five seconds after measurement is stopped.

Police Pilot

2. Synchronized (Orange) Start and stops of tie and distance.

(beep)
3. Distance (Red) Starts / stops distance measurements. (beep)
4. Time (White) Starts / stops the timer (beep)
5. Reset (Yellow) all ongoing and completed measurements.
(beep)

Recorder

7. Starts recording and resets tape counter to zero or if recording

press again to reset tape counter.
6. Stop
9. Starts playback of the last recording

259
 (Rewind to tape counter zero and starts play back)
8. Erases the last recording (Rewind t tape counter zero)

Camera

11. Zoom tele (zoom in)

10. Zoom wide (zoom out)
13. Automatic exposure
12. Manual Exposure (The values is adjusted in the menu)
15. Fixed shutter speed 1/50s
14. Manual shutter speed (The shutter ale is adjusted in the menu)
17. Auto focus
16. Fixed focus
19. Auto or Outdoor ( is to be in the menu)
18. Indoor
21. Camera 1 (main)
20 Camera 2 (option)

3. Camera Unit

1. Video camera
2. Lens hood

260
 3. Filtre adapter (ES – 37 mm)
(Polarizing or infrared filter mount)

4. Video Cassette Recorder Unit

VCR version A.

VCR version B

261
 III. DESCRIPTION OF DISPLAYS AND MENU
A. Provida Display

96/08/02 MAN 12:17:07

ID code 234572 F
14.000m Zoom

S:72.00 mph o:97 mph

D: 0.200 m t:10s JAI/ProVida

All Provide display information is recorded on the cassette recorder.

1. Date
Date is displayed in the upper left corner first row.
The date can be set in the calibration menu.
The format of the date varies between different countries.

2. ID code
ID code is displayed in the upper left corner second row.
The ID code is entered in the calibration menu.

3 Trip counter
Trip counter is displayed in the upper corner –third row.
This counter is reset at power up.

4. Police Pilot mode

Police Pilot mode is displayed in the top middle.

262
 The mode is selected in the Police Pilot menu.

5. Time
The real time is displayed in the upper right corner first row.
Time is set in the calibration menu.
The format o the time varies between different countries.

6. Video Frame counter

the frame counter is displayed in the upper right corner second
row. It starts when the system is turned on and is synchronized to the
video frame. The video frame counter is indicated by F.

7. Camera zoom
Camera zoom is displayed in the upper right corner third row.
Indicates the current zoom position. The zoom is controlled
from the remote control.

8. Calculated speed
Calculated speed is displayed in the lower left corner second
row.
This speed is calculated from measured distance and time.
The calculated speed is indicated by s.
The unit of the speed varies between different countries.

9. Speedometer (Own speed)

The speedometer display is located in the lower right corner
first row. This is the police car speed updated every video
frame.
The speedometer is indicated by O:
The unit of the speed varies between different countries.

10. Elapsed distance

Elapse time is displayed in the lower left corner second row.
The displayed value is the distance elapsed after activation of
the distance button. This value is updated every frame.

263
 The elapsed distance display is indicated by d:
The unit of the distance varies between different countries.

11. Elapsed Time

Elapsed time is displayed in the lower middle second row.
The displayed value is the time elapsed after activation of the
time button. This value is updated every frame.
The elapsed time display is indicated by t.

B. Police Pilot Display

96/08/02 MAN 12:17:07

ID code 234572 F
14.000m Zoom

S:72.00 mph
D:0.200 m t:10s
S:72.00 mph o:97 mph
D: 0.200 m t:10s JAI/ProVida

The large Police Pilot information is not recorded on the video cassette
recorder

1. Calculated speed

264
 When the Police Pilot has calculated the average speed
from the measurement distance and time, the result is
displayed on the main unit as seen above. The
calculated speed is indicated by s.
This display can be introduced / deleted in the Police
Pilot menu.
The unit of the speed varies between different
countries.

2. Elapsed distance
The Police Pilot elapsed distance display is indicated
by d:
The unit of the distance varies between different
countries.

3. Elapsed time
The Police Pilot elapsed time display is indicated by t:
The format of the time varies between different
countries.

C. Status display
96/08/02 MAN 12:17:07
ID code 234572 F
14.00m Zoom

TAPE PLAY

S:72.00 mph o:97 mph

D: 0.200 m t:10s JAI/ProVida
265
 VCR status information is not recorded on the video cassette tape.

1. VCR status display

The VCR status is displayed upper left in colored print.

2. Function message display

The function message is displayed upper right and flashes
about 4 times on initial selection.

266
 D. Menu system

1. Main menu

The main menu contains 8 entries where different settings can

be selected. The menu is activated the “menu” button as
shown below:

Main Menu
1. Police Pilot
2. Camera
3. Monitor
4. Accessory
5. Calibration
6. Users profiles
7. Memory
8. Version
Selected menu and press Enter

Move the cursor by using the arrow keys to the point on the
menu entry you require. E.g 1. Police Pilot.
When the cursor is at the pint required you press Enter.

2. Police Pilot
Police Pilot #1

1.PP-Mode “4 options” MAN, AUTO, AUTO2, SPLIT

2.PP-display “2 options” ON, OFF
3.Distance AUTO1 “Enter distance required for AUTO1” 00300 m
4.Distance AUTO 2 “Enter distance required for AUTO2” 00200 m
5.Trip counter “Ongoing distance on the monitor, 2 options” ON, OFF
267
Exit to Main Menu
Different settings are selected by stepping up down with arrow keys.
When the required information press Enter. E.g move the cursor to PP-
display and press enter. Either ON or OFF can be selected by moving
the cursor to the required option and press Enter. The cursor now
returns to PP-display.
This procedure can be repeated for other points on the menu.
Return to the
Main Menu by moving the cursor to “Exit to Main Menu” and press
enter . it is possible to choose other entries on the “Main Menu”

3. Camera
Camera set-up # 2
1.Zoom speed “2 options” Normal, fast
2Ires “8 options” F1.4 – F22
3.Shutter „7 options‟ 1/100 – 1/1000
4.Gain „7 options‟ -3db – 15db
5.Indoor/Outdoor „2 options‟ Manual, AUTO, BAL
6.Camera Microphone „2 options‟ ON OFF

Exit to Main Menu

Ins shutter and gain settings controls the image exposure in combination
(see page 8). The Manual settings can be used if the AUTO mode not
create a sufficient image. This can be case at night or if contrast is to
high at daytime.

268
Lower ins value increases camera light sensitivity. Higher gain value
increases image contrast but also introduces noise. Gain values higher
then 0db should only be used when ins value is F14.

The shutter speed is used (if illumination is sufficient). When

photographing high speed objects. Higher shutter speeds results in
clearer and more non blurred images but reduces camera light
sensitivity. Fixed shutter speed is 1/50 second.

269
4. Monitor

Monitor set-up # 3
1.Color “64 steps (Color adjustment)” 000-063
2.Brightness “64 steps (Brightness adjustment)” 000-063
3.Contrast “64 steps (Contrast adjustment)” 000-063
4.Master volume “7 steps (Max. sound adjustment)” 004-010
5.Monitor panel light “26 steps (Illumination of keys)” 000-025
6.Text intensity “26 steps” 000-025
7.Default Camera “2 steps” MAIN OPTION

8.Optional video out “2 steps” PP # MENU, PP(NO MENU)

Exit to Main Menu

5. Accessory

Accessory Page# 4
1.Remote panel light “26 steps (Illumination of keys)” 000-026

Exit to Main Menu

270
 6. Calibration
Attention to use this menu the seal has to be broken.
The button in the hole by the speaker. Has to be pressed.

Calibrate system # 5
1.Pulses/1000m “The Calibration factor of the vehicle after calibration ” 04000
2.Calibration “Press distance to start calibration”
Pulses: 00000

Press distance to stop calibration

Pulses: xxxxx

Press reset to save calibration

Pulses: xxxxx

If there are less than 1000 pulses/1000m when you have

Ended the calibration,
The following text will show.

More than 1000 pulses required !

3.System ID “have you are able to write the id-code of the user
(8 characters)” xxxxx
“Select the required letter or number by using the arrow keys until
the letter or number appears”

4.Cal. Distance “3 steps” 500m, 1000m, 2000m

5.Pulse Peak-level+VP “Select the value of the pulse-voltage. E.g of the pulse –value changes
between 0-13V, then you select value 13 ”
6.Next calibration “Date when the vehicle has to be calibrated again.
This is inserted by the installer, at the request of the customer.
The customer is able to select one of following choices:
No limits, selected, 7 days, 14 days, 30 days or 60 days.”
7.Date “Select the current date” 13/08/96
8.Time “Select the current time” 14:07:10

CALIBRATION BREAK SEAL

271
 When calibration is necessary a flashing red text will appear
CALIBRATION REQUIRED

7. User profiles

Users profile # 6
1.Profile 1 “2 options” Save/Load
2. Profile 1 “2 options” Save/Load
3. Profile 1 “2 options” Save/Load
4. Profile 1 “2 options” Save/Load
5 Profile 1 “2 options” Save/Load
6. Profile 1 “2 options” Save/Load
7. Profile 1 “2 options” Save/Load
8.Factory settings “1 option”

Exit to Main Menu

In Users profile” seven different Camera. Police Pilot and Monitor

settings are able to be stored and identified by name or number.
The letters or numbers are selected by using the arrow keys.

8. Memory
E.g of a measurement saved in the memory.

Measurement: 0002

D: 0.936m t: 28.64s. mph :117.65

Id dist : Mode: Man Date: 14/07/96
A dist: 0.000m Start time: 14:38:37
B dist: 0.000m Stop time: 14:49:06
Pulse/mile: 0.1033 Cal. Date: 14/07/96 272
 D: Measured distance
T: Measurement
Mph: Calculated speed
Mode: Police Pilot Mode
Id : Users ID
Date: Date of the measurement
A dist: Distance between the vehicles at the start of the
measurement
Start time; Time when the measurement started.
B time: Distance between the vehicles at the end of the
measurement
Stop time: Time when the measurement ended.
Pulse/mile: Calibration number.
Cal: Date: date of the latest calibration.
NEXT: Next memory location
PREVIOUS Previous memory location
DELETE Delete memory location
PRINT Print memory location (only if a printer is connected)

E.g of a calibration saved in the memory.

Calibration: 0001 (flashes red)

ID : cal, date: 14/07/96
Dist : 1.000m start time: 14:48:37
Pulse/mile : 01033 Stop time: 14:49:06
Interval : 7 days Next, cal: 21/07/96
Pulse level : 13 V

NEXT PREVIOUS <DELETE> PRINT

273
ID : User ID
Cal. Date : Date when the last calibration took place
Dist : Distance of the calibration
Start time : Time when the calibration started
Pulse/time : Calibration number
Stop/time : Time when the calibration ended
Interval : Interval between the calibrations
Next Cal : Date of the next calibration
If there is no data in the memory a flashing red text will appear
MEMORY EMPTY
9. Version

Version Info # 8
1.Main Unit Version 01.05
2.RCU Version 01.00
3.VCR Version 01.00
4.Camera Version 01.01
5.Printer Version -- --

Exit to Main Menu

The Version menu displays the actual software version

number of the connected ProVida 2000 equipment

IV. OPERATING THE SYSTEM

A. Police Pilot

1. Start/Stop distance button (RED)

274
 The RED button on the remote control (or the external push
button if fitted) start the distance measurement the first time the button
is pressed. The main unit is sounds a beep when the button is pressed.
The second time the RED button is pressed distance measurement is
stopped.

2. Start/Stop time button (WHITE)

The WHITE button on the remote control (or the external
push button if fitted) starts the time measurement the first
time the button is pressed. The main unit sounds a beep
when the button is pressed. The second time the WHITE
button is pressed time measurement is stopped.

3. Synchronous start (ORANGE)

The ORANGE button on the remote control (or on the
external push button if fitted) starts or stops time and
distance measurement simultaneously.

4. Reset button (YELLOW)

The YELLOW button on the remote control (or the
external push button if fitted) reset the Police Pilot.
5. MAN mode
When the MAN mode is selected the time and distance
switch must be operated separately at start and stop of
measurement.
When the red button is pressed the first time the
distance measurement starts. And the first time the white
button is pressed the time measurement starts. The second
time the red button is pressed distance measurement stops
and the second time the white button is pressed distance
measurement stops. After both time and distance
measurement have stopped the calculated speed is
displayed.

6 AUTO 1 made

275
 When AUTO 1 mode is selected the distance is preset in
the menu, when the whiter or the orange button is pressed
the first time the time measurement starts. The second
time the White button is pressed the time measurement is
stopped and the calculated speed is displayed.

7. AUTO 2 mode
When the AUTO 2 mode is selected. Distance and time
activates simultaneously. When the distance (red) or time
(white) switch is pressed the measurement of time and
distance starts simultaneously. After the preset distance
has been reached the system automatically stops time and
distance measurement simultaneously and displays the
calculated speed.
The Police Pilot may be reset to start a new measurement.

8. SPLIT mode
Split mode operates similarly to the manual mode(See page 25)

B. Monitor (Main Unit)

On the front of the monitor are controls for adjusting

color, brightness and audio volume. The control of
brightness on the front of this LCD monitor adjust the
brightness of the illumination behind the LCD panel.
The video brightness is controlled from the monitor
menu
Audio volume is only active during VCR play back.
In the monitor menu the operator can control the image
contrast, brightness color, master volume setting. text
insertion level, default camera choice, and video
output on optional connector. The master volume is
used if an external loudspeaker is connected. Default

276
 camera setting can be altered if optional composite
camera is connected to main unit

The right hand push button section marked “setup”

controls the menu.

C. Camera unit
The camera unit is controlled from the main unit menu
and Remote control unit.
If optional composite camera is connected to option
connector. The camera can be selected from the remote
control button 20. See page 8.

D. Video cassette recorder

1. VCR Recording

This is controlled from the remote control unit.

See page 8.

2. VCR Play back

This is controlled from the main unit. See page

7.

V. OPERATIONAL METHODS OF CHECKING SPEED

A. Speed calculation, parked, with time measurement and preset

distance (AUTO 1)

The operator selects two reference points, both which can

clearly be seen from a suitable parked position. The patrol car is
driven between the reference points, and the distance switch
(RED) is activated at the firs reference point and stopped and
stopped at the second reference point. The operator will then take

277
 up his parking position. Before speed checks can be undertaken
the measured distance must be entered into the main unit in the
menu, and AUTO 1 is selected also from the menu.
Vehicles passing between the two reference points are timed by
operating either the time or distance switch.
On completion of the time check the average speed reading of the
target vehicle will be displayed. Remember, if a vehicle is seen
which is believed to be travelling faster then the vehicle currently
being checked. This second vehicle may be checked by pressing
the YELLOW reset button and then the ORANGE synchronous
button when this vehicle passes the first reference point.
This mode can be used from a helicopter.
The operator who is in a helicopter, is either aware of the distance
of various reference points, or is given the information from
mobile petrol.

B. Speed calculation, driving, with time measurement and preset

distance (AUTO 2)

The MODE AUTO 2 is selected from Police Pilot menu.

While driving the operator activates either the time (WHITE) or
the distance (RED)switch when the target car and patrol car are
driving with a contrast distance apart.
When the pre-set AUTO 2 distance is reached the Police Pilot
automatically stops time and distance measurement and displays
calculated average speed.
To re-start the measurement the reset (YELLOW) button and
either the distance (RED) or the time (WHITE) button must be
pressed.

C. Speed calculation, driving with time and distance

measurement (MODE MAN)

The MODE MAN is selected from Police Pilot menu.

278
 While driving the operator activates the time switch (WHITE)
when the target vehicle passes a first reference point and the
distance switch (RED) when the patrol car passes that same point.
He switches off the time switch (WHITE) when the target vehicle
reaches a second reference point and the distance switch (RED)
when the patrol car reaches that second point.
Average speed is calculated and displayed.

D. Speed, calculation, driving with time and distance

measurement (MODE SPLIT)

The MODE SPLIT is selected from Police Pilot menu.

While driving the operator activates the time switch (WHITE)
when the target
Vehicle passes a first reference point and the distance switch
(RED) when the patrol car passes that same point.
Time is switched off (WHITE) when the target vehicle reaches a
second reference point and the distance switch (RED) when the
patrol car reaches that second point. Average split speed is
calculated and displayed.
If now either the distance or the time switch is pressed the display
reverts to the speed. The operator can at anytime stop time and
distance for display of average split speed. The running distance
and time will not be stopped until reset (YELLOW) s pressed

E. Memories

The ProVida has a ninety-nine memory circuit. After each

check or calibration the system saves all data in the memory. By the
menu the memory can be edited. Measurements can be deleted or
printed. The memory location number can not be changed. This number
is always preserved even if the memory position has been deleted.

F.Other uses

279
 When the system is in stand by, the operator can monitor the
police vehicles own speed, and the distance driven from when the
system was turned on.

VI. CALIBRATION
A. System calibration

Enter the calibration menu

Break the seal by pressing the button in the hole on the front of the
main unit

Step to calibrate

0. Enter the next calibration date if necessary. (Country

dependent)
1. Line up the vehicle exactly at the start of the known
distance.
2. Active the distance switch (red button)
Drive the selected calibration distance
3. The number of impulses are now shown on the distance
counter
4. Stop the vehicle exactly at the finish of the known
distance.
5. Press the distance switch (red button)
6. Press the reset button (yellow button)
7. Press the menu button
8. The vehicle is now calibrated.

B. Next calibration date

Enter the next calibration date in the menu. Measuring with
the system will be prohibited after the date entered has
expired. Calibration required is displayed

280
C. Pulse peak level
The pulse peak level is only entered by a technician at the
system is installed in the vehicle.

D. Set time and date

Sets the current time and date for the real time clock (Inserted in
video)

E. Identification code
Enter the vehicle identification code or equal (Inserted in
video)

VII. MAINTENANCE

VCR cleaning
Picture playback may become blurred or interrupted while the
video signal received is clear. This does not mean that the
recorded video has been erased. Dirt accumulated on the video
heads after long periods of use causes this problem. In case head
cleaning is required highly technical care is necessary.

Lens cleaning
Wipe the lens with a clean, soft, dry cloth or use special lens
cleaning paper solution.

Keyboard cleaning
Use a clean soft cloth soaked in a lukewarm water and washing up
soap solution.

LCD screen cleaning

Use a clean soft cloth soaked in a lukewarm water and washing up
soap solution.

281
VIII. TROUBLE SHOOTING

No power Check power connection to battery

Check the fuse in the power line.

Picture is poor on playback The VCR tracking control is not set to best
position: Adjust Tracking control.

Noise in picture on playback: Video heads are dirty

Head cleaning is necessary

Rec. mode cannot be engaged: The recording safety tab on cassette is

missing.
Place vinyl tape over missing safety tab.

VCR does not respond: Check the VCR cable is connected.

Check for excessive accumulation of
moisture.

No video displayed on main unit: Check camera cable and camera.

Resetting the system:

As soon as the system is turned ON, the “Break seal” button is pressed
and held down until “System Start-up” message appear. Release the
button and system will reset.

!!!WARNING!!!

All set-up, calibration, saved measurement and profiles will be

deleted.

282
IX. ERROR MESSAGES

A. Power Failure
System will shut off if battery voltage is too high or too low.
When the system is turned back on, a warning message is
displayed.

B. Time Validation
The time validation system will display this error message of time
if a time error target then 200ppm is deleted. Error message will
appear on display.
Measuring times is 500 seconds.

C. Frame Validation error

The Frame validation system will display this error message if
video frame frequency error is larger then 200ppm. Error
message will appear on display Measuring time is 500 seconds.

D. Calibration void
When next calibration date is reached. Measuring is prohibited
until new calibration is completed. Error message will appear on
display.

E. Temperature
System will shut off if internal temperature is higher then 80 C, if
the internal temperature is lower then –5 C a warning message
will appear.

F. System error
This error message will be displayed if an unknown system error
has caused the system to shut off previously. (CPU watchdog
reset)
When the system is turned back on a warning message is
displayed.

283
 LASER
TECHNOLOGY

UltraLyte
____________
User‟s Manual

284
___________________________________About this Manual

This manual describes the

characteristics and operation
of the Laser Technology, Inc.
Ultralyte 100 laser speed gun
and ranging instrument.

Laser Technology, Inc.

7070 South Tucson Way
Englewood, CO 80112 USA

Phone: 1- 303-649-1000
Fax: 1-303-649-9710
Website: www.lasertech.com

285
286
_________________________________________Precautions

Avoid starting directly at the laser beam for prolonged periods.

is classified as eye-safe to Class 1 limits, which means that

virtually no hazard is associated with directly viewing the
! laser output under normal conditions. As with any laser
device, however, it is recommended that you avoid staring
into the transmit aperture for prolonged periods while firing
the laser.

Never attempt to view the sun through the scope.

Looking at the sun through the scope may

permanently damage your eyes.

Never point the instrument directly at the sun.

Exposing the lens system to direct sunlight, even for a brief

period, may permanently damage the laser transmitter

Do not expose the instrument to extreme temperature.

UltraLyte components are rated for a temperature range

287
 of –30 C (-22 F) to +60 C (+140 F). Do not expose the
instrument to temperature outside that range.

288
_______________________________Checking The Instruments

Checking the Instrument

When you receive your UltraLyte laser instrument, check to see

that you have received everything you ordered. If you perceive
any physical damage to the instrument, or if any ordered part is
missing. Contact the shipper.

Basic UltraLyte Package

 UltraLyte instrument
 Two C batteries
 User‟s manual
 Padded carrying case

Accessories

In addition, you may have ordered one or more of these optional

accessories.

289
 Yoke with adapter for tripod mounting
 Two UltraLyte download cables:
-LTI 4-pin to DB 9-pin cable
-LTI 4-pin to HP 200 / 48 10-pin cable
 Data collector and software

290
________________________________Anatomy of the UltraLyte

Anatomy of the UltraLyte

The laser Technology, Inc. UltraLyte 100 is a hand-held laser

speed detection and ranging device. It measure and displays the
speed of a moving vehicle and the range at which the speed was
measured.

Features

 Sighting scope with in-scope aiming dot and

measurement display.
 Powered by two C batteries conveniently tucked away
in the handle
 Fully adjustable, fold-away shoulder stock
 Two 3-button operator panels for quick and easy
access to instrument functions
 Serial output port for easy connection to a data
collector or notebook computer
 Liquid Crystal Display (LCD) screen for instant access
to measurements and options.

291
292
_____________________________Anatomy of the UltraLyte

Sensors

The UltraLyte has two lenses on the front panel. The top lens
transmits infrared laser signals; the bottom lens received signals
back from the target and feeds signal information to the internal
circuitry.

The internal circuitry consists of a laser range sensor, and timing,

analysis, computation, and display circuits.

The UltraLyte determines distance through its laser range sensor

by measuring the time of flight of short pulses of infrared light.
The UltraLyte has a broad spectrum of sensitivity, and can work
with both reflective and nonreflective targets.

The maximum measurement distance varies with target and

environmental conditions. The absolute maximum is about 610
meters.

293
 Anatomy of the UltraLyte

The LCD Screen

The LCD screen displays measurements and option indicators.

When the instrument is powered on, for example, the speed
measurement screen displays:

1 2

kmh

_ _ _ _
SPEED

m
- - - - - -

5 4 3

1 Indicates where the speed measurement will appear.

2

294
 Indicates speed will be measured in kilometers per hour.

3 Indicated range will be measured in meters.

4 Indicates the instrument is in speed mode and is ready to

Take a speed and range measurement.
5
Indicates where the range measurement will appear.

295
 Serial Port Connector

The serial port connector allows you to connect the

instrument to a data collector or notebook computer in order to
download speed and range data.

Anatomy of the UltraLyte

Sighting Scope

Mounting atop the UltraLyte is a single – power sighting scope.

The scope features:

 An adjustable polarizing light filter to optimize viewing

contrast:
 An in-scope, red aiming dot to help you aim accuracy to the
target:
 An in-scope measurement display:

296
297
 Anatomy of the UltraLyte

Button Panels

The UltraLyte has two 3-button panels, one on each side of the
instruments. The button give you access to instruments functions.
The buttons have the following functions:

Right Button Panel

Menu / Options
 Activities the instrument‟s
function menu.
 Selects menu options.

Survey / Options
 This button is reserved for
other UltraLyte models, and
has no function on the
UltraLyte 100.
Speed / Options
 Activated the instrument‟s
speed measurement mode.
Left button Panel
Select / Edit
 Press and release: selects
option values in the function
menu.
 Press and hold for 2.5
seconds:
Activates the speed limit edit
mode, in which values can be
entered manually.

298
  In speed limit edit mode,
select a digit to be edited.
Test / Edit Up
 Activates the instrument‟s
test mode.
 In speed limit edit mode „1‟
to the currently selected digit.
Backlight / Edit Down
 Press and release: Turns the
display backlight on or off.
 Press and hold for 2.5
seconds: Turns the
instruments off.
 In speed limit edit mode,
subtracts „1‟ from the
currently selected digit.

Inserting the Batteries

Inserting the batteries

Load two batteries by inserting them positive-end-first into the battery

compartment in the instrument handle.

Warning: The UltraLyte is designed to accept

normal C-cell batteries. NiCad batteries can be
used, but they tend to vary in size. Laser
Technology will not be responsible for damage
that results from trying to force NiCad cells in or
out of the battery compartment.

299
 To close the battery compartment, replace the cap and twist it until
stops. DO NOT OVERTIGHTEN

Using the Stock

Using the Stock

Unfolding the Stock for Left – handed Operation

To open the stock for left-handed operation:

1. Loosen the stock by turning the tension knob counter-
clockwise.
2. Rotate the stock 180 degrees.
3. Retighten the tension knob.

300
 Using the Stock

Unfolding the Stock for Right – Handed Operation

To unfold the stock for right-handed operation:

301
1. Hold the instrument firmly and press down on the retaining
plate with sufficient force to disengage the plate from the
stock‟s retainer peg.
2. Pull the stock to the right until the retainer peg re-engages.
When the peg engages, you hear a loud click.

Using the Stock

302
Adjusting the Length and Angle

To adjust the length of the stock, loosen the tension knob and slide
the stock and forth.

To adjust the stock angle, loosen the tension knob slightly and
move the stock up or down. Usually it is best if the stock is at a
slight download angle.

Refolding the Stock

To refold the stock, extend it to its full length and reverse the
procedure you used to open it, Note that though the stock can be
folded on either side, the instrument fits in its case only when the
stock is fully extended and folded on the left side of the
instrument.

303
Attaching the Yoke

The UltraLyte includes, as an option, a “yoke” that allows you to

mount the instrument on a tripod or monopod. In order to attach
the yoke, you must first assemble a “yoke adapter” to the
instrument.

To attach the yoke adapter, screw the mounting bracket and

adapter into the mounting holes on the side of the instrument base.
Fit the yoke onto the mounting bracket and tighten the knob.

The yoke can be mounted on either side of the instrument. When

the yoke is mounted on the left side of the instrument, the entire
assembly fits into the UltraLyte padded carrying case.

304
________________________________________Powering on and off

Powering on and off

Power the instrument on by simply pressing the trigger. Power off

by pressing the Backlight/ Edit Dn Button and keeping it pressed
for about 2.5 seconds, as shown below.

305
 The instrument includes four simple functions you can perform at
power-on time. They are:

 Instrument self test

 Testing the display
 Checking the model number and units
 Restoring factory default configuration

Powering on and off_______________________________________

Instrument Self Test

When the instrument is turned on, its micro controller interrogates

the system electronics. If all tests prove positive, the instrument
displays dashes: if there are any failures, an error message is
displayed and the instruments will not operate.

If the self-test indicates an error, check your power source. If the

power source. If the power course is not the problem, contact LTI
for assistance.

Testing the Display.

When you power-on the instrument, you can test the screen display
by holding down the trigger instead of releasing it. That shows all
the display segments so you can check that they are all operating.

306
 For more information, see “Testing Display Integrity,” later in this
manual.

Checking the Model Number

You can also check the instrument‟s model number and software
revision you power-on. Start as you would if you were checking
the display: press the trigger and keep it pressed. With the display
segments all showing, press and hold the Speed/Options Button as
you continue to hold down the trigger.

That causes the screen to switch to a display that looks something

like this (for example):

100 Kmh

2.01 m

The number at the top is the model number of the instrument. The
number at the bottom is the revision level of the instrument‟s internal
software. The kmh and m indicate the factory set sped and range units.
_____________________________________Powering on and off

Restoring the Default Configuration

When the instrument was shipped, options such as the brightness

of the in-scope display and the power conservation settings were
already set for you. Such settings constitute the factory default
configuration. If you find yourself unsure of the instrument‟s

307
configuration, you can restore the factory default and start fresh
with known option settings.

To do that, power off. Then power back on and keep the trigger
pressed. while still holding down the trigger, press and hold
BACKLIGHT / EDIT DN until the message CLEAR appears on
the display. That indicates that the factory default configuration
has been restored.

308
 Screen Indicators_________________________________

Screen Indicators

The back panel display screen programmed to display a variety of

indicators in addition to the measurement displays.

The screen displays 12 different indicators at various times to

show such things as the units the instrument is using for
measurement and the mode the instrument is operating in.

When you first power on the instrument, every indicator on the

screen displays for a brief time. (You can extend that time by
holding the trigger pressed). With every indicator showing, the
screen looks like this:

MENU
LASER
888.8 kmh

BATT SPEED TEST

JAM
SL
MUTE

8888.8.8 m
V

309
 The table on the next page lists and explains each indicators.

______________________________________Screen Indicators

The UltraLyte screen indicators are:

Feature
Indicator Explanation
Indicated
Display
The display backlight is on.
Backlight
You are in the instrument‟s option
MENU Options Menu
menu
LASER Laser The instrument‟s laser is firing.
Blinking: the instrument‟s batteries
are low.
BATT Battery
Solid: you are in the battery test
display.
Kmh Speed Unit Kmh = Kilometers per hour
JAM Jam Detection Indicates a jamming signal.
Sets an alarm tone to indicate when
SL Speed Limit a target is exceeding the speed
limit.
The instrument is taking speed
SPEED Speed Mode
measurements.
The instrument is performing any of
TEST Test Mode
several various self-test.
Mute The instrument indicator sounds
MUTE
(Silent)Mode have been turned off.

310
 Units in which distance
M Distance Units measurements are being recorded
m= meters
V Power Units Battery voltage indicator

Menu Options________________________________

The following table lists the options available through

the MENU / OPTIONS BUTTON:

Screen
Option Explanation
Indicators

Display Varies the in-scope display

Br
Intensity brightness

Sets an alarm tone to indicates

Speed Limit SL when a target is exceeding the
speed limit.

311
 Toggles instrument indicator
Mute Mode MUTE
sounds on and off.

Power Time- Toggles instrument and display

ALL in
outs time-out on and off.

______________________________Listening to the Instrument

Listening to the Instrument

The UltraLyte emits a variety of ticks and tones when it takes

readings. The sounds vary depending on what the instrument is
doing, and with experience you can tell what is happening during
a measurement simply by listening.

The tones it emits are summarized in the following table:

312
 Sound Meaning
The instrument succeeded in
Double high-pitched tone taking the intended
measurement.
The instrument was unable to
take the intended measurement
due to an error. An error code
Single low pitched tone displays on the back panel
screen to indicate the nature of
the error. See Error indicator,
later in this manual, for details
The instrument is attending to
Low pitched growl
lock onto a target.
Jam tone, the instrument‟s laser
High pitched, oscillating ring return sensor is being
overwhelmed by light.
The instrument succeeded in
taking a speed reading, and the
target vehicle is exceeding the
Double high-pitched warble speed limit.
(Only when a speed limit has
been entered in the instrument
and the feature is turned on.)

Basic Speed Measurement_______________________________

313
Basic Speed Measurement

When you power on the instrument, the LCD screen on the rear
panel shows a display like this one:

----SPEED
kmh

m
------
To demonstrate the measurement process, use the sighting scope
to aim to a convenient target
(depending upon your version of UltraLyte, the target should be a
minimum distance of 20 or 30 meters).
Press the trigger twice; the first press turns on the scope aiming
dot and projects it onto the scope face, the second takes the
measurement. Or, if you press and hold the trigger down, the red
dot will turn on and the instrument will begin a measurement
about three-quarters of a second later.

When the instrument succeeded in taking a measurement, you

experience three actions.

1. You hear a high-pitched beep from the instrument.

2. You see the speed measurement projected onto the
scope just below the aiming dot. (For this example, the
speed is 0 or -0).
3. The screen on the rear panel shows a display like this:
Kmh

0 m
314
 SPEED

86.2
The figure at the top of the screen is the target‟s speed. The figure
at the bottom of the screen is the target‟s distance from the mid-
point of the instrument.

Measuring a Moving Vehicle

To measure the velocity of a using the UltraLyte, use the

following procedure:

1. Aim the instrument at the licence plate area of the

target vehicle and squeeze the trigger. A low-pitched
growl begins, indicating the instrument is trying to
acquire a lock on the target.
2. Keep the trigger pressed and the instrument sighted on
the target until you hear a beep. A double high-pitched
beep means that a speed was captured; a low-pitched
beep, that a measurement error occurred.

The speed calculated for the target displays in the LCD and in the
scope. If the target was going away from and in the scope. If the
target was going away from you when it was measured, the speed
display as a negative number; if the target was approaching, the
speed displays as a positive number.

As long as the trigger is kept pressed, your UltraLyte instrument

may retry the speed measurement, depending upon its
configuration, up to 10 times or more. Consequently, it is very
important that the aiming point on the target remain constant for
the entire measurement time. If you move the instrument off the
aiming point, it cannot capture a speed reading and displays an
error message instead.

315
Basic Speed Measurement_______________________________

Speed Limit Setting

Your UltraLyte instrument has a speed limit feature that sounds an

alarm when the target‟s speed exceeds a preset limit. See Setting
the Speed Limit, later in this manual, for details.

The JAM Indicator

If your instrument is configured for it, the JAM indicator on the

back panel screen may blink during a measurement, accompanied
by the jam tone. It indicates that the instrument is being flooded
by light and has difficulty detecting its own signal.

It means one of two things: either you are targeting a strong light
source such as headlights, or a targeted vehicle is employing a
laser jamming device.

Regardless of the level of interference, you will never get an

erroneous speed reading. At a low level of interference, you will
get a good speed reading, even though the jam tone sounds and
the indicator blinks. At a high level of interference, you will get an
E07 error condition.

316
Line of Sight

You must at all times have a clear line of sight to the target
vehicle. If an object intersects the beam while a velocity
measurement is being taken, an error message displays.

__________________________Basic Speed Measurement

The Cosine Effect

If a target vehicle is moving directly toward or away from you, the

velocity measured by the UltraLyte is identical to the vehicle‟s
true speed. For safety, however, the instrument is usually set up on
the side of the road, resulting in an angle between the instrument‟s
position and the target vehicle‟s direction of travel. When the
angle is significant, the measured speed is less than the target‟s
true speed. The phenomenon is know as the “cosine effect.”
(“Cosine” is a trigonometric function related to the phenomenon.)

The difference between the measured speed and the true speed
depends upon the angle between the instrument‟s ideal position-

317
 the position where targets would be moving in direct line with the
instrument-and its actual position. The larger the angle, the lower
the measured speed. The effect always works to the motorist‟s
advantage.

Loosely speaking, the cosine effect is not significant a long as the

angle remains small. The following table shows the effect:

Basic Speed
Measurement________________________________

Measured Speed by Angle: The Cosine Effect

Angle True Speed

(degree) 50 kmh 70 kmh 90 kmh 110 kmh 130 kmh

Measured Speed (kmh)

318
 0 50.00 70.00 90.00 110.00 130.00
1 49.99 69.99 89.99 109.98 129.98
3 49.93 69.90 89.88 109.85 129.82
5 49.81 69.73 89.66 109.58 129.50
10 49.24 68.94 88.63 108.33 128.02
15 49.30 67.62 86.93 106.25 125.57
20 46.98 65.78 84.57 103.37 122.16
45 35.36 49.50 63.64 77.78 91.92
90 00.00 00.00 00.00 00.00 00.00

The cosine effect decreases as the range to the target vehicle

increases. At the maximum range of the instrument, the vehicle is
so far away that the angle between it and the instrument is very
small indeed, and the instrument‟s perception of the target‟s speed
is identical to its true speed. As the vehicle approaches, however,
the angle increase until it becomes large enough to affect the
measurement.

To maximize the cosine effect, keep the angle small by setting up

the instrument as close to the road as possible without creating
safety risks, and target down the road at range sufficient to keep
the angular difference small.

The following chart shows acceptable parameters for minimizing

the cosine effect. The chart indicates the percentage of true speed
measured, given the distance from the roadway and the distance
from the target vehicle. To find a target‟s measured speed,
multiply the true speed by the number in the chart.

________________________________Basic Speed
Measurement

Percentage of True Speed Measured

319
Distance
Off the Range to Target Vehicle
Roadway
(meters) 30 m 100 m 150 m 300 m 600 m
Fraction of true speed that will be measured
3 .9950 .9995 .9998 .9999 1.0000
10 .9682 .9950 .9987 .9997 .9999
15 .8660 .9886 .9950 .9987 .9997
30 .0000 .9539 .9798 .9950 .9987
60 .0000 .7999 .9165 .9798 .9950

The diagonal created by the boldface numbers indicates the

boundary between acceptable and unacceptable parameters.
Numbers above the diagonal are acceptable margins of error;
numbers below are unacceptable.

A good rule of thumb is not to exceed 1 meter off the road for
every 10 meters shooting down range to the targets. If you want to
target vehicles 150 meters down the road, for example, set up no
more than 15 meters off the road.

Remember that the cosine effect is always in

the motorist’s favor.

320
 Error conditions__________________________________

Error Conditions

Error conditions can occur in a measurement or in system

hardware. To make sure you never get an erroneous speed
reading, the UltraLyte monitors both the system and the
measurement. When the instrument detects an error condition. It
displays an error code instead of a speed.

Error codes are in the form Exx, where “xx” is an error code
number. Error codes display in the numeric display area. In speed
mode, for example, errors show at the top of the screen

E03
SPEED
------

Measurement error conditions typically occur because the

instrument could not acquire a target or could not maintain a
“lock” on the target. Usually this is caused by a target that is out
of range, or by panning the instrument off the target during the
measurement attempt.

321
 Most other error conditions are similarly trivial;
Correcting them requires only that you retry the measurement you
were taking.

_____________________________________Error Conditions

Error Codes

The possible error indicators are listed and explained in the

following table:

Code Explanation
doF Display overflow. The measurement exceeds the display
capacity. Note that the in-scope numerical display is only
four digits, while the screen display is six. It is possible to
receive a doF message in the scope and still have a valid
measurement displaying on the screen.
EoF Editor overflow
Measurement error – target never acquired. The target was
EO1
out of range or was too close.
Measurement error – insufficient data. The instrument‟s
EO2
view was obstructed or the target moved out of range.
Measurement error – unstable targeting. Caused by poor
EO3
aiming or by panning off the target.
EO7 Jam detect – unable to acquire target.
E52 Temperature too hot. Stop operation.
E53 Temperature too cold. Stop operation.

322
 E54 Calibration or memory checksum failure. If the error
E55 persists, contact Laser Technology.
E56
E60
E61
E62
E63

RFI Considerations

The UltraLyte does not display a specific error message indicating

the presence of radio frequency interference (RFI). The instrument
electronics have been designed for optimum RFI immunity; if RFI
is present, it generates one of the above error codes to display. The
exact code is dependent upon the level and nature of the RFI.
In – Scope Display
Intensity_________________________________

In-scope Display Intensity

The in-scope display has 22 intensity settings from off (0) to

bright (21). You adjust the brightness with the br menu option.
Use the procedure in the table below.

323
 ach time you increase the brightness index by 1, the in-scope
display doubles in intensity. The brightness setting displays the scope as
well as on the screen, to make getting the right setting easy.

____________________________Setting the Speed Limit

Setting the Speed Limit

When measuring speeds, you can enter desired speed limit into the
instrument. With the speed limit feature turned on, the instrument
signals a double high-pitched warble when a targeted vehicle
exceeds that limit. The table below shows the procedure for
turning on the speed limit feature and setting the speed limit.

324
Muting the Instrument______________________________

Muting the Instrument

When the UltraLyte is taking reading, it normally makes a variety

of audible signals to help inform you of its operational conditions.
High- pitched beep signal a successful measurement. For example,
and low-pitched beeps indicate an error.

325
If you prefer the instrument to be silent, or if you are in relatively
close quarters with potential targets- pedestrians or bicyclists, for
example-who might be warned or startled by noise from the
instrument, you can mute the instrument so it makes no noise.

When mute is on, LAS appears in the scope let you know that the
laser is firing, Next, the in-scope aiming dot disappears to let you
know that the measurement has completed, an indication similar
to the high or low pitch tone in normal mode.

Muting is a menu option. Turn it on or off with the following

procedure.

326
 _________________________Power conservation Intervals

Power Conservation Intervals

To help conserve its batteries, the UltraLyte has three timed

power-off intervals. The following table summarizes the time-
outs:

Function Interval Effect of Time – out

In scope The numerical display
3 sec.
numerical display shuts off.
In scope aiming
20 sec. Aiming dot shuts off.
dot
10 min.
Instrument Power shuts down.
(approx.)

Lack of instrument activity for an interval causes the associated

function to shut down.

The in-scope display time-outs cannot be turned off. However, the

instrument‟s time-out feature can be turned off.

Use care. Disabling the power-off interval prevents the instrument

from automatically shutting off; it must be manually turned off or
the battery life will be greatly reduced.

327
Following the procedure on the next page to toggle the
instrument‟s tome-out feature:

328
329
 ______________________Testing Display Integrity

Testing Display Integrity

The back panel and in-scope displays are segmented. A test has
been incorporated into the instrument to verify that all segments
are operating.

To initiate the test, press the TEST / OPTIONS BUTTON. The

following screen displays:

Kmh
MENU
LASER
888.8
BATT TEST
SPEED MUTE
JAM
SL M

8888.8.8 V

Press the SELECT / EDIT BUTTON to toggle the displays on and

off. If you do not toggle off, the in-scope display times out after 5
seconds.

If any segment fails to display, contact Laser Technology to

arrange repair.

330
Note that you may also test the back panel display integrity at
power on, by holding the trigger pressed.

Scope Alignment Test__________________________________

Scope Alignment Test

This test ensures the accuracy of the UltraLyte‟s targeting

mechanics, and should be performed periodically.

1. put the instrument in test tone mode. Press the Test/Options

Button repeatedly until the display reads “tt” which stands
for test tone. When test tone mode is active, pressing the
trigger generates an audible tone. The tone‟s pitch is related
to the strength of the laser pulse returned to the instrument: a
high tone indicates a strong return, a low tone indicates a
week one.

2. Select a target. Choose a prominent target with definitive

horizontal and vertical edges. The target‟s reflective
qualities and distance from you should be such that you can
clearly hear a change in the pitch of the test tone when you
pan the instrument over the edges of the target. (A telephone
pole is an excellent choice.) Make sure there is nothing
behind the target the instrument might detect, so you know
without doubt that any change in pitch is due strictly to the
target.

331
 3. Scan the target. Press and hold the trigger while panning the
instrument across the target. The tone changes pitch when
the instrument acquires the target. The highest pitch --- the
“on target” tone---should occur when the scope‟s red aiming
dot is centered on the target.
Scan the target both horizontally and vertically, making
certain the pitch decreases evenly off each side of the target.
If there is any discrepancy between the “on-target” tone and
the position of the red aiming dot, perform the realignment
procedure (see Realigning the Scope on page 44).

Note: when checking vertical alignment to a close

target, be aware of the offset between the center of the scope
and the center of the transmit lens, which is 5cm.

________________________________Battery Voltage Detection

Battery Voltage Detection

The battery voltage detection feature that the instrument always

has sufficient battery voltage to guarantee correct operation.

The UltraLyte continuously monitors its power source. If the

battery voltage drops during operation, the BATT indicator blinks:

Kmh

BATT
43
SPEED

m
232.8
332
 If you fail to change the batteries and the voltage drops even
further, the button panels lock out.

BATT
TEST

V
2.98

The nominal full charge is 3.0V. if the voltage reading is less than
about 2.4V, you should replace the batteries at the first
opportunity. At 2.2V the low battery indicator begins to blink;
2.0V the button panels lock out.

Instrument Confidence Check____________________________

Instrument Confidence Check

The measurement accuracy of a lidar instrument can be verified

by several methods. Verifying it directly however-by measuring
the velocity of an object travelling at a known speed-is seldom
practical. And the nature of lidar is such that it cannot be tricked
by a vibrating object, such as a tuning fork, into displaying a
velocity. For those reasons, LTI has designed a passive test
procedure.

333
 The passive test is the fixed distance check. The point of the test is
to verify the accuracy of the two key elements of lidar speed
measurement: precise time measurements and the ability to make
mathematical calculations.

LTI recommends that this test be performed on the instrument

each time it is taken on duty. we also suggest a test areas be
permanently installed in a convenient location. The test area must
establish a permanent, known distance between a target and a
shooting mark. Keep in mind that the minimum measurement
distance for this test is 20 meters or 30 meters, depending upon
your version of UltraLyte.

A target can be any flat, permanent structure –a sign or wall, for

example-painted with a bull‟s eye or other aiming point. The
shooting mark is where an operator stands to conduct the test, and
can be an X painted on the pavement.

Testing and test-area specific are horizontal distances. (a

horizontal distance is measured along a straight and level path
from the shooting mark to the center of the aiming point.)

Second, the manner in which you stand and the manner in which
you hold the instrument both affect the test measurements. For
exact readings, carefully hold the instrument so it is directly over
the middle of the X.

Fixed Distance Check

334
 The fixed distance test requires only one target. For uniformity, it
should be 60 meters from the shooting mark. To ensure the
distance is accurate, use a metal tape to measure it.(if there is
insufficient space available, that specific distance is not crucial.
However, the distance between the target and the shooting mark
must be a multiple of one meter; a fraction of a meter not do.)

The test procedure is as follows:

1. Stand on the shooting mark and aim the UltraLyte at the

target. Squeeze and release the trigger.
2. Check the back panel screen. The speed reading should be
zero. (A reading of zero verifies the timing accuracy of the
instrument, and is identical in nature to an accurate velocity
reading of a vehicle moving at any speed.) The displayed
distance should read from 59.8 to 60.2 meters.

335
 Maintenance_______________________________________

Maintenance

Operating Temperature

The instrument is rated for a temperature range of 30 C(-22 F)

to 60 C (140 F). do not expose the instrument to temperature
outside that range.

Moisture and Dust Protection

The instrument is sealed to provide protection from normally

encountered field conditions. It is protected from dust and from
rain, and features temporary submersion resistance.

Shock Protection

The UltraLyte is a precision instrument and should be handled

with care. It will withstand a reasonable drop shock. If you drop
the instrument, however, check the scope alignment before using
the instrument for measurement.

Cleaning and Storage

Clean the instrument after each use, before returning it to its case.
Check for the following:
 Excess moisture. Towel off excess moisture, and dry the
instrument at room temperature.

336
  Exterior dirt. Wipe exterior surfaces clean. Use isopropanol to
remove dirt and fingerprints from the scope exterior.
 Dirty lenses. Use a lens brush to remove surface dust and loose
particles from the front panel lenses. To clean a lens, moisten it
with lens cleaning solution and wipe it with a clean cloth or
lens tissue.
 Batteries. If you won‟t be using the instrument again soon,
remove the batteries before storing it.

________________________________Maintenance

Caring for the Scope

Do not attempt to lubricate the scope. It is sealed from within

using O rings and special compounds. All seals are permanent and
require no maintenance.

Using a lens brush to remove surface dust and loose particles. To

clean a lens, moisten it with lens cleaning solution and wipe with
a clean sloth or lens tissue.

The adjustment screws are permanently lubricated; do not attempt

to lubricate them. Keep the cover screws and sealing washers in
place except when the scope is being aligned.

Checking the Display Screen

The instrument provides a method of verifying the display

integrity. You can do that as described in “Powering On and Off”
and in “Testing Display Integrity” earlier in this manual.

Resetting Factory Option Defaults

337
 The instrument remembers option settings even with the power
turned off. To return options to their factory defaults. Use the
procedure in Restoring the Default Configuration, earlier in this
manual.

Realigning the Scope___________________________________

Realigning the Scope

The scope becomes misaligned by a heavy blow to the instrument.

The procedure in the table below corrects the alignment. The point
of the procedure is to align the laser‟s point of impact with the
scope‟s red aiming dot, using sound to indicate when the scope is
on. Target.

To align the scope properly, you need:

 Two metric Allen wrenches to expose and turn the scope

adjustment screws, one 2.5mm and one 1.5mm.
 A target at which to aim the instrument.
 A highly stable base for the instrument. A tripod is
recommended.

Target Selection

Choose your alignment target carefully. The target should be at

least 200 meters away. It should be a prominent target with
definitive horizontal and vertical edges that will cause a clearly
perceivable change in the pitch of the test tone (a telephone pole is
an excellent choice). Make certain there are no background
objects that the instrument might detect.

338
339
 __________________________________Realigning the Scope

Adjustment Screws

The scope adjustment screws are in the top front panel of the
scope, protected by cover screws. To gain access, remove the
cover screws with a 2.5 mm Allen wrench.

Warning: Each cover screw assembly

includes a small plastic washer. It is
imperative that you note lose the washers.
Failing to replace them renders the scope
susceptible to water damage.

Once the adjustment screws are exposed, turn them with a 1.5 mm
Allen wrench to adjust the position of the scope aiming dot, as
shown in the following illustration:




340
Scope rear view Scope rear view

Realigning the
Scope_______________________________________

Realignment Procedure:

Action Result/Notice
1.Steady the Rest the instrument against a solid
instrument on a solid support that will help keep the
base. aiming dot steady on the target.
2. Steady the Rest the instrument against a solid
instrument on a solid support that will help keep the
base. aiming dot steady on the target.
3.Press the
Test/Options Button
repeatedly until the
test tone screen
displays.
The target should be at least 200
4. Select a target. meters away. See “Target Selection
” above.
Press and hold the trigger while
panning the instrument across the
5. Locate the target. target. When the tone achieves its
highest pitch, the laser light beam
is hitting the target.
Adjust the instrument screws to
6. Adjust the scope. make the red aiming dot converge
with the center of the target.

341
 Use the alignment test procedure to
7. Check the double check the alignment. If the
alignment. instrument doesn‟t pass, repeat the
realignment procedure.
When the instrument passes the
8.Secure the
alignment test, replace the cover
instrument.
screws.

Specifications

Note: these specifications are subject to change.

Weight: 1.34kg
Size: 21 x 7 x 28 cm
Acquisition Time: 0.4 sec.
Speed Accuracy:  2 kmh
20 meters or 30 meters.
Min. Range: Depending upon your version of
UltraLyte.
Max. Range: 610 meters
Speed Range: 320 kmh
Range Accuracy:  15 cm
Range Resolution: 0.1 meters
Beam Divergence: 3 milliradians nominal
Laser Wavelength: 904 nanometers nominal
Temperature -30 C to +60 C
Range: (-22 F to +140 F)

342
 Two alkaline or NiCad rechargeable
Power: C batteries providing up to 25 hours
of cordless operation.
Eye Safety: FDA Class (CFR 21)
Environment: Waterproof to IP 67 and NEMA 6
Construction: All aluminum, extruded housing

T S
S
TRAFFIC SAFETY
SYSTEMS

VASCAR 5 0 0 0

343
T S S

TRAFFIC SAFETY SYSTEMS

344
345
346
347
348
ACTION LOCATION
PRESS

TARGET SPEED MODE

 TARGET SPEED ON REMOTE

YES>

DATE, TIME, SPEED, SCREEN WILL

BE DISPLAYED

THE FOLLOWING CHECK

WHILE PATROL VEHICLE IS IN MOTION

SELECT TGT VEHICLE AND WHEN IT

 PASSES POINT A T
 WHEN PATROL VEHICLE PASSES POINT B D
 TRAVEL FOR MIN OF 125M
 WHEN TGT VEHICLE PASSES POINT B T
 WHEN PATROL VEHICLE PASSES POINT B D

ON THE SCREEN, TGT VEHICLE SPEED

WILL BE DISPLAYED = S125.4

IF PATROL VEHICLE OVER TAKES TGT

VEHICLE

349
 WHEN BOTH CARS ARE PARALLEL
S
TGT SPEED WILL BE DISPLAYED

IF PATROL VEHICLE OVER TAKES TGT

VEHICLE
 AND GOES AHEAD OF TGT POINT B D
VEHICLE AND REACH
 WHEN TGT VEHICLE REACHES POINT B T
TGT SPEED WILL BE DISPLAYED

FOR NEXT MEASUREMENT T

TO EXIT TARGET SPEED MODE <X.

ACTION LOCATION
PRESS

BEING FOLLOWED CHECK

TGT VEHICLE BEHIND PATROL VEHICLE
ROTATE CAMERA TO BACK SIDE.

 WHILE PATROL VEHICLE IN MOTION

SELECT TGT VEHICLE
 WHEN PATROL VEHICLE PASSES POINT A
D
 WHEN TGT VEHICLE PASSES POINT A
T
 TRAVEL FOR MIN OF 125 M

350
  WHEN PATROL VEHICLE PASSES POINT B
D
 WHEN TGT VEHICLE PASSES POINT B
T

ON THE SCREEN TGT VEHICLE SPEED WILL BE

DISPLAYED = S125.4

IF TGT VEHICLE OVER TAKES PATROL VEHICLE

 WHEN BOTH CARS ARE PARALLEL

S

TGT SPEED WILL BE DISPLAYED

IF TGT VEHICLE OVER TAKES PATROL VEHICLE

 GOES AHEAD AND REACHES POINT B
T
 WHEN PATROL VEHICLE REACHES POINT B
D
TGT SPEED WILL BE DISPLAYED

FOR NEXT MEASUREMENT T

TO EXIT TARGET SPEED MODE

<X

351
ACTION LOCATION
PRESS

ONCOMING TRAFFIC CHECK

 ENTER TARGET SPEED MODE

PATROL & TGT VEHICLE BOTH COMING

YES>
FROM OPPOSITE DIRECTIONS

 TGT VEHICLE COMING FROM POINT A T

FRONT REACHES
 WHEN TGT AND PETROL VEHICLE CROSSES TD

 WHEN PETROL VEHICLE REACHES POINT A D

TGT SPEED WILL BE DISPLAYED

PACE SPEED MODE

ENTER TARGET SPEED MODE

 FOLLOW A TGT VEHICLE

352
  AFTER 125 M DISTANCE ANY POINT
S
TGT SPEED WILL BE DISPLAYED. ANY POINT
S

SYNC MODE

ENTER TARGET SPEED MODE

PETROL VEHICLE MAY BE STATIC OR MOVING

 WHEN TARGET VEHICLE & PETROL VEHICLE
CROSSES S
 WHEN PETROL VEHICLE & TGT VEHICLE ARE
PARALLEL S

TGT SPEED WILL BE DISPLAYED

ACTION
LOCATION
THE CROSSING CHECK MODE

353
 ENTER TARGET SPEED MODE

PETROL VEHICLE AT STATIC ON RED LIGHT

YES>

SIGNAL, VISUALISE A TGT VEHICLE OVER

SPEEDING CROSSING PETROL VEHICLE

 WHEN TGT VEHICLE PASSES JUST A

HEAD OF PETROL VEHICLE AT POINT A
T

 WHEN SIGNAL LIGHT GOES GREEN

PETROL VEHICLE PASSES POINT A
D

 TRAVEL MIN OF 25 M

 TGT VEHICLE PASSES POINT B

T

 PETROL VEHICLE PASSES POINT B

D

TGT SPEED WILL BE DISPLAYED

354
ACTION LOCATION
PRESS
PREFED DISTANCE MODE

PREFED DISTANCE MODE

YES>
USE LAST PREFED DISTANCE <<<<<<<<IF>>>>>>>>
<NO
INPUT NEW PREFED DISTANCE
<INC
SAVE AND SET INPUT DISTANCE
SET>
DISPLAY CHANGES TO DATE, TIME, SPEED SCREEN.

355
USE LAST PREFED DISTANCE <<<<<<<<IF>>>>>>>>
YES>
DISPLAY CHANGES TO TIME, DATE, SPEED SCREEN.

STATIC PREFED MODE

ACTION
LOCATION PRESS

IN PREFED DISTANCE MODE INPUT DISTANCE

OF OVER WHICH OBSERVATION IS TO BE TAKEN.
LETS SAY 200 METERS.
MOVE TO D,T,S SCREEN

 SELECT & MOVE CAR TO POINT A

 ON MONITOR RESET DISTANCE COUNTER
S
 START MOVING WHEN IT REACHES 200M
 ON THE MONITOR STOP. THIS WILL BE POINT B

 WHEN TGT VEHICLE PASSES POINT A

T
 WHEN TGT VEHICLE PASSES POINT B
T

356
TGT SPEED WILL BE DISPLAYED

ACTION LOCATION
PRESS
MOVING DISTANCE MODE

PREFED DISTANCE MODE

YES>

USE LAST PREFED DISTANCE <<<<<<<<IF>>>>>>>>

<NO

INPUT NEW PREFED DISTANCE

<INC

SAVE AND SET INPUT DISTANCE

SET>
DISPLAY CHANGES TO DATE, TIME, SPEED SCREEN.

USE LAST PREFED DISTANCE <<<<<<<<IF>>>>>>>>

YES>

DISPLAY CHANGES TO TIME, DATE, SPEED SCREEN.

PREFED DISTANCE WILL BE DISPLAYED ON

SCREEN D=200

ACTION LOCATION
PRESS

 FOLLOW TGT VEHICLE ANY POINT T

357
  DISTANCE COUNTER SHOWING D=200 WILL START
DECREASING

AUTOMATICALLY TGT SPEED WILL BE DISPLAYED.

THIS FUNCTION IS USEFUL FOR NIGHT OPERATIONS.

T S S

TRAFFIC SAFETY LIMITED ASHTON HOUSE GRANVILLE

STREET AYLESBURY BUCKS HP2JR U.K
TELEPHONE: +44(0) 1296 397000 FAX: + 44(0) 1296 398020

TSS AUTOVISION COMPACT –Vs – JAI PROVIDA 2000

Both systems measure own vehicle and target vehicle speeds. Both
systems make a video recording of offence (speeding and driver

358
behavior) which can be played back at the time of the offence and
stored as evidence for use later. The difference with TSS is the design
approach. We consult with police users and the consensus is for high
quality equipment that takes up as little space as possible in the vehicle
and is simple to operate and install whilst giving all the features
expected of vehicle mounted systems today. The NEW Autovision
Compact does all and more of the earlier models but is smaller and
more straightforward to fit and operate.
New features include:-
1. Higher power zoom cameras for vehicles and suspend recognition
at greater distances.
2. Lower light and infra-red cameras for operation in poor and no
lighting conditions.
3. Ability to interface with Laser 500 for video-laser capability.(the
system also operates with the Speed master DS2 for 24 hour static
speed camera applications).
4. Incorporation of VASCAR speed detection unit into system
controller to minimize equipment (system may incorporate
PYTHON II mobile radar instead of VASCAR).
5. Multiple remote control for full control of camera, VCR and
VASCAR/PYTHON from one handset.
6. Motorized retractable color monitor which occupies only 1 Din
slot in vehicle facia to minimize cab space needed.
7. „plug and Go‟ connection of system makes installation faster and
simpler.
8. Simple controls without reducing functionality making operation
and training quickest and easier.

VASCAR PROVIDA
CAMERA CAMERA

- FP24 Optical Camera - Optical Camera

- FP24 Digital Camera - No Digital Camera

359
- 18X Optical Camera - 12X Optical Camera

- 72X Digital Camera - No digital Camera

- Infrared Low light Camera - No Infrared Camera

- Full pan/Tilt Camera bracket - Non rotate able

Relatable 360 vision
- One camera required for front and - 2 camera required for
front
- back vision and back Vision.

- Camera attached to wind screen - Camera bolted to car

metal
roof.

- Does not damage car - Damages Car

- Quick & simple to install - Difficult to install

- Reinstalling 1 minute job. - Reinstalling takes

more
time & greater damage
to car.
- Accident safe - Very risky accident
situation petrol
officer can be hurt.
- Built-in Microphone - Separate Microphone

- Separate Audio switch with LCD light - Audio system

switched
on through menu & sub
menu system.

360
- Camera can be removed from car & - Fixed camera
removal
Used at scene of an accident by hand Not possible from the
to record all details. car.

- Special infrared glass filter to - Not provided

clear view.

VASCAR PROVIDA

FUNCTIONS FUNCTIONS

1. Multi function software - Not available

2. One touch function accessibility - have to enter

menu
then sub menu then
Function.
3. Performs 12 different speed Measurement - performs 4
different
functions. Speed measurement
functions.
4. Single button press Plays back last recorded - Available
event.
5. On coming Traffic checks function available - Not
available
while petrol car in motion.
6. Highly user friendly - Not user
friendly

VASCAR PROVIDA

REMOTE CONTROL REMOTE

CONTROL

361
1. Rugged strong remote control - Sensitive light duty
remote
control.
2. Large LCD display - Small LCD display
3. Large rugged buttons - Small sensitive buttons
4. Strong cable protected against user - Thin cable usually
gets
damage. Damaged.
5. Rigid mounting magnetic plays gives - mount not provided
not
total stable operation of system when Not user friendly.

Mounted and easy removal for handheld

Use.
6. Remote control work as key board - Not possible.
When mounted on magnetic base.
7. VASCAR, laser & Radar remote - Separate remote
required
control in built. For Radar attachments.
8. Rugged unbreakable manufacture - Easily damage-
frequently
breaks.

VASCAR PROVIDA

MONITOR MONITOR

1. 6.4” inch high resolution TFT LCD color - 6 inch

high resolution
color monitor.
2. Motorized retractable mounting monitor - Fixed
monitor

362
3. Fits into one radio slot - fits in front of 2
radio
slots.
4. Slides into radio slot Not visible - Stays fix at one
place
when closed.

5. No danger of breaking - Danger of

breaking

6. Anti scratch screen - Not available

7. Swivels up/down and Left/Right for - Fixed viewing

Optimum viewing angle of passenger or driver

8. No cables visible connections - Many cable

visible
connections

VASCAR PROVIDA

VCR VCR

1. High quality VHS time lapse or Hi8 options - VHS preferred,

Hi8
an option.

2. High rugged, shock proof VCR - Provided

363
VASCAR PROVIDA

CPU CONTROLLER CPU

CONTROLLER

1. Separate controller. - Controller built into

Monitor
with limited connection
possibilities

2. Special coding for easy installation. - Not available

3. Simple on-screen instructions for use - Not available

with single push button complex menu and
submenu function
accessibility.

4. Very simple to use - Very complex to use

5. 1 day training required - Many days training

required.

VASCAR PROVIDA
INSTALLATION INSTALLATION
1. Quick and easy installation - Difficult &
specialized

364
 installation

2. Takes 1-1/2 –2 hours - Take more than 6 hours

3. Even a layman can install - Specialized Engineer

can
only install.

4. Coded cables & slot for easy - Not provided

installation

5. No damage to car - Installation damages

car

6. No wire is visible, neat and tidy look - Wires are visible,

poor look

7. Monitor installation does not - Monitor installation

damages
damage car. Car, you have to take
out car
watch etc. for cables.
8. Camera attached by a special tape. - To install
camera, you have
to damage car metal roof.

365
 QUICK USER GUIDE

The ECOM Speed witness Digital Video MK_II is a laser Speed /

Range Measuring System with an integrated Video capture system
Designed to record traffic violation video on tape along with speed
overlaid data for non-deniable proof of offence on Roads and freeways.

The speed witness Digital Video MK_II has three physically separate
modules, which are setup in the field to make-up an operational Speed
witness Digital Video MK_KK.

1- The Speed witness Digital Video MK_II Head-end Unit that

includes an integrated:
LASER GUN (PRO LASER III)
VIDEO CAMERA
LCD 6.8” Speed witness COPUTER CONTROLER
Hi 8 DIGITAL VIDEO CASSETTE RECORDER.
2- Collapsible Tripod – Stand
3- DC cable (20 ft cable with Canon 6 pin Connector and Cigarette.

OPERATION

1. Install the system on the Tripod Stand

2. DC Cable: Insert the canon 6-pin connector into the system
side bottom-mounted male connector and cigarette lighter
plug
NOTE: THIS IS SYSTEM IS 12V DC OPERATED.
3. Turn on the rocker switch on the left side of the system
4. Turn on the monitor by momentarily pressing the POWER /
MODE switch on the monitor. You will see an initial
welcome screen.
5. Check that the video camera, laser gun and hi8 digital video
cassette recorder are switched on as soon as you switch the
main power on.

366
6. The monitor selections AV1 and AV2 can be toggled
through the POWER / MODE switch when the monitor is
turned ON. AV1 represents Recorder Looped Video and
AV2 represent Direct Video.
(NOTE: AV1 IS RECORDER/PLAYBACK LOOPED
VIDEO SO IT SHOULD BE SELECTED NORMALLY.
AV2 IS SELECTION IS DIRECT VIDEO MODE AND
IS FOR TROUBLESHOOTING PURPOSE)
7. Once the system is switched on and is functional, you will
need to
enter the Name, Location, Speed Limit and Date / Time in
the system using the keypad located on the Left-Hand Side
of the system. Alpha- Numeric data can be entered in the
computer using the 16-button keypad in the following manner.

367
 KEY PAD FUNCTION DESCRIPTIONS

KEY
FUNCTION

Invokes the menu

0
Officer Name
1
Location
2
Speed Limit
3
Date / Time
4
N/A
5
N/A
6
Toggles between alphabets and digits
7
Version
8
N/A
9
Refresh / Exit
A
Enter
B
Up
C
Down
D

368
 Right
E
Left
F

Programming the Officer‟s Name

1. Press the „0‟ key on the keypad.

2. Press the „1‟ key on the keypad.
3. Use the „C‟ and „D‟ keys to choose between the alphabets / digits.
4. Use the „7‟ key to toggle between Alphabet Mode (A-Z) and
Digital Mode (0-9).
5. Use the „E‟ and „F‟ keys to move the cursor left and right.
6. Press the „B‟ key to commit and save the name entered.
7. Press the „A‟ key to exit without saving and entering Name

Programming the Location Name

1. Press the „0‟ key on the keypad

2. Press the „2‟ key on the keypad
3. Use the „C‟ and „D‟ keys to choose between the alphabets / digits.
4. Use the „7‟ key to toggle between Alphabet Mode (A-Z) and
Digital Mode (0-9)
5. Use the „E‟ and „F‟ keys to move the cursor left and right.
6. Press the „B‟ key to commit and save the Name entered
7. Press the „A‟ key to exit without saving and entering Name.

Programming the Speed Limit

369
 1. Press the „0‟ key on the keypad
2. Press the „3‟ key on the keypad
3. Use the „C‟ and „D‟ keys to choose between the digits.
4. Use the „E‟ and „F‟ keys to move the cursor left and right.
5. Press the „B‟ key to commit and save the Speed Limit
6. Press the „A‟ key to exit without saving and entering Speed Limit.

Settings the system‟s Date / Time

1. Press the „0‟ key on the keypad

2. Press the „4‟ key on the keypad
3. Use the „C‟ and „D‟ keys to choose between the
Days/Months/Hours/Minutes.
4. Use the „E‟ and „F‟ keys to move the cursor left and right.
5. Press the „B‟ key to commit and save the Date/Time entered.
6. Press „A‟ key to exit without saving and entering Date/Time

Inclement Weather Mode for Laser Gun

1. Press the „MENU/ESC‟ Button on the gun

2. Select „WTHR‟ menu using the „MODE‟ and „BRT/VOL‟

3. Press „TEST/ENTER‟
4. Select between „NORMAL‟ and “POOR‟ weather using the
„MODE‟ and „BRT/VOL‟

5. Press „TEST/ENTER‟
6. Press the „MENU/ESC‟ Button on the gun to quit the menu

Note: The selected menu option is displayed within parenthesis

e.g. (WTHR)

370
Pro LASER III

371
 Looking through the 1: 1 heads – up display‟ you aim for the smaller‟
faster car emerging from a group of vehicles. With pinpoint accuracy‟
you pull the trigger and obtain a near- instant reading with positive
target identification.
A New Generation of Laser vehicles inside a specific area.
Using the stopwatch mode
Defying the standards of couldn‟t be easier. Once you‟ve
conventional lidar‟ Kustom‟s activated the mode from the rear
compact‟ battery –oper-ated pro- panel display‟ you need only to
aser III offers a new level of enter two known or measured
performance and features not distances. Squeeze the trigger
available anywhere else. once to begin the stopwatch.
Squeeze again to stop. Instantly‟
Lidas Technology your calculated speed is
displayed.
Using lidar (Light Detection and
Ranging) technology‟ the Pro-Laser Enhanced Design
III emits a series of invisible laser One of the first things you‟ll
light pulses to measure both the notice about the prolaser III is its
range and velocity of targets. This sleek‟ ergonomic design.Compact
technology‟ combined with and weighing just over 3 pounds
advanced software and a superior (with the battery) the unit features
optics design‟ provides quicker a forward swept handle. This
target acquisition and a beam only advanced style reduces arm and
3ft. wide at a range of one thousand wrist fatigue, allowing officers to
feet. Speeders simply don‟t stand a comfortably target vehicles
Environmental Mode
chance! without the use of a shoulder
Traditionally one of the drawbacks stock or supporting rest. The fixed
Pinpoint Accuracy to using laser has been its limited handle accommodates either the
effectiveness during undesirable self-contained, long-life recharge-
The Pro-Laser III‟s Heads – Up weather conditions such as rain, able nickel metal hydride battery
Display (HUD). Is designed to snow, fog and dust. The waterproof pack or the corded adapter for use
provide 1:1 viewing for precise Pro-Laser III incorporates a special with a 12V power source.
vehicle targeting and less eye strain. environmental weather mode that
The jointly mounted HUD and minimizes the range-limiting effects Operating the various modes of
optics are secured to the extruded of allows accurate target readings to the Pro-Laser III is made easy
aluminum housing to prevent be obtained. with the integrated LCD / keypad
misalignment. You‟ll also experience improved located on the back panel.
When using the HUD you‟ll see the operation through windshields and Featuring a backlit display and
target area and surrounding traffic windows. easy to use tactile switches, you
for positive target identification‟ as will discover how easy the
well as an illuminated Aiming More Advanced Features system is to use.
reticle to help you pinpoint your
target. An audible tone identifies The Pro-Laser III‟s selectable
when the target speed has been direction mode prevents displays of
obtained. While holding the trigger‟ unselected traffic direction. This
you‟ll be able to visually verity the mode prevents the operator from
target speed as it continuously inadvertently obtaining a speed
updates in the heads-up-display. from an opposite direction vehicle.
Together‟ these features allow you The Pro-Laser III also has the
to develop a true tracking history‟ as capability of setting minimum and
preferred by most judicial systems. maximum target ranges-great for
areas such as school and
construction zones where you need
372
a beginning and end mark to target
The Ultimate in Speed Enforcement
Lidar System Function

373
 Pro-Laser III Lidar System Specifications

System – General
Type Stationary laser-based
range and speed
measurement system
Measurement Vehicle speed in miles or
kilometers per hour;
distance to object in feet or
meters
Eye Safety: CDRH Class One Eye safe
Operating -22oF to + 140oF (-30oC to
Temperature + 60oC); 0 to 95% R.H.,
Range: non-condensing
Storage -40oF to + 176oF (-40oC to
Temperature: + 80oC)
Power 10.8 to 16.5 VCD; negative
Requirement ground, 750 mA max.
(external):
Power Removable, rechargeable
Requirements 9.6 VDC nom., NiMH
(internal): battery pack

System - - General

Test: Activates a Display: Two line high

display segment contrast LCD
test, internal active matrix
accuracy test, display.
and displays Alpha Backlight
programmed Messages: permits night
units of measure time use.
(mph or km/h). LV Alert
Operator- indicates the

374
 controlled and battery is
automatic when approaching
first powered minimum
up. voltage.
Optics: Dual objective Alpha LV Warning
lenses for Messages indicates the
transmitted and battery has been
received laser exhausted and
pulses. the unit will no
longer function.
Error indicates
an internal
problem exists.
Heads-Up- Displays Stopwatch Displays
Display: illuminated Mode: indicate speed
square aiming on left side of
reticle, and 4- LCD and
haracter, 7- elapsed time on
segment, high- right side.
brightness, LED Measurement
target speed or distance can be
range. set in increments
of one foot from
300‟ to 4500‟.
Elapsed time is
registered in
tenth second
intervals.
Beam Width: 3‟x3‟ at
1,000‟(3m at
1,000m).
Speed + 1 mph (+2 km
Accuracy: / h)
Speed Range: 5 mph to 200
mph (8 to

375
 321km / h).
Speed Display Update current Physical Extruded
Update: target speed 3-4 Construction: aluminum
time per second housing protects
while trigger is internal
held, providing circuitry. High-
true tracking impact ABS
history of target handle houses
vehicle. power source.
Durable rubber
humpers protect
critical areas of
front and rear
panels.
Range: 10‟to over
4,000‟ (3m to
1330m);
reflective target
Range +6” (+0.2m)
Accuracy:
Range 0.1‟ (0.1m) Waterproof IP-67 and
Resolution: Ratings: NEMA 6
Aiming Tone: No tone when Physical Height: 10.25”
beam is off Dimensions: (26.04cm)
moving target; Width: 10.25”
intermittent tone (10.8cm)
when beam is Length: 7.4”
close to target; (18.8cm)
solid tone when
beam is locked
on moving
target
Acquisition 0.3 seconds, Weight 3.25 lb. (1.9 kg)
Time: typical (w/internal
battery)

376
Direction Unit can be set
Discrimination: to measure and
display speed of
approaching
only (+),
receding only (-
), or both
directions of
traffic.
1/O Date Port RS- 232 serial
port outputs
speed, direction,
range and error
messages.
Operating
parameters to
the unit can be
changed via
remote control
through the PC-
type device.
When
connected to a
giant digital
display, export
speed
information.

377
SPEEDWITNESS DIGITAL VIDEO MKII
TRAFFIC SPEED CAMERA SYSTEM

Speed witness Digital Video MKII is latest from the legendary series of
Traffic Speed Camera Systems. It is simple and reliable incorporating
state-of –the art technological features.

Speed witness Digital Video MKII Captures speed and color video to
provide crystal clear record of offence recorded on digital video tape,
with speed, speed limit, time and location of a speeding offence. The
system is available in various configurations as

(1) Portable tripod Deployment

(2) In-vehicle Deployment
(3) Fixed Pole Deployment

The system can be ordered with a choice of Radar or

medium and extended range Laser Speed sensors.
The flexible design allows operation in static mode on
a portable stand covertly on the roadside, or inside a
vehicle even inside compact patrol cars, or in the rear
of small vans on a collapsed tripod. It can also be 378
installed semi permanently in roadside enclosures.
A radio remote version allows the capture head to be
The heart of the system is the Speed witness computer, which
processes the speed measurement and converts this into data overlaid on
video from the camera, displaying the speed of the vehicle, with the
date, time, location and the officer. The system can capture speeds at
distances of 500 ~ 00 meters, it can recognize a number plate at
distances at up to 250 meters or more. The system records video on a
digital Hi8 cassette; stored as digital frames which can be recalled as

379
still shots into a sequence forming pictures, video is digitally tagged to
easily retrieve specific events …..Providing an undeniable record of the
speeding offence. For night operation a flood light is available, the
capture range at night is limited by the useful range of the flood light to
approx 35~40 meters.

380
SPEEDWITNESS DIGITAL VIDEO MKII TRAFFIC SPEED
CAMERA SYSTEM.

With speed witness Digital video MKII on the road…

 The officer can pick-up targets at over a km in highway traffic on a

large color LCD screen.
 Speeding drivers cannot deny an offence; the officer is confident issuing
a citation.
 A high resolution color video camera with a powerful x 260 zoom lens
captures the scene and records
it on a Sony Hi8 Digital Video cassette, overlaid with Speed, Speed
Limit, Date, Time, and Officer ID
text on the picture.

Speed witness Digital Video MK-II draws on the experience and

user feedback of the earlier Speed witness systems and has now been
designed in a one piece compact package that includes a bore sighted
speed gun (Lidar or Radar) and video camera, the Speed witness
computer a large color LCD display and the digital video recorder are
all mounted on a tripod designed for simple one handed operation; no
remote controls are required as every thing is in the reach of a palm.
Besides roadside use the system can also be installed inside micro
vans and cars providing great flexibility, it can capture speeds of both
approaching and receding targets. The compact Hi8 digital video
cassette recorder records the speeding offence; and the recorded video
can be reviewed in slow motion, still, zoomed and tagged, to easily
recall any portion of the recorded video. The display console houses
the Speed witness microcomputer and the color LCD display.
The standard system includes a one piece Capture Head that
embodies the following:
 A LIDAR or RADAR gun with a bore sighted x 260 zoom
color video camera.
 Speed witness Console with a 6.8” screen color LCD display.
 Digital Video Cassette Recorder.
 A strong portable tripod.

381
The system is delivered in a compact transportation case and a canvas
bag.

SPECIFICATIONS

LIDAR Choice of Medium range STALKER Lidar or - Extended

Range PROLASER –III
Range 20 ~ 1200 (or 1500 + for Pro-Laser-III) – nominal 400 ~
1000m trucks 200 ~ 800m cars
RADAR Stalker KU band DSP Radar
Range 20 ~ 1600m nominal 600 ~ 1600m trucks; 300 ~ 1200m cars
Speed 5 ~ 495 kph : +/-2 kph
Range / Accuracy
CAMERA type Solid State Color
CCD Video
Zoom x 260: x 26 optical + x 10 digital FOV 48 deg Wide : 1.3 deg
Tele
Resolution 470 TV lines: 752 x
582 pixels PAL
VIDEO Recorder Digital Video Hi-8
cassette recorder 500 TV lines
DISPLAY Large 5.8” Color LCD display.
On Screen Display 40 x 17 lines, with
programmable Organization name, Officer name, Speed, Speed Limit,
Day, Date and Time over laid on composite image
Operating voltage 12VDC nominal -2%
@ 2Amps Max
Environmental -10 ` + 50 deg C :
70% RH

382
 PREFACE

The National Highways & Motorways Police is an important and

functional part of the road safety organizations. Officers on patrol have
to drive the patrol cars themselves. The department is giving much
importance to the fact that the officers must be trained skillfully so that
they can meet the challenges and bring a good name for the
department. Usually the driving skill is taken, as the just knowing of use
of clutch, breaks, gear & accelerator, but it is not enough. The members
of this force must be well trained in all aspects. The “Driving theory” is
one of the subjects being taught during NH&MP orientation course.
The purpose of the subject “Driving theory” is just only to give the
basic knowledge and know how about the vehicles, in use of NH&MP,
and improve the level of one’s driving skill. So that the Patrol Officers
may take proper care of their vehicle in such a manner that they can get
the maximum and long lasting performance from the machine.
This book covers the practical as well as theoretical knowledge. It will
help the trainees to change themselves from ordinary to professional
drivers.

383
 IDENTIFICATION OF VEHICLE
It is very important for a driver to identify and recognize the different
kind of vehicles. He must, at least, know the following information
about the vehicle being taken or observed by him.

i) Type of vehicle
Njhy76

ii) Make and model of the vehicle.

iii) Engine capacity
iv) Gear transmission

The above mentioned points are also necessary for a police officers so
that he could give complete details about the suspected car to the
control and other mobiles.
Parts of vehicle

384
The vehicle consists of three main parts, which are as under.

I. Engine
II. Body
III. Frame

385
386
387
I. Engine
It consists of lots of different small parts. The engine changes
chemical energy into mechanical energy. It provides power to the
vehicle. It is usually situated under the bonnet, in the front part of the

body. But in some cases it is also situated at the rear part of the car.

388
II. Body
It consists of doors, floor, roof, trunk, bonnet etc. and also
contains accessories.
The things, which facilitate the driver for having better control on
the vehicle or provide comfort to him and the travelers, are called
as accessories. Some of them are as follows.

a) Air Conditioner
b) Heater
c) Radio
d) Tape recorder

e) Lights

389
 f) Horn

III. Frame
It is considered as the most important part of the vehicle, body,
engine, power train, brakes system, steering box, shock absorber,
suspension system etc are all attached to it.

To study the working of a vehicle, we can divide it in different

systems. These systems work together to move the vehicle.

I. COOLING SYSTEM

It is very important to maintain the temperature of the engine.

Because when the chemical energy changed into mechanical
energy, the engine gets hot and temperature goes to 2254 C or
4000F. So this system is used to decrease the temperature, if the
temperature stays so high, it will melt the parts of engine. To
maintain the temperature of the engine it is important that your
vehicle cooling system is working properly.

390
1. DEFINITION OF COOLANT

Coolant is a liquid, which has a property not to vaporize even at

a very high temperature. Because of this property it does not lose
its level in the tank. The use of coolant is more important in “AC
fitted” cars.

2. COOLANT LEVEL CHECKUP

To check the engine coolant level, check the low and full mark on
the water reserves tank. If the level of the coolant is between low
and full, it is all right. The coolant level may changes according to
the engine temperature. If the coolant level is below the low mark,
you should fill it up to the full mark. Always use the same coolant
as it was already in use.

3. CHANGING OF ENGINE COOLANT

If you want to change the engine coolant, you should follow the
following points as mentioned below.
a) Parked the car in a leveled surface.
b) Engine should be off and the temperature should be low.
c) Open the radiator cap Also open the radiator drain cap.
d) After that clean the radiator.
e) Close the radiator drain cap.

391
 f) Put the new coolant

LEAKAGE OF COOLANT
If the coolant is ending up so quickly in the water tank, it means
that there is a leakage in the system. The leakage is usually found
in radiator, hose pipe. Even loose clamps, of radiator pipes can
cause the same defect.
PRECAUTIONS
 Do not open the radiator cap when the temperature goes in the
red zone.
 Do not open the radiator cap when the car engine is start.
 If the coolant gets into the eyes quickly concern to the doctor.
II. ELECTRICAL SYSTEM
In the vehicle, the electrical system is also very important. The
main parts of this system are as follows.
1. Battery
2. Generator
3. Fuse box
4. Ignition coil Distributor
5. Wires

392
1. Battery
a) The level of the liquid in the battery should be at maximum
level.
b) If the liquid is at low level, the plats get hot and become very
weak.
c) Always use distilled water in the battery, but if it is not
available we can also use simple tap water.
d) Always keep the battery terminal clean. The rusty terminals
would not allow the current to pass properly.
e) Put the hot water to clean rusty terminals.
f) Keep holes of battery caps open.
g) Never hammer the terminals with any tool.

2. Generators

It supplies the current to the battery. The generator works, with

the help of fan belt, when engine revolves. It recharges the
battery.
3. Fuse Box

Generally, it is situated under the dashboard in front of the

driving seat. Fuses provide balanced current to the all-electrical
units. In case of any short circuit, fuse disconnects the power
supply to that electrical unit and make it stop functioning. If any

393
of the electrical units is not functioning, check the fuses and
replace it.

394
 4. Ignition coil.

Ignition coil increases the voltage of a 12 volts battery up to

28000 to 30000 volts and supplies it to the distributor. One must
ensure, before starting the vehicle, that the Ignition coil is not wet.

5. Distributor
It distributes current to spark plugs.

6. Wires
Wires are used to transfer current from battery to electrical units
and from distributor to spark plugs. The damaged or very old wire
must be replaced to avoid any short circuit.

III. FUEL SYSTEM

Fuel system of a vehicle consists of the following parts

1. Fuel tank
2. Fuel pump
3. Fuel Line
4. Fuel filter
5. Corroborator
6. Fuel injector pump (Diesel engine)
7. Fuel injector nozzle (Diesel engine)
8. Engine

1. Fuel Tank

395
 a) Fuel tank is used to store the fuel.
b) Keep the fuel tank filled 1/3 of its capacity, to avoid impurities
getting in to the fuel system.
2. Fuel pump

There are two types of fuel pumps

a) Electrical
b) Mechanical.
It pumps the fuel from tank to corroborator and provides fuel
with proper pressure according to engine capacity.
3. Fuel Line
It transfers fuel from tank to pump, and pump takes it to the
corroborator. Rubber, nylon or plastic layer is covering the
fuel line, as it is flammable due to having fuel inside.
4. Fuel filter
It is situated near the engine. It cleans the fuel before getting it
in to the corroborator.

5. Corroborator
It is used to provide fuel and air mixture in appropriate
proportion to the engine.
6. Fuel injector pump (Diesel engine)

396
 It is used to provide fuel and air mixture in appropriate
proportion to the engine.
7. Fuel injector nozzle (Diesel engine)
It is used to inject the diesel at the engine head with pressure.
8. Engine

Engine consists of many small parts. Which converts chemical

energy to the mechanical energy. It transmits power to the
wheels to make it move.

IV. IGNITION SYSTEM

It is a sparks unit, which is used to burn fuel. Ignition system of a

vehicle consists of the following parts

1. Battery
2. Ignition switch
3. Ignition coil
4. Distributor
5. Spark plugs
V. LUBRICATION SYSTEM
While functioning, mechanical units get into extensive friction.
Lubrication is applied to the engine to reduce friction and avoid
wear and tear.

397
 CHECKING OF ENGINE OIL
There must be a specific level of lubricant in the engine. We can
check the level of lubricant by using dipstick, present with the
engine body. The dipstick shows the level of lubricant oil in side
the engine. The level of engine oil, in a vehicle, should be checked
if it is parked on a leveled place. Before checking the level, take
out the dipstick wipe it with clean piece of cloth. Then put it back
and press down hard and again take it out. Check the oil level
carefully. If the level is at mark “F”, it is OK. But if the level is at
mark lower than “L” level, we need to add more oil.

VI. STEERING SYSTEM

The steering system is of two types.
1. Mechanical
2. Hydraulic

1. Mechanical
It takes energy directly from steering box to the wheels by using
only rods and other mechanical parts.
2. Hydraulic

398
 It takes energy from steering box to the wheels by using oil
pressure. This oil is called power oil and being contained by
flexible rubber pipe.
To keep the system functional, the level of hydraulic oil must be up
to mark.
VII. BRAKE SYSTEM

Brake system is one of the most important systems of a vehicle.

It may be applied for the following purposes.

i) To control the speed of the vehicle.

ii) To stop the vehicle.
iii) To prevent a parked vehicle for movement.

TYPES OF BREAK.
1. Hydraulic break.
2. Hydraulic with vacuum.
3. Mechanical break.
4. Hydraulic with air.
5. Air pressure break

The vehicles, which are being used by NH&MP, are using the
first three types of brakes.
1. Hydraulic brake

It takes power from brake paddle to the wheels by using oil

pressure. This oil is called brake oil and being contained by
rubber or Mattel pipe.

399
 To keep the system functional, the level of break oil must be kept
up to mark.
2. Hydraulic with vacuum

This brake system gets operational (works) if and only if the

vehicle‟s engine is turned on, other wise it gets dead. In case, this
brake system fails. The only measure, which can immediately be
taken, is to check the brake oil level. If it is below the standard
level try to bring it up to the required level. As the hydraulic brake
system does not work while the engine of vehicle is turned off, do
not get it towed. In this situation towing may lead to an accident.

3. Mechanical brake
This kind of brake works only with the mechanical parts and no
brake oil or vacuum system gets involve in it. Whenever a vehicle
is to be parked for a shorter or longer interval of time, the use of
mechanical brake is necessary as a safety measure. Use of
mechanical brake should become a habit of a good driver. If the
parking place is sloppy, the application of mechanical brake gets
prerequisite for parking.

400
VIII. ACCELERATOR SYSTEM
We can increase or decrease the speed of vehicle, With the help of this
system. When we press the accelerator paddle, it increases the supply of
fuel to the engine that increases revolution of engine.

IX. TRANSMISSION SYSTEM

It transfers the power produce by engine to the wheels. It
consists of following basic parts.
1. Clutch system
2. Gear box
3. Differential
4. Power Train

1. Clutch system
It is an integral part of the transmission system. The power
produced by the engine is connected or disconnected from the
transmission system through it. We use it for gear changing
according to the speed and power requirement. It is situated in the
between the engine and gearbox. The clutch system is also of two
types.
a) Mechanical
b) Hydraulic

a) Mechanical Clutch

It works only with mechanical parts i.e. rod or cable.

b) Hydraulic Clutch

Hydraulic clutch oil is used to transfer power from paddle to

clutch cylinder.

401
2. Gear box

It is used to put the vehicle from one gear to the other. The gear
keeps an appropriate balance between the power produced by
engine & speed.

402
 3. Differential

Differential is a part of transmission system, which take energy

from gearbox and divide it to the wheels. It is situated between the
rear wheels or front wheels.
4. Power Train
It is a system, which takes energy from the engine to the wheels,
which runs the vehicle. This system is consists of clutch, gearbox,
propeller shaft, universal joint, slip joint and differential.

X. SUSPENSION SYSTEM

403
 It protects the travelers against the shocks while travelling on an
uneven road. These are of following types:
1. Shock absorber
2. Coil spring
3. Semi-elliptic Spring
If the vehicle causes abnormal and unusual bumps, during the
driving on uneven roads, it means the suspension system is not
working properly. This fault may only be rectified in the
workshop.

XI. DASH CONTROLS

Most of the control panel of your car is located on the dashboard

behind the steering wheel. Sometimes it extends onto the car‟s
console, between the two front seats, and onto your steering
column. Little duplicate fragments of the control panel are
scattered around the interior of your vehicle, such as automatic
door locks, extra light switches, etc. The dash controls enable you
to operate your headlights, turn signals, horn, windshield wipers,
heater, defroster, air conditioning, radio, etc. All of the vehicle‟s
control should be within the reach of the driver. The control panel
also contains all of your gauges: gas, temperature, tachometer, etc.
These enable you to monitor the operating conditions of your
engine and charging system, fuel level, oil pressure and coolant
temperature. Warning lights come on to alert you to dangerous
coolant temperatures, or loss of oil pressure.

404
XII. AIR CONDITIONING & HEATING SYSTEM

Air conditioning heating system is to add comfort in driving

against extreme weather. We expect the heating to keep us warm
when it is cold outside, and the air conditioning system to keep
us cool when it’s hot.
We get heat from the heater core, sort of a secondary radiator,
which is part of the car’s cooling system.
We get air conditioning from the car’s elaborated air
conditioning system. Despite its relatively small size, the cooling
system has to deal with an enormous amount of heat produces
by the engine from friction and the heat of combustion. The
cooling system has to remove about 6,000 BTU of heat per
minute. This is a lot more heat than we need to heat a large
home in cold weather. It’s good to know that some of this heat
can be put to the useful purpose of keeping us warm. Air
conditioning makes driving much more comfortable in hot
weather. Your car’s air conditioner cleans and dehumidifies
(removes excess moisture), the outside air entering your car.
Most people think the air conditioning system’s job is to add
“cold” air to the interior of the car. Actually, there is no such
thing as “cold.” Just and absence of heat, or less heat than our
bodies is comfortable with. The job of the air conditioning
system is really to “remove” the heat that makes us

405
uncomfortable, and return the air to the car’s interior in a” un-
heated condition. Air conditioning, or cooling, is really process
of removing heat from an object (like air). A compressor
circulates a liquid refrigerant called Refrigerant-12 (we tend to
call it ’Freon’” a trade name. The way we call copy machines
“Xerox” machines). The compressor moves the Refrigerant-12
from an evaporator, through a condenser and expansion valve,
right back to the evaporator. The evaporator is right in front of a
fan that pulls the hot, humid air out of the car’s interior. The
refrigerant makes the hot air’s moisture condense into drops of
water, removing the heat from the air. Once the water is
removed the “cool” air is sent back into the car’s interior.
Sometimes we worry when we catch our car making a water
puddle on the ground, but are relieved to discover that it’s only
water dripping from the air conditioning system’s condenser (no
color, no smell, and it dries!).

AIR DUCTS

The air ducts control the passage of hot or cold air into the interior
of the car. They are operated by a control on the dash, either
manually or automatically.

CONTROLS
Most air conditioning/heating systems have three possible air
settings. One is to re-circulate the air that is in the car, a second is

406
to use only air from the outside of the car, and a third is to mix
some of the outside air with the air re-circulating inside the car.

407
 HAZARDS
Refrigerant-12 is extremely dangerous. Many special precautions
must be taken when it is present.
 It can freeze whatever it contacts (including your eyes).
 It is heavier than air and can suffocate you.
 It produces a poisonous gas when it comes in contact with
an open flame.

TROUBLE SHOOTING

I. If your vehicle does not start, make sure that

 Fuel tank has sufficient fuel.

408
  You have followed the correct starting procedure.
1. If the engine is not turning over or turning over too slowly.

i) Check that the battery terminals are well tight and

clean.
ii) If the terminals are OK, and you want to check the
battery power, switch on the interior light.
iii) If the interior light is dim or goes out, while cranking.
The battery is discharged. You may try jump-starting
method.
iv) If the battery is OK and the engine yet not starts. It
needs adjustment or repair. This fault may only be
rectified in the workshop.

Note: Don’t try a pull start. It may damage the vehicle or cause a
collision when the engine gets start.

2. If the engine turns over at its normal speed but doesn’t

start:

Gasoline powered vehicles

i) Check that all the push-on connectors are tight at the
distributor and spark plugs.
ii) If the connectors are OK, the engine may be flooded
because of repeated cranking.

409
Starting a flooded engine: -

i) 4A-FE engine- Turn the key to “START” with the

accelerator paddle held down. Keep the key and
accelerator paddle for 15 seconds and release them.
Then try starting the engine with your foot off the
accelerator pedal

410
 ii) 2E engines- press the accelerator paddle and hold it to
the floor for 15 or 20 seconds. Then try starting the
engine without releasing the accelerator paddle. Do not
pump the paddle just keep it holds to the floor. If the
engine does not start after 15 seconds of cracking,
release the key, wait a few minutes and try again.

Diesel powered vehicles

i) If you are starting the engine that has died from an empty
tank, you may have needed to bleed the fuel system before
cracking the engine. The engine may not start after
refueling. In such case, operate the priming pump until
you feel more resistance.
ii) If the fuel system is OK, but the engine still not start it
needs adjustment or repair. This fault may only be
rectified in the workshop.

Note: - Do not crank for more than 15 seconds at a time. This may over
heat the starter and wiring systems.

411
3. Jump starting procedure: -

i) If the booster battery is installed in another vehicle,

make sure the vehicles are not touching. Turn off all
unnecessary lights and accessories.
ii) If your vehicle is equipped with conventional battery,
remove all the vent plugs discharge battery. Lay a cloth
on over the open vent of the battery. This helps reduce
explosion, hazardous, personal injuries and burns.
iii) If the engine in the vehicle with the booster is not
running, start it and let it run for a few minutes during
jumping run the engine at about 2000 RPM with
accelerator paddle lightly depressed.
iv) Connect the jumper cable in the exact order shown in
the illustration put the positive terminal on the (“+”
mark) and negative (“ - ” mark) to the engine or body
surface.

412
Note: - First connect the “+ve” cable to the discharged battery
and then to the booster battery, connect the negative cable to the
booster battery and then to a solid stationery, metallic point (e.g.
engine hanging hook) away from the battery.

v) Start your engine in a normal way. After

starting, run it at about 2000 RPM for few
minutes.
vi) Carefully disconnect the cable in the exact
reverse order. The negative and then the positive
cable.
II. IF THE VEHICLE OVER HEATED:-

In case of gasoline engine, if your engine coolant temperature

indicates over heating, or you experience a loss of power, or you
hear a loud knocking or pinging noise, the engine is over
heated. You should follow the following procedure: -

i) Pull safely off the road, stop the vehicle and turn on your
hazard warning lights. Put the transmission in neutral and
apply the hand brake. Turn off the air-conditioner if it is
being used.
ii) If coolant is steamed or boiling out of the radiator or
reservoir stop the engine. Wait until the steam subsidized

413
 before opening the hood. If there is no coolant boiling
over or steam, leave the engine running and make sure the
electrical fan is operating. If it is not turn the engine off.
iii) Visually check to see if the engine drive belt (water pump
belt) is broken or lose. Look for obvious coolant leaks from
the radiator, hoses, and under the vehicle. However, note
that water draining from the air conditioning is normal if it
has been used.
iv) If the engine drive belt is broken or the coolant is leaking,
stop the engine immediately. Call the workshop for
assistance.
v) If the drive belt is OK and there are obvious leak, check the
coolant reservoir. If it is dry, add water to the reservoir
while the engine is running. Fill it about half full.
vi) After the engine coolant temperature has cooled to normal,
again check the coolant level in the reservoir. If necessary,
bring it up to half full again. Serious coolant lose indicates
a leak in the system. You should have it checked as soon
as possible at your workshop.

414
III. CHECKING OF FUEL FILTER

In case, engine is not getting start. Check fuel filter, also. If fuel
filter has choked, it will not allow fuel to move into the
corroborator.

IV. REASONS OF SMOKE

If your vehicle is emitting smoke through silencer, then check

for the following faults: -

1. Choked air filter does not allow proper air supply to the
engine due to which smoke is produced by engine.
2. In case of diesel engine, faulty pump causes smoke. And in
case of petrol engine, miss adjusted corroborator causes
smoke.
3. After work up the piston inside the cylinder gets loosens
and allows engine oil to get at the top of piston and that oil
burns with fuel that cause smoke. This fault may only be
rectified in workshop.
V. Miss-fire of engine (Gasoline engine)

1. Whenever cables are detached from spark plugs or not

attached in proper sequence, engine may cause miss-fire.
In such case fix the boots firmly and in proper order.

415
 Usually there are marks on distributor cover to identify the
matching cable. So that engine gets proper firing sequence.
2. The use of old or damaged plugs/ cables also cause miss-
fire. In such case replace them.

MAINTENANCE

I. CHANGING OF OIL AND OIL FILTER

1. Stop vehicle at leveled surface.

2. Worm up the engine until the engine coolant temperature
gauge shows a rise. Then turn engine off.
3. Open oil filler cap this allows air to enter the engine as the
oil drains.
4. Open the drain plug and allow the oil to drain fully, be
careful, as oil may be hot.
5. If oil filter requires to be replaced, install a new oil filter
instead of old one.
6. Close the drain plug tightly, after complete drain.
7. Put new engine oil into the engine then start it and keep it
running at its own pace till oil warning light gets Off.
Check the leakage.
8. Switch off the engine and check the oil level.

416
II. GEAR, DIFFERENTIAL AND HYDRAULIC OIL

1. Gear Oil: - Gearbox requires lubrication for better

performance and to reduce wear and tear. The level of
gearbox should be checked periodically. If it is reduced, fill
it up to mark and check leakage, if any. Always use
recommended gear oil as per specification.

2. Differential Oil: - The differential also requires

lubrication. The level of differential should be checked
periodically. If it is reduced, fill it up to mark and check
leakage, if any. Always use recommended differential oil as
per specification.

3. Hydraulic Oil: - The vehicles contain hydraulic system

facilitate the driving. NH&MP have the vehicles with
hydraulic system. To keep this system operational, a
certain level of proper hydraulic oil is required. Its level
should be checked periodically and be filled if required.
The performance of steering, brakes and clutch may
reduce, if the oils are not up to level or not of the specific
grade. Always use recommended hydraulic oils as per
specification.

III. WHEEL AND TIRE EXAMINATION

417
1. Tires should be inspected for wears, cracking, bulging and
objects cut in the tread. If excessive wears, cracks, bulging
or deep cuts are found, the tire should be replaced. Some
of new tires have a built-in tread wear indicator. When
wear indicator is visible, the tire should be replaced. The
tires must have a tread depth of at-least 1.6- mm (for LTV)
across the central three-quarters of the breadth of the tire
and around the entire circumference.
2. The tires older than six years should be checked by a
qualified technician. Because, the tires deteriorate with age
even if they have never been used.
3. Do not use a deformed wheel even if it has been repaired.
Such wheels could have structural damage and can fail
without warning. Unbalanced wheels may affect vehicle’s
handling and tire life. Even with regular use, wheels can
get out of balance. The wheels should be balanced as
required.
4. Examine tires every two weeks for signs of damage, uneven
wears, splits or cracks.
5. Keep track of tire tread depth by using tread depth gauge.
The legal requirement is 1.6mm for light vehicles and 1.0
mm for heavy vehicles.

418
 6. Check the tires pressure every week using reliable gauge.
When the tires are cold.
7. Front and rear tires wear, behaves in different manners
especially at higher speed. Don’t presume that all tires will
be in the same condition.
8. Ask a garage to check the wheel alignment of your vehicle
in regular intervals, especially after any collision or heavy
kerb impact. Incorrect wheel alignment leads to uneven
and accelerated tire wear.
9. Aggressive driving styles can take thousand of miles from
the life expectancy of tires. Harsh acceleration and
braking will reduce the tread significantly.
10. When changing tires, never take risk of buying worn or
second-hand tires, a brand new tire is always a safer
investment.
11. The tire pressure of every vehicle is different. Check your
vehicle tire pressure according to owner’s manual book.

TAKING THE VEHICLE

I. COCK PIT DRILL.

It is a procedure, which a driver should adopt while taking charge

of a vehicle. It helps to minimize the risk of on coming hazards
during his journey. It also improves the safer driving skills.

419
Take care before opening the driver‟s door. Opening the door,
carelessly can put you and other in danger. It may cause others to
brake or swerve and even an accident can happen.

1. DOORS:-
Check, the all doors are securely closed. You are responsible
for the safety of your passengers too.

2. SEAT:-
Adjust it for comfortable use of foot and steering control.
Push the pedal on the far left (clutch) down to the floor. You
should be able to do this without stretching.

3. STEERING:-
Adjust steering position for comfortable control. It should
not be so low that it knocks your knee on the steering wheel.
And it should not be so high that it hinders your dashboard
view.

4. SEATBELTS:-
Ensure that all seatbelts are functioning properly. The law
requires that all passengers fasten seatbelts, unless they have
an exemption certificate. It is the driver‟s responsibility to
ensure that the children under 14 are being fastened.

5. MIRRORS:-

420
 Normally, there are three back view mirrors i.e. one in the
center and two at the side of vehicle. These help driver to
see the vehicles coming from backside.
Adjust your mirrors such as You be able to see clearly in all
back view mirrors with the minimum of head movement.
When adjusting, hold the mirror keeping your fingers off the
glass. Adjust the door mirrors to reduce any „blind spots‟.

Now you are ready to switch on the engine, but before you do you
have to check that the handbrake is on and the gear lever is in
neutral.

DRIVING THE VEHICLE

I. STARTING OF ENGINE.

1. Before cranking

i) Apply the parking brake firmly.

ii) Turn off unnecessary lights and accessories.
iii) Press the clutch pedal to the floor and shift the gear
into neutral. Hold the clutch pedal to the floor until
the engine is started.

2. Starting the engine (4A- FE engine)

Normal starting procedure

421
 The fuel injection system automatically controls the proper
air-fuel mixture for starting. You can start cold or hot engine as
follows
i) With your foot off the accelerator pedal, crank the
engine by turning the key to “START”. Release it
when the engine starts.
ii) After the engine runs for about 10 seconds, you are
ready to drive. If the weather is below freezing let
the engine worm up for a few minutes before
driving.
If the engine stalls
Simply start it, using the correct procedure given in normal
starting.

Note
Don‟t crank for more than 15 Seconds, at a time. This may
overheat the starter and wiring system.
Don‟t race a cold engine
If the engine becomes difficult to start or stalls frequently,
have the engine checked immediately.

3. Starting the engine (2C engine)

Normal starting procedure

i) Turn the key to “ON” and verify the engine

preheating indicator light has come on. Keep the
key in the “ON” position until the light goes off.-0
ii) With the accelerator pedal fully down to the floor,
crank the engine by turning the engine to “START”.
Release the key and accelerator pedal when the
engine starts.

422
 iii) After the engine warms up about 10 seconds, you
are ready to drive. If the weather is below freezing,
let it warm up for a few minutes before driving.

If engine is warm
i) With the accelerator pedal about half way down,
crank the engine by turning the key to “START”.
Release the key and accelerator pedal when the
engine starts.
If the engine dose not start, try the above normal
starting procedure.
If the engine stalls
i) Simply restart it using the correct procedure given
above.

Note
Don‟t crank for more than 30 seconds at a time. This may
overheat the starter and wiring system.
Don‟t race a cold engine.
If the engine becomes difficult to start or stalls frequently,
have the engine checked immediately.

II. HOW TO CHANGE GEAR ( WHEN AND WHY):

423
-
While driving, you should be able to change gears without looking
down at the lever or your feet. You may practice this maneuver,
sitting in the car with the engine switched off and the clutch
pressed down.

Most of the vehicles have 5 forward gears and a reverse gear. The
transmission pattern is usually printed or embossed on the top of
gear lever.
Neutral is the middle position on the gear lever.
To engage the reverse gear you have to push the gear lever down
while press it toward right. There are also some other setups in
different vehicles. So always check where the reverse is, on a new
vehicle.

The gears are used to maintain a balance between speed and

power of your vehicle.

424
 1st Gear is used for moving off, and for creeping slowly in the
traffic. We can shift the gears up as the engine ease up to maintain
the speed and shift down as the engine feels sinking and not able
to manage the speed.
The selection of proper gear is very important for your driving
skill. The speed in different gears may differ with the load on the
vehicle or ascending and descending drive or with road condition.
In normal circumstances, we can follow the following
approximate speed chart for up shifting or down shifting.

Up shifting
GEAR Km/h
1 to 2 24
2 to 3 40
3 to 4 65
4 to 5 72

Down shifting
GEAR Km/h
5 to 4 50
4 to 3 40
3 to 2 30
2 to 1 20
Up shifting too soon or down shifting too late will cause lugging
and, possibly, pinging. Regularly revving the engine to maximum
speed in each gear will cause excessive engine wear and high fuel
consumption.
Maximum allowable speeds in each gear are as follows:

425
4A-FE engine
GEAR Km/h
1 52
2 86
3 125
4 169

2C engine
GEAR Km/h
1 40
2 69
3 107
4 149

Do not down shift if you are going faster than the maximum
allowable speed for the next lower gear.
Make sure the vehicle is completely stopped before shifting into
reverse.

To practice, first find a fairly straight, wide road where there is

little or no other traffic.

III. STEERING

Hold the steering wheel gently. Fold your palm loosely over the
rim and rest your thumbs lightly up the flat of the wheel. Relax
your shoulders and keep your arms free of your body.

1. To steer accurately you should look well ahead at where you

are going. You must be able to operate the main controls
without looking at them. Looking down will result in your
car wondering from side to side.

426
 2. Try to keep both hands on the wheel when braking or
cornering.

3. Although you should keep both hands on the wheel as much

as possible, there are times when you need to change gears
or operate the lights, wipers and other controls. When
learning find a straight, quiet road where you can steer with
one hand. While you practice using the controls.

4. When approaching right bends, move your right hand to the

top of the wheel ready to pull down to steer round the curve
in the road. Your right hand should always stay in the right
part of the steering wheel.

5. When approaching left hand bends, move your left hand to

the top of wheel to pull it down to steer round the curve in
the road. The left hand should stay in the left part of the
steering wheel. When turning, try not to cross your hands
over one another
6. When turning left it is important for you to maintain a
position about a meter from the kerb.
 Too close to the kerb and your rear wheel may roll over
the kerb or even strike it, which could damage to the
tire.
 Too close to the kerb could cause you to swing out and
into the path of approaching vehicles.
 Too close to the kerb and swinging out just before your
turn could cause the following vehicle to swerve across
the road to pass you.

IV. CORRECT USE OF INDICATORS

427
  Indicators are used to inform the other road users about your
intention of turning or lane changing.
 Never use indicator for any other communication purpose.

V. USE OF HAZARD WARNING LIGHTS

Hazard warning lights are used when you are going to reduce the
speed or stopping due to any hazard i.e. break down etc.

VI. SAFE DISTANCE

The minimum permissible distance between moving vehicles is

called safe distance. Under normal conditions you should have a
“two-second gap” between your car and the car in front. On wet or
ice road and at night, you must increase the gap. Do not react if
someone else cuts into the gap. Pull back your vehicle again to
maintain safe distance.

The “two-second gap” should be extended to four seconds in the

following situations:

 In cold freezing weather.

 When your vehicle is heavily loaded.
 When you are towing another vehicle.

VII. LANE CHANGING

Always drive in the extreme left lane whenever you are able to
drive in it. Indicate your intention to the driver of the vehicle
following you, a reasonable distance before you attempt to change
your lane. Swerving between vehicles in different lanes causes
many accidents.

428
  Check the traffic through the back view mirror especially on
the side where you intend to move.
 If you find a safe gap, switch on the indicator.
 Look over your shoulder to minimize the “blind spots”.
 Change your lane gently.

VIII. OVERTAKING:

You can overtake a vehicle ahead of you only when you are
absolutely sure about safety. When you are driving at higher
speed, perception of distances and speed can be distorted.
Maximum number of road accidents occurs while vehicles are
trying to overtake.
Remember that overtaking is not your right, anyway. You don‟t
have any right of way or passage for overtaking purpose. You
should maneuver only and only when you don‟t cause any hazard
for any other road user.

429
  Always overtake from the right on straight roads, where you
can see farther.
 Signal your intentions of overtaking by flashing the
headlights, at night.
 You must not forget the lane changing procedure and safe
distance concept while overtaking.
 Be particularly cautious while overtaking a bus that has
stopped at a bus stop as a lot of people may try to cross the
road from the front of the bus.
 Never overtake a vehicle that is already overtaking another
vehicle.

 Once you start overtaking a vehicle do it quickly.

 Never show your reaction if some one is overtaking you
wrongly.
 Always facilitate the overtaking vehicle.
 Return back to your lane when you are able to see the
overtaken vehicle in the back view mirror.

IX. FUEL CONSUMPTION

The fuel consumption of your vehicle depends upon that how you
drive and take care of your vehicle. Aggressive driving and
improper maintenance affects the fuel consumption and also cause
increases in smoke emissions levels.
Follow these simple-driving tips to increase the fuel consumption
and reduce the smoke emission of your car.
 Drive moderately. High-speed driving and jackrabbit starts
increase both, fuel consumption and smoke emissions.

 Keep your vehicle well tuned. Simple maintenance- such as

regular oil changes, air filter changes, and spark plug
replacements – will lengthen the life of your car as well as
improve fuel economy and minimize emissions.

430
  Inflate your tires as per recommendation. Keeping your tires
properly inflated saves fuel by reducing the amount of drag of
your engine.

 Keep track of your fuel economy. A drop in your car‟s fuel

economy can be a sign of engine trouble. Keeping track of your
fuel economy on a regular basis can let you know when
something is malfunctioning.

 Don‟t let your car idle for more than a minute. During start-up,
your engine burns extra gasoline. However, letting your engine
idle for more than a minute burns more fuel than turning off the
engine and restarting it.

 Park in the shade. It will minimize evaporation of fuel and keep

your car cooler in the summer.

USE OF ACCESSORIES

I. HEAD LIGHTS

Always use the headlights as per requirement so that view is clear.

In clear weather, use headlights ½ hrs after sun set and ½ hrs
before sun rise. Keep light dim during night drive for on coming
traffic.
To prevent the battery from being discharged, do not leave the
lights on for a long period when the engine is not running.

431
II. DIPPER:

For high beam, push the lever away from you. Pull it toward you
for low beam. For the headlight flasher, pull it further back.

III. WIPERS:

 The key must be in the “ON” position.

 To turn the wipers on, move the lever.

 To make the washer squirt, push the button on the end of the
lever.

 The wipers will operate at intervals when the lever is in the

“INT” position.

 If the washer does not work, check the washer tank whether it
is empty.

 Don‟t operate the wipers if the windshield is dry. It may scratch

the glass

IV. REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER SWITCH:

 The key must be in the “ON” position.

 To defog or defrost the rear window, push the switch.

 The thin heater wires, inside of the rear screen, will quickly
clear the window surface. An indicator light in the instrument
panel will illuminate to indicate that the defogger is working.

 When the surface has cleared, turn the defogger off.

Continuous use may cause the battery to discharge, especially

432
 during stop-and-go driving. The defogger is not designed for
drying rainwater or for melting snow.
NOTE:

 To prevent the battery from being discharged, turn the switch

on only, when the engine is running.

 When cleaning the inside of the rear window, be careful not to

scratch or damage the heater wires.

V. KEYS:

The key works in every lock.

Since the side doors, trunk lid and back door can be locked
without a key, you should always carry a spare key in case you
accidentally lock your key inside the vehicle.

VI. DASH BOARD READING.

A good driver must understands the dash board information.

Before starting engine check all gauges.

These are as follows: -

1. GAUGES:

All gauges present in dashboard tell the working of those systems.

433
i) Fuel gauge

The gauge works when the ignition switch is on and

indicates the approximate quantity of fuel remaining in the
tank.
It is a good idea to keep the tank over ¼ full

434
ii) Temperature gauge

The gauge indicates the engine coolant temperature when

the ignition switch is on

2. METERS:

Normally two types of meter are there.

i) Speedometer

It gives information about speed in Km. or Miles. It also

contains Odometer and trip meter

435
a) Odometer
The odometer records the total distance the vehicle has
been driven

b) Trip meter
The trip meter may be set to zero to record the distance on
each trip.

436
ii) Tech-O-Meter

It indicates the engine speed in thousand of rpm

(Revolution per minute)

437
3. SERVICE REMINDER INDICATORS:

These indicators are present in the form of Icons. If these

Icons appear on dashboard, then you must not ignore the

indication.

438
a) Brake System Warning Light
b) Discharge Warning Light
c) Low Oil Pressure Warning Light
d) Malfunction indicator Lamp
e) Low Fuel Level Warning light
f) Open Door Warning Light
g) Fuel Filter Warning Light (Diesel Powered Vehicles)

439
 NH&MP PATROL VEHICLE ACCESSORIES

I. STROBE LIGHTS:

All patrol vehicles of NH&MP contains strobe lights. Patrol

officer may use them when on an emergency run. These lights may also
be used when stopped at an incident or accident place. Strobe light must
not be used in normal condition.

II. ALLAY LIGHT: (right and left)

These lights are used to through light from your vehicle in the
right angle direction. Keep them off in normal condition.

III. FLASHER LIGHTS:

You may use flasher lights during routine patrolling to show your
presence. Avoid regular use of these lights to keep up the battery
power.

IV. PUBLIC ADDRESS SYSTEM:

This system has a verity of built in Siren tones along with whistle
and horn. It also has an amplifier along with mike and can be used
to address or worn or instruct the road users.

VI. WIRELESS SYSTEM

All patrol vehicles, used by NH&MP are fitted with wireless

system.

440
 DURING THE DRIVING TEST

YOUR EXAMINER WILL NOTE THE FOLLOWING.

1. How you start your journey.

 Do you turn your head and look back?

 Do you signal and wait until it is safe?

2. Control of Vehicle

 Accelerator control
 Use of brake.
 Steering wheel.
 Other controls

3. Driving in Traffic

 Lane usage
 Signals
 Checking of “Blind spots” before pulling away from curbs or
making lane changes.
 Proper signal distance before turning.

3. Merging

 On and off freeway.

4. Traffic Signs

 How you obey them and how you drive through intersections
 How you yield the right-of-way.

5. Steering

441
  Turning to the right or left through correct lane to the proper
lane of other road.
 Turning too wide or sharply.

6. Stopping

 Stop smoothly and at the right spot.

7. Breaking

 In a straight line.
 Looking over your right shoulder.
 With complete control of the vehicle.

8. Speed control

 Following the speed limit.

 Had you adjusted speed according the road Conditions.
 Having consideration about Weather, pedestrians and visible
distance ahead.

9. Distance Judging

 Your distance from other cars and pedestrians. When

following, or passing the other traffic.

442
10. Road courtesies

 Do you respect the rights of other road users?

11. Manual Signals

 You will be asked to demonstrate the manual signals.

 You must use the electric turn signals during the test.

12. Three Point turn

You will be asked to demonstrate or explain a three-point turn.

443